TRANSAXLE & TRANSMISSION INFINITI


PRECAUTIONS
TM-9
< PRECAUTION > [6MT: FS6R96A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000006053760
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and
“SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s)
with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly
causing serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation after Battery Disconnect
INFOID:0000000006053761
NOTE:
• Before removing and installing any control units, first turn the push-button ignition switch to the LOCK position,
then disconnect both battery cables.
• After finishing work, confirm that all control unit connectors are connected properly, then re-connect both
battery cables.
• Always use CONSULT-III to perform self-diagnosis as a part of each function inspection after finishing work.
If a DTC is detected, perform trouble diagnosis according to self-diagnosis results.
For vehicle with steering lock unit, if the battery is disconnected or discharged, the steering wheel will lock and
cannot be turned.
If turning the steering wheel is required with the battery disconnected or discharged, follow the operation procedure
below before starting the repair operation.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Connect both battery cables.
NOTE:
Supply power using jumper cables if battery is discharged.
2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to ACC position.
(At this time, the steering lock will be released.)
3. Disconnect both battery cables. The steering lock will remain released with both battery cables disconnected
and the steering wheel can be turned.
4. Perform the necessary repair operation.
5. When the repair work is completed, re-connect both battery cables. With the brake pedal released, turn
the push-button ignition switch from ACC position to ON position, then to LOCK position. (The steering
wheel will lock when the push-button ignition switch is turned to LOCK position.)
6. Perform self-diagnosis check of all control units using CONSULT-III.
TM-10
< PRECAUTION > [6MT: FS6R96A]
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000006053762
When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc.
Precaution for Battery Service (for V9X Models) INFOID:0000000006059488
When disconnect the battery cable, pay attention to the following.
• Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.
• Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is running.
• Before disconnecting battery cables, turn ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 4 minutes.
• After high-load driving, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait
for at least 15 minutes to remove the battery cable.
NOTE:
Turbocharger cooling pump may operate in a few minutes after the
ignition switch is turned OFF.
General Precautions INFOID:0000000006053796
CAUTION:
• Never reuse drained gear oil.
• Check the oil level or replace oil with vehicle on level ground.
• During removal or installation, keep inside of transmission clear of dust or dirt.
• Check for the correct installation status prior to removal or disassembly. If matching marks are
required, be certain they never interfere with the function of the parts they are applied.
• In principle, tighten bolts or nuts gradually in several steps working diagonally from inside to outside.
If tightening sequence is specified, observe it.
• Never damage sliding surfaces and mating surfaces.
PIIB3706J
SEF289H
PREPARATION
TM-11
< PREPARATION > [6MT: FS6R96A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000006053764
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000006053765
Tool number
Tool name
Description
KV32103600
Drift
a: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia.
b: 27 mm (1.06 in) dia.
c: 50 mm (1.97 in) dia.
d: 70 mm (2.76 in) dia.
Installing front oil seal
JPDIC0798ZZ
Tool name Description
Drift
a: Approx. 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 45 - 50 mm (1.77 - 1.97 in) dia.
c: More than 220 mm (8.66 in)
Installing front oil seal
S-NT117
TM-12
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [6MT: FS6R96A]
COMPONENT PARTS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000006053766
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
1 : Back-up lamp switch
JPDIC0782ZZ
1 : Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
JPDIC0783ZZ
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
TM-13
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [6MT: FS6R96A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
Synchronizer Mechanism INFOID:0000000006053767
DOUBLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER
The 4th, 3rd, and reverse gears are equipped with a double-cone synchronizer to reduce the operating force
of the control lever.
TRIPLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER
The 1st and 2nd gears are equipped with a triple-cone synchronizer to reduce the operating force of the control
lever.
TM-14
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [6MT: FS6R96A]
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000006053768
1.CHECK BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH
1. Disconnect back-up lamp switch connector. Refer to TM-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Check continuity between back-up lamp switch terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace back-up lamp switch. Refer to TM-28, "Removal and Installation".
Terminal Condition Continuity
1 2
Reverse gear position Existed
Except reverse gear position Not existed
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
TM-15
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [6MT: FS6R96A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000006053769
1.CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
1. Disconnect park/neutral position (PNP) switch connector. Refer to TM-29, "Removal and Installation".
2. Check continuity between park/neutral position (PNP) switch terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch. Refer to TM-29, "Removal and Installation".
Terminal Condition Continuity
1 2
Neutral position Existed
Except neutral position Not existed
TM-16
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [6MT: FS6R96A]
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000006053770
Use the chart below to find the cause of the symptom. The numbers indicate the order of the inspection. If necessary,
repair or replace these parts.
NOTE:
When transmission inner parts are malfunctioning, replace transmission assembly.
SUSPECTED PARTS
(Possible cause)
OIL (Oil level is low)
OIL (Wrong oil)
OIL (Oil level is high)
GASKET (Damaged)
FRONT OIL SEAL (Worn or damaged)
SHIFT CONTROL LINKAGE (Worn)
CHECK PLUG RETURN SPRING AND CHECK BALL (Worn or damaged)
SHIFT FORK (Worn)
GEAR (Worn or damaged)
BEARING (Worn or damaged)
BAULK RING (Worn or damaged)
INSERT SPRING (Damaged)
Reference
TM-17
TM-17
TM-36
TM-24
Refer to NOTE.
Symptoms
Noise 1 2 3 3
Oil leakage 3 1 2 2
Hard to shift or will not shift 1 1 2 2 2
Jumps out of gear 1 1 2 2
GEAR OIL
TM-17
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [6MT: FS6R96A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
GEAR OIL
Exploded View INFOID:0000000006053771
Inspection INFOID:0000000006053772
OIL LEAKAGE
Make sure that gear oil is not leaking from transmission or around it.
OIL LEVEL
1. Remove filler plug (with gasket) (1) from transmission assembly.
2. Check the oil level from filler plug mounting hole as shown in the
figure.
CAUTION:
Never start engine while checking oil level.
3. Install filler plug (with gasket) to transmission assembly.
CAUTION:
Never reuse filler plug (with gasket).
4. Tighten filler plug (with gasket) to the specified torque.
Draining INFOID:0000000006053773
1. Start the engine and let it run to warm up transmission.
2. Stop the engine.
1. Transmission assembly 2. Drain plug (with gasket) 3. Filler plug (with gasket)
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for the symbols in the figure.
JPDIC0803GB
JPDIC0749ZZ
TM-18
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [6MT: FS6R96A]
GEAR OIL
3. Remove drain plug (with gasket) (1) from transmission assembly
and then drain gear oil.
4. Install drain plug (with gasket) to transmission assembly.
CAUTION:
Never reuse drain plug (with gasket).
5. Tighten drain plug (with gasket) to the specified torque.
Refilling INFOID:0000000006053774
1. Remove filler plug (with gasket) (1) from transmission assembly.
2. Fill with new gear oil to transmission as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Never reuse drained gear oil.
3. After refilling gear oil, check the oil level. Refer to TM-17,
"Inspection".
4. Install filler plug (with gasket) to transmission assembly.
CAUTION:
Never reuse filler plug (with gasket).
5. Tighten filler plug (with gasket) to the specified torque.
JPDIC0748ZZ
Oil grade and
viscosity
: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants".
Oil capacity : Refer to TM-38, "General Specification".
JPDIC0749ZZ
SHIFT CONTROL
TM-19
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
SHIFT CONTROL
Exploded View INFOID:0000000006053775
JPDIC0769GB
TM-20
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A]
SHIFT CONTROL
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006053776
REMOVAL
1. Shift the control lever to neutral position.
2. Remove rear propeller shaft assembly. Refer to DLN-131, "Removal and Installation".
3. Set a suitable jack to the transmission assembly.
CAUTION:
When setting a suitable jack, be careful so that it does not contact with the wire harness.
4. Remove rear engine mounting member mounting bolts. Refer to EM.
5. Lower a suitable jack to the position where the snap ring can be removed.
CAUTION:
The transmission assembly must not interfere with the high pressure piping and low pressure piping.
6. Remove snap ring (1), plane washers, and spring washer from
control rod.
CAUTION:
Never lose snap ring, plane washer, and spring washer.
7. Remove control rod from control lever.
CAUTION:
Never lose control rod bushing LH and control rod bushing
RH.
8. Remove control rod bushing LH and control rod bushing RH
from control lever.
CAUTION:
Never lose control rod bushing LH and control rod bushing
RH.
9. Remove control lever boot C from control lever.
10. Install rear engine mounting member mounting bolts. Refer to EM.
11. Remove shift knob with the following procedure.
a. Release pawls on console boot. Refer to IP-43, "M/T MODELS : Removal and Installation".
1. Shift knob 2. Insulator 3. Seat
4. Console boot 5. Felt 6. Hole cover
7. Control lever boot A 8. Hole insulator 9. Control lever
10. Control lever boot B 11. Guide plate 12. Control lever spring
13. Control lever housing 14. Holder bracket 15. Control lever boot C
16. Bracket pin 17. Outer bushing 18. Inner bushing
19. Snap ring 20. Plane washer 21. Spring washer
22. Control rod bushing RH 23. Control rod bushing LH 24. Control rod
25. Holder rubber 26. Control link 27. Control pin
28. Snap ring 29. Transmission assembly 30. Striking rod
: Apply grease, Multemp AC-J (Kyodo Yushi make) or DOW CORNING TORAY SH33L GREASE (Dow Corning Toray make)
or an equivalent.
: Apply Thread Locking Sealant, Loctite 242 or an equivalent.
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.
JPDIC0781ZZ
SHIFT CONTROL
TM-21
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
b. Lift console boot and then set suitable pliers to control lever ( ).
CAUTION:
Put waste cloth (A) between a suitable pliers and control
lever to avoid damaging control lever.
c. Set suitable pliers to shift knob.
CAUTION:
Put waste cloth (A) between a suitable pliers and shift knob
to avoid damaging shift knob.
d. Keeping control lever in place with a suitable pliers, loosen shift
knob with a suitable pliers.
NOTE:
Remove shift knob from control lever keeping a suitable pliers in
place because a certain power to turn shift knob is still necessary
even after adhesive is peeled.
e. Remove shift knob from control lever.
f. Remove insulator from shift knob.
12. Remove seat from control lever.
CAUTION:
Never lose seat.
13. Remove console finisher assembly and center console assembly. Refer to IP-43, "M/T MODELS :
Removal and Installation".
14. Remove felt.
15. Remove harness clips from hole cover.
16. Remove hole cover, control lever boot A, and hole insulator.
17. Remove control lever boot B (1) from control lever housing as
shown in the figure.
18. Remove guide plate mounting bolts while holding guide plate.
19. Remove control lever and control lever spring from control lever
housing.
INSTALLATION
1. Apply recommended grease to sliding surface of control lever
(1).
2. Install control lever spring and control lever to control lever
housing.
3. Temporarily tighten guide plate mounting bolts while holding
guide plate.
4. Install snap ring with the following procedure.
a. Set a suitable jack to the transmission assembly.
CAUTION:
When setting a suitable jack, be careful so that it does not
contact with the wire harness.
JPDIC0746ZZ
JPDIC0747ZZ
JPDIC0763ZZ
JPDIC0796ZZ
TM-22
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A]
SHIFT CONTROL
b. Remove rear engine mounting member mounting bolts. Refer to EM.
c. Lower a suitable jack to the position where the snap ring can be installed.
CAUTION:
The transmission assembly must not interfere with the high pressure piping and low pressure piping.
d. Install control lever boot C (1) to control lever.
CAUTION:
• Fit control lever boot C to the groove on control lever
housing.
• Never allow control lever boot C and the area (A) of control
lever overlap one another.
e. Apply recommended grease to sliding surface of control rod
bushing LH and control rod bushing RH.
f. Install control rod bushing LH (1) and control rod bushing RH (2)
to control lever (3).
CAUTION:
• Be careful with the orientation of control lever ( ).
• Never lose control rod bushing LH and control rod bushing
RH.
g. Install control rod to control lever while holding control rod bushing RH.
CAUTION:
Never lose control rod bushing LH and control rod bushing RH.
h. Install plane washers (1) and spring washer (2) to control rod.
CAUTION:
Never lose plane washer and spring washer.
i. Seat snap ring (1) in the groove on control rod.
CAUTION:
• Never lose snap ring.
• Check that snap ring is securely seated in the groove on
control rod.
• Avoid tangling control lever boot C.
j. Install rear engine mounting member mounting bolts. Refer to
EM.
k. Install rear propeller shaft assembly. Refer to DLN-131,
"Removal and Installation".
5. Install guide plate with the following procedure.
JPDIC0768ZZ
Region Control rod bushing identification mark
LH White
RH Black
: Vehicle front
JPDIC0775ZZ
JPDIC0776ZZ
JPDIC0781ZZ
SHIFT CONTROL
TM-23
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
a. Shift the control lever to 1st gear position (A).
b. Lightly shift control lever to the reverse gear direction until it
stops, and keep control lever in this position.
c. Set guide plate so that guide plate portion (B) contacts control
lever portion (C).
d. Temporarily tighten mounting bolt (D).
e. Shift the control lever to 2nd gear position (A).
f. Lightly shift control lever to the reverse gear direction until it
stops, and keep control lever in this position.
g. Set guide plate so that guide plate portion (B) contacts control
lever portion (C).
h. Tighten mounting bolt (D) to the specified torque.
i. Tighten mounting bolts (E) and (F) to the specified torque.
6. Install control lever boot B (1) to guide plate (2).
CAUTION:
Check that groove of control lever boot B is engaged to
guide plate.
7. Install hole insulator and control lever boot A.
CAUTION:
Be careful with the orientation of hole insulator and control
lever boot A.
JPDIC0766ZZ
JPDIC0767ZZ
3 : Control lever
JPDIC0764ZZ
TM-24
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A]
SHIFT CONTROL
8. Install hole cover and then tighten hole cover mounting bolts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Be careful with the orientation of hole cover.
9. Install harness clips to hole cover.
10. Install felt.
11. Install center console assembly and console finisher assembly. Refer to IP-43, "M/T MODELS : Removal
and Installation".
12. Install seat (1) and insulator (2) to control lever (3).
CAUTION:
• Be careful with the orientation of seat.
• Never lose seat.
13. Apply thread locking sealant to control lever threads and then
install shift knob to control lever.
• Use Thread Locking Sealant, Loctite 242 or an equivalent.
CAUTION:
Remove the remaining adhesive on control lever and shift
knob threads.
14. Set shift knob in the correct position with the following procedure.
a. When tightening shift knob, if shift knob comes to the proper
position within 1/2 turn from the position at which resistance
begins to be felt, tighten it 1 more turn to set it in the proper position.
b. If it takes more than 1/2 turn from the position at which resistance
begins to be felt, tighten it to set it in the proper position.
CAUTION:
• Never adjust shift knob with loosing.
• After adjusting to the proper position, until 30 minutes
pass, never operate the shift knob intensely such as
screwing or turning shift knob to opposite direction since
a locking sealant becomes stiff.
Inspection INFOID:0000000006053777
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Control Lever
• When control lever is shifted to each gear position, check that there is no interference or boot disengagement.
• When control lever is shifted to each gear position, check that there is no binding, noise, or backlash that
disturbs shifting.
• When control lever is shifted to the 1st or 2nd gear position by being pressed in the left side direction without
being pressed downward, check that there is no binding or poor gear engagement.
• When control lever is shifted to the 1st-2nd side and released, check that control lever returns smoothly to
the neutral position.
• When control lever is shifted to the 5th-6th side and released, check that control lever returns smoothly to
the neutral position.
: Vehicle front
A : Proper position
B : Start position on reaction force
JPDIC0627ZZ
JPDIC0010ZZ
SHIFT CONTROL
TM-25
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
• When control lever is in a position other than the reverse gear position, check that control lever can be
pressed downward.
• When control lever is pressed and held downward, check that control lever can be shifted to the reverse
gear position.
• When control lever is shifted from the reverse gear position to the neutral position, check that control lever
returns smoothly to the neutral position with spring power.
• When control lever is not pressed downward, check that control lever cannot be shifted to the reverse gear
position.
Shift Knob
Check that there is no shift knob dislocation.
Boot
Check that there is no damage, twist, or dislocation of boot.
TM-26
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A]
AIR BREATHER HOSE
AIR BREATHER HOSE
Exploded View INFOID:0000000006053797
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006053798
REMOVAL
Refer to TM-26, "Exploded View" for removal procedure of air breather tube and air breather hose.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and refer to TM-26, "Exploded View" for installation procedure of air breather tube and air
breather hose.
CAUTION:
• Make sure there are no pinched or restricted areas on the air breather hose caused by bending or
winding when installing it.
• Be sure to insert air breather hose into air breather tube until
hose end reaches the radius curve end.
1. Air breather tube 2. Air breather hose 3. Air breather
4. Transmission assembly
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for the symbols in the figure.
JPDIC0756GB
JPDIC0469ZZ
AIR BREATHER HOSE
TM-27
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
• Install the air breather hose to the air breather, positioning the hose
end ( ) as shown in the figure.
JPDIC0806ZZ
TM-28
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A]
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH
Exploded View INFOID:0000000006053780
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006053781
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
2. Disconnect back-up lamp switch connector.
3. Remove back-up lamp switch (1) from transmission assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. Temporarily tighten back-up lamp switch onto transmission
assembly by rotating once or twice.
CAUTION:
Remove old sealant and oil adhering to threads.
2. Apply recommended sealant to threads of back-up lamp switch
as shown in the figure.
• Use Genuine Liquid Gasket, Loctite 574 or an equivalent.
3. Tighten back-up lamp switch to the specified torque.
4. For the next step and after, install in the reverse order of
removal.
1. Back-up lamp switch
: Apply Genuine Liquid Gasket, Loctite 574 or an equivalent.
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.
JPDIC0770GB
: Vehicle front
JPDIC0754ZZ
JPDIC0526ZZ
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
TM-29
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Exploded View INFOID:0000000006053782
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006053783
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
2. Remove bracket (1) from transmission assembly.
3. Disconnect park/neutral position (PNP) switch connector.
4. Remove park/neutral position (PNP) switch and plunger from
transmission assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. Install plunger to transmission assembly.
CAUTION:
Be careful with orientation of plunger.
1. Plunger 2. Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
: Apply Genuine Liquid Gasket, Loctite 574 or an equivalent.
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.
JPDIC0771GB
: Vehicle front
JPDIC0779ZZ
: Vehicle front
JPDIC0780ZZ
TM-30
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A]
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
2. Temporarily tighten park/neutral position (PNP) switch onto
transmission assembly by rotating once or twice.
CAUTION:
Remove old sealant and oil adhering to threads.
3. Apply recommended sealant to threads of park/neutral position
(PNP) switch as shown in the figure.
• Use Genuine Liquid Gasket, Loctite 574 or an equivalent.
4. Tighten park/neutral position (PNP) switch to the specified
torque.
5. For the next step and after, install in the reverse order of
removal. JPDIC0526ZZ
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
TM-31
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
Exploded View INFOID:0000000006053799
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006053800
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
2. Remove rear propeller shaft assembly. Refer to DLN-131, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove control lever and holder bracket. Refer to TM-20, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove front propeller shaft assembly mounting bolts, and then temporarily fasten it on transmission
assembly with a rope. Refer to DLN-118, "V9X : Removal and Installation".
5. Remove dust cover.
6. Remove exhaust mounting bracket. Refer to EM.
7. Remove front cross bar. Refer to FSU-17, "Removal and Installation".
8. Remove brackets (1) and operating cylinder (2) and then temporarily
secure it to a position where it will not inhibit work. Refer to
CL-24, "Removal and Installation" and CL-27, "LHD : Removal
and Installation".
CAUTION:
Never depress clutch pedal during removal procedure.
9. Remove crankshaft position sensor. Refer to EM.
10. Remove starter motor. Refer to STR-31, "V9X : Removal and
Installation".
11. Disconnect back-up lamp switch connector.
12. Set a suitable jack to the transmission assembly.
CAUTION:
When setting a suitable jack, be careful so that it does not contact with the wire harness.
NOTE:
1. Transmission assembly 2. Dust cover
: Refer to "INSTALLATION" in TM-31, "Removal and Installation" for the locations and tightening torque.
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.
JPDIC0761GB
: Vehicle front
JPDIC0762ZZ
TM-32
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A]
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
By placing wooden block between oil pan (upper) and front suspension member, the removal of transmission
assembly from engine becomes easier.
13. Remove rear engine mounting member and engine mounting insulator (rear). Refer to EM.
14. Remove engine and transmission mounting bolts.
15. Lower a suitable jack to the position where the top transmission mounting bolts can be removed.
CAUTION:
The transmission assembly must not interfere with the high pressure piping and low pressure piping.
16. Lower a suitable jack to the position where the park/neutral position (PNP) switch connector can be disconnect.
Then disconnect park/neutral position (PNP) switch connector.
CAUTION:
The transmission assembly must not interfere with the high pressure piping and low pressure piping.
17. Remove harness and harness brackets and then temporarily secure it to a position where it will not inhibit
work.
18. Remove transmission assembly from the engine.
CAUTION:
• Secure transmission assembly to a suitable jack while removing it.
• The transmission assembly must not interfere with the catalyst.
• The transmission assembly must not interfere with the wire harnesses and clutch piping.
• The transmission assembly must not interfere with the high pressure piping and low pressure
piping.
• The main drive gear must not interfere with the clutch cover.
19. Remove transfer assembly. Refer to DLN-70, "V9X (M/T) : Removal and Installation".
20. Remove air breather tube and air breather hose. Refer to TM-26, "Removal and Installation".
21. Remove withdrawal lever assembly, release bearing assembly, dust cover, ball pin, and washer. Refer to
CL-30, "Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Secure transmission assembly to a suitable jack while installing it.
• The transmission assembly must not interfere with the catalyst.
• The transmission assembly must not interfere with the wire harnesses and clutch piping.
• The transmission assembly must not interfere with the high pressure piping and low pressure piping.
• The main drive gear must not interfere with the clutch cover.
• Apply recommended grease to the holder bracket contact surface of control lever housing. Refer to TM-34,
"Removal and Installation".
• Tighten transmission assembly mounting bolts to the specified
torque. The figure is the view from the vehicle forward.
• If flywheel is removed, align dowel pin with the smallest hole of flywheel. Refer to EM.
Inspection INFOID:0000000006053786
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check the operation of the shift control. Refer to TM-24, "Inspection".
• Check the oil leakage and the oil level. Refer to TM-17, "Inspection".
Bolt symbol A B
Insertion direction Transmission to engine
Number of bolts 6 3
Bolt length
“ ” mm (in)
60 (2.36) 70 (2.76)
Tightening torque
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
35 (3.6, 26) JPDIC0759ZZ
CONTROL ROD
TM-33
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
CONTROL ROD
Exploded View INFOID:0000000006053787
1. Shift knob 2. Insulator 3. Seat
4. Console boot 5. Felt 6. Hole cover
7. Control lever boot A 8. Hole insulator 9. Control lever
JPDIC0769GB
TM-34
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A]
CONTROL ROD
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006053788
REMOVAL
1. Remove transmission assembly. Refer to TM-31, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove control lever housing with the following procedure.
a. Remove bracket pins from transmission assembly.
b. Remove control lever housing from transmission assembly.
c. Remove outer bushings and inner bushings from control lever housing.
3. Remove control rod with the following procedure.
a. Remove snap ring and control pin from control link.
b. Remove control link from striking rod.
c. Remove control link mounting bolt, washer, control link, and control link mounting nut from control rod.
d. Remove holder rubbers from control link.
INSTALLATION
1. Install control rod with the following procedure.
a. Apply recommended grease to sliding surface of holder rubbers.
b. Install holder rubbers to control link.
c. Install control link mounting bolt, washer, control link, and control link mounting nut to control rod.
CAUTION:
Never reuse control link.
d. Tighten control link mounting bolt to the specified torque.
e. Tighten control link mounting nut to the specified torque.
f. Install control link to striking rod.
g. Install control pin (1) to control link (2).
h. Slide snap ring (3) in the direction shown by arrow to install to
the groove of control link.
2. Install control lever housing with the following procedure.
10. Control lever boot B 11. Guide plate 12. Control lever spring
13. Control lever housing 14. Holder bracket 15. Control lever boot C
16. Bracket pin 17. Outer bushing 18. Inner bushing
19. Snap ring 20. Plane washer 21. Spring washer
22. Control rod bushing RH 23. Control rod bushing LH 24. Control rod
25. Holder rubber 26. Control link 27. Control pin
28. Snap ring 29. Transmission assembly 30. Striking rod
: Apply grease, Multemp AC-J (Kyodo Yushi make) or DOW CORNING TORAY SH33L GREASE (Dow Corning Toray make)
or an equivalent.
: Apply Thread Locking Sealant, Loctite 242 or an equivalent.
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.
: Front
JPDIC0773ZZ
CONTROL ROD
TM-35
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
a. Install inner bushings (1) and outer bushings (2) according to the
direction shown by arrow.
CAUTION:
• Never leave space around the flange of each bushing.
• Never allow inner bushing rim to become folded inward/
outward.
b. Install control lever housing to transmission assembly.
c. Apply recommended grease to sliding surface of bracket pins.
d. Seat the bracket pins (1) in the groove on transmission assembly.
e. Apply recommended grease to the holder bracket contact surface
of control lever housing.
3. For the next step and after, install in the reverse order of
removal.
Inspection INFOID:0000000006053789
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check the operation of the shift control. Refer to TM-24, "Inspection".
JPDIC0774ZZ
: Front
JPDIC0765ZZ
TM-36
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A]
FRONT OIL SEAL
FRONT OIL SEAL
Exploded View INFOID:0000000006053801
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006053802
REMOVAL
1. Remove transmission assembly. Refer to TM-31, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove front cover from transmission assembly.
3. Remove front oil seal from transmission assembly using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
CAUTION:
Never damage transmission assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. Apply gear oil to the lip of front oil seal.
2. Install front oil seal (1) to transmission assembly using the drift
[SST: KV32103600] and a drift [Commercial service tool].
CAUTION:
Never incline front oil seal.
3. Install front cover to transmission assembly.
CAUTION:
Remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to
both mating surfaces.
4. Tighten front cover mounting bolts to the specified torque.
5. For the next step and after, install in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection INFOID:0000000006053792
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check the oil leakage and the oil level. Refer to TM-17, "Inspection".
1. Front cover 2. Front oil seal
: Apply gear oil.
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.
JPDIC0772GB
Dimension “L” : 6.5 – 7 mm (0.256 – 0.28 in)
JPDIC0753ZZ
AIR BREATHER
TM-37
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
AIR BREATHER
Exploded View INFOID:0000000006054227
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006053794
REMOVAL
1. Remove transmission assembly. Refer to TM-31, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove air breather from transmission assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Never reuse air breather.
• Install air breather to transmission assembly within the angle (A)
shown as follows.
1. Air breather tube 2. Air breather hose 3. Air breather
4. Transmission assembly
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for the symbols in the figure.
JPDIC0756GB
: Front
A : 10°
JPDIC0778ZZ
TM-38
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [6MT: FS6R96A]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specification INFOID:0000000006053803
Transmission type FS6R96A
Engine type V9X
Axle type 4WD
Number of speed 6
Shift pattern
Synchromesh type Warner
Gear ratio 1st 5.080
2nd 2.804
3rd 1.783
4th 1.260
5th 1.000
6th 0.835
Reverse 4.607
Number of teeth Main gear Drive 28
1st 43
2nd 42
3rd 36
4th 32
6th 25
Reverse 39
Counter gear Drive 43
1st 13
2nd 23
3rd 31
4th 39
6th 46
Reverse 13
Reverse idler gear 23
Oil capacity (Reference) (Imp pt) Approx. 1.6 (2-3/4)
Remarks Reverse synchronizer Installed
Double cone synchronizer 3rd, 4th, and reverse
Triple cone synchronizer 1st and 2nd
PCIB1769E
PRECAUTIONS
TM-39
< PRECAUTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
FOR RUSSIA
FOR RUSSIA : Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and
"SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000006134082
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s)
with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly
causing serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
FOR RUSSIA : General Precautions INFOID:0000000006134081
• Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable
from the negative terminal before connecting or disconnecting
the A/T assembly harness connector. Because battery
voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned
OFF.
PRECAUTIONS
• Perform “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE” after performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS.
If the repair is completed DTC should not be displayed in the
“DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Always use the specified brand of ATF. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and
Lubricants".
• Use lint-free paper not cloth rags during work.
• Dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordinance,
etc. after replacing the ATF.
• Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside
of the transmission. It is important to prevent the internal parts from
becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
• Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
• Use lint-free paper or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere
with the operation of the transmission.
• Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly.
• All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or
reassembly.
• Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the A/T is disassembled.
• It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated.
• The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced.
Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent springs
and small parts from becoming scattered or lost.
• Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight.
• Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and
seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Never use grease.
• Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling.
• When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the ATF is drained. Old ATF will remain in torque converter
and ATF cooling system.
Always follow the procedures under “Changing” when changing ATF. Refer to TM-123, "Changing".
• Occasionally, the parking gear may be locked with the torque insufficiently released, when stopping the vehicle
by shifting the selector lever from “D” or “R” to “P” position with the brake pedal depressed.
In this case, the shock with a thud caused by the abrupt release of torque may occur when shifting the selector
lever from “P” position to other positions.
However, this symptom is not a malfunction witch results in the damage of parts.
EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA
EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA : Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR
BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000005450741
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and
“SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s)
SAT652J
PRECAUTIONS
TM-41
< PRECAUTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly
causing serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA : Precaution for Battery Service (for V9X Models) INFOID:0000000006059566
When disconnect the battery cable, pay attention to the following.
• Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.
• Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is running.
• Before disconnecting battery cables, turn ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 4 minutes.
• After high-load driving, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait
for at least 15 minutes to remove the battery cable.
NOTE:
Turbocharger cooling pump may operate in a few minutes after the
ignition switch is turned OFF.
EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA : General Precautions INFOID:0000000004969721
• Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable
from the negative terminal before connecting or disconnecting
the A/T assembly harness connector. Because battery
voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned
OFF.
• Perform “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE” after performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS.
If the repair is completed DTC should not be displayed in the
“DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Always use the specified brand of ATF. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and
Lubricants".
• Use lint-free paper not cloth rags during work.
• Dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordinance,
etc. after replacing the ATF.
• Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside
of the transmission. It is important to prevent the internal parts from
becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
• Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
• Use lint-free paper or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere
with the operation of the transmission.
• Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly.
• All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or
reassembly.
• Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the A/T is disassembled.
• It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated.
• The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced.
Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent springs
and small parts from becoming scattered or lost.
• Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight.
• Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and
seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Never use grease.
• Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling.
SEF289H
SEF289H
SAT652J
TM-42
< PRECAUTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
PRECAUTIONS
• When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the ATF is drained. Old ATF will remain in torque converter
and ATF cooling system.
Always follow the procedures under “Changing” when changing ATF. Refer to TM-123, "Changing".
• Occasionally, the parking gear may be locked with the torque insufficiently released, when stopping the vehicle
by shifting the selector lever from “D” or “R” to “P” position with the brake pedal depressed.
In this case, the shock with a thud caused by the abrupt release of torque may occur when shifting the selector
lever from “P” position to other positions.
However, this symptom is not a malfunction witch results in the damage of parts.
PREPARATION
TM-43
< PREPARATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000004969722
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Tool number
Tool name
Description
1. 315268E000*
O-ring
2. 310811EA5A*
Charging pipe
A/T fluid changing and adjustment
Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts
JSDIA1332ZZ
PBIC0190E
TM-44
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
COMPONENT PARTS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004969563
*1: Control valve with TCM is included in A/T assembly.
*2: Except for Russia
NOTE:
1. Selector lever position indicator 2. A/T shift selector assembly 3. A/T assembly connector
4. Control valve with TCM*1 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor 6. Manual mode indicator
7. Shift position indicator 8. A/T CHECK indicator lamp 9. G sensor*2
10. Paddle shifter (shift-down) 11. Paddle shifter (shift-up)
A. Center console B. A/T assembly C. Accelerator pedal
D. Combination meter E. Luggage floor RH F. Steering wheel
JSDIA0922ZZ
COMPONENT PARTS
TM-45
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
• The following components are included in A/T shift selector assembly (2).
- Manual mode select switch
- Manual mode position select switch
- Shift position switch
• The following components are included in control valve with TCM (4).
- TCM
- Input speed sensor 1, 2
- Output speed sensor
- A/T fluid temperature sensor
- Transmission range switch
- Direct clutch solenoid valve
- High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
- Input clutch solenoid valve
- Front brake solenoid valve
- Low brake solenoid valve
- Anti-interlock solenoid valve
- 2346 brake solenoid valve
- Line pressure solenoid valve
- Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Description INFOID:0000000004969564
Name Function
TCM TM-46, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM"
Transmission range switch TM-46, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range Switch"
Output speed sensor TM-46, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Output Speed Sensor"
Input speed sensor 1
TM-46, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Speed Sensor"
Input speed sensor 2
A/T fluid temperature sensor TM-46, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor"
Input clutch solenoid valve TM-46, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Clutch Solenoid Valve"
Front brake solenoid valve TM-46, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Front Brake Solenoid Valve"
Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-47, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Direct Clutch Solenoid Valve"
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve TM-47, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : High and Low Reverse Clutch Solenoid Valve"
Low brake solenoid valve TM-47, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Low Brake Solenoid Valve"
Anti-interlock solenoid valve TM-47, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Anti-interlock Solenoid Valve"
2346 brake solenoid valve TM-47, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : 2346 Brake Solenoid Valve"
Line pressure solenoid valve TM-47, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Solenoid Valve"
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-47, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve"
Accelerator pedal position sensor
TM-47, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor"
Throttle position sensor
Manual mode switch TM-47, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Switch"
Paddle shifter TM-48, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Paddle Shifter"
G sensor* TM-48, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : G Sensor"
A/T CHECK indicator lamp When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, the light comes on for 2 seconds.
Starter relay STR-6, "A/T : System Description"
Stop lamp switch TM-49, "A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Description"
ECM
EC-37, "System Description" (VQ37VHR), EC-1125, "ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM :
System Diagram" (V9X)
BCM BCS-11, "System Description"
TM-46
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
COMPONENT PARTS
*: Except for Russia
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM INFOID:0000000005288362
• The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The
TCM controls the A/T.
• The TCM is integral with the control valve assembly and built into the A/T assembly.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range Switch INFOID:0000000005288363
• The transmission range switch incorporates four contact switches. Each contact switch transmits an ON/
OFF signal to the TCM.
• The TCM judges a select lever position from a combination of ON/OFF signals transmitted from each contact
switch.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Output Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000005288364
The output speed sensor detects the revolution of the parking gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal
is transmitted to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000005288365
The input speed sensor detects input shaft rpm (revolutions per minute). It is located on the input side of the A/
T. Monitors revolution of sensor 1 and sensor 2 for non-standard conditions.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000005288366
The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and transmits a signal to the TCM.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Clutch Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005288367
• The Input clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmission
range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted
to the optimum position.
• The Input clutch solenoid valve controls the input clutch control valve in response to a signal transmitted
from the TCM.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Front Brake Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005288368
• The front brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmission
range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted to
the optimum position.
• The front brake solenoid valve controls the front brake control valve in response to a signal transmitted from
the TCM.
Unified meter and A/C amp. MWI-9, "METER SYSTEM : System Description"
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) BRC-24, "System Description"
Yaw rate/side G sensor BRC-66, "Description"
Name Function
Select lever position
Transmission range switch
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
P OFF OFF OFF OFF
R ON OFF OFF ON
N ON ON OFF OFF
D and M ON ON ON ON
COMPONENT PARTS
TM-47
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Direct Clutch Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005288369
• The direct clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmission
range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted
to the optimum position.
• The direct clutch solenoid valve controls the direct clutch control valve in response to a signal transmitted
from the TCM.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : High and Low Reverse Clutch Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005288370
• The high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted
from the transmission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will
then be shifted to the optimum position.
• The high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve controls the high and low reverse clutch control valve in
response to a signal transmitted from the TCM.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Low Brake Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005288371
• The low brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmission
range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted to
the optimum position.
• The low brake solenoid valve controls the low brake control valve in response to a signal transmitted from
the TCM.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Anti-interlock Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005288372
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve prevents the simultaneous activation of the input clutch and the low brake.
• The anti-interlock solenoid valve is an ON/OFF type solenoid valve.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : 2346 Brake Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005288373
• The 2346 brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmission
range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted
to the optimum position.
• The 2346 brake solenoid valve controls the 2346 brake control valve in response to a signal transmitted from
the TCM.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005288374
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the gear in D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, M2, M3, M4,
M5, M6 and M7 by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the output speed sensor and accelerator
pedal position sensor. Torque converter clutch piston operation will then be controlled.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005288375
The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in
response to a signal transmitted from the TCM.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor INFOID:0000000005288376
• The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly.
• The accelerator pedal position sensor detects the accelerator position.
• The accelerator pedal position sensor transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit
the voltage signal to the ECM. Then, the TCM receives accelerator pedal position signal from the ECM via
CAN communication.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Switch INFOID:0000000005288377
• The manual mode switch [mode select switch and position select switch (shift-up/shift-down)] is installed in
the A/T shift selector assembly.
• The mode select switch detects the position (the main shift gate side or manual shift gate side) of the selector
lever and transmits a manual mode signal or a non-manual mode signal to the unified meter and A/C
amp. Then, the TCM receives a manual mode signal or non-manual mode signal from the unified meter and
A/C amp.
TM-48
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
COMPONENT PARTS
• The position select switch (shift-up) detects that the selector lever is shifted to the shift-up side of the manual
shift gate and transmits a manual mode shift up signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. Then, the TCM
receives a manual mode shift up signal from the unified meter and A/C amp.
• The position select switch (shift-down) detects that the selector lever is shifted to the shift-down side of the
manual shift gate and transmits a manual mode shift down signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. Then,
the TCM receives a manual mode shift down signal from the unified meter and A/C amp.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Paddle Shifter INFOID:0000000005288378
When operating the paddle shifter (shift-up/shift-down), a paddle shifter shift up signal or paddle shifter shift
down signal is transmitted to the unified meter and A/C amp. Then, the TCM receives a paddle shifter shift-up
signal or a paddle shifter shift-down signal from the unified meter and A/C amp.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : G Sensor INFOID:0000000005288379
• The G sensor detects the inclination angle and acceleration of the vehicle.
• The G sensor converts the inclination angle and acceleration to the voltage signal and transmits it to ECM.
The TCM calculates the voltage signal that is received from ECM via CAN communication line and judges
the inclination angle and acceleration of the vehicle.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Selector Lever Position Indicator INFOID:0000000005288380
Indicates selector lever position.
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004969595
1. Position pin 2. Shift lock unit 3. Shift lock solenoid
4. Slider A 5. Control device harness connector 6. Lock plate
7. Slider B 8. Shift lock relay*1 9. Stop lamp switch
10. Brake pedal 11. Shift lock cover *2
A. A/T shift selector assembly B. Engine room C. Brake pedal, upper
D. Center console
JSDIA0915ZZ
COMPONENT PARTS
TM-49
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
*1: For Russia with ICC
*2: Shift lock release button becomes operative by removing shift lock cover.
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Description INFOID:0000000004969596
*: For Russia with ICC
Component Function
Shift lock unit
Shift lock solenoid
Activated by the ignition switch and stop lamp signals, it holds the relative
positions of sliders A and B.
Lock plate Restricts position pin moving.
Shift lock release button Pressing the shift lock release button cancels the shift lock forcibly.
Position pin Links with selector knob button and restricts selector lever shift operation.
Stop lamp switch
For Russia with ICC
• When brake pedal is depressed, stop lamp switch turns ON.
• When stop lamp switch turns ON, power is supplied to shift lock relay.
Except for Russia without ICC
• When brake pedal is depressed, stop lamp switch turns ON.
• When stop lamp switch turns ON, power is supplied to shift lock unit.
Shift lock relay*
Current flow to stop lamp switch allows shift lock relay contact ON, and then
power is applied to shift lock unit.
TM-50
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
Cross-Sectional View INFOID:0000000004969589
1. Low brake 2. Reverse brake 3. Direct clutch
4. High and low reverse clutch 5. 2nd one-way clutch 6.*1 Rear carrier
7. Mid carrier 8. Input clutch 9.*2 Front sun gear
10.*3 Front carrier 11. Under drive carrier 12. 1st one-way clutch
13. Front brake 14. 2346 brake 15.*4 Input shaft
16. Torque converter 17. Oil pump 18.*2 Under drive sun gear
19.*3 Under drive internal gear 20.*4 Front internal gear 21. Mid sun gear
22.*1 Mid internal gear 23. Rear sun gear 24. Rear internal gear
25. High and low reverse clutch hub 26. Control valve with TCM 27. Parking gear
28. Adapter case 29. Output shaft
*1: 6 and 22 are one unit.
*2: 9 and 18 are one unit.
*3: 10 and 19 are one unit.
*4: 15 and 20 are one unit.
JSDIA0771ZZ
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
TM-51
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
System Diagram INFOID:0000000004969590
System Description INFOID:0000000004969591
DESCRIPTION
JSDIA0877GB
TM-52
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
With the use of 4 sets of planetary gears, A/T enables 7-speed transmission for forward and 1-speed transmission
for backward, depending on the combination of 3 sets of multiple-disc clutches, 4 sets of multiple-disc
brakes and 2 sets of one-way clutches.
CLUTCH AND BAND CHART
POWER TRANSMISSION
“N” Position
JSDIA1402GB
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
TM-53
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
Since the low brake is released, torque from the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft. P
“P” Position
JSDIA0880GB
TM-54
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
• The same as for the “N” position, since the low brake is released, so torque from the input shaft drive is not
transmitted to the output shaft.
• The parking pawl linked with the selector lever meshes with the parking gear and fastens the output shaft
mechanically.
“D1” and “DS1” Positions
JSDIA1277GB
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
TM-55
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
• The 1st one-way clutch regulates counterclockwise rotation of the under drive carrier. P
• The 2nd one-way clutch regulates counterclockwise rotation of the rear sun gear.
• The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.
JSDIA0866GB
TM-56
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
Front planetary gear
Under drive planetary gear
Rear planetary gear
Mid planetary gear
“M1” Position
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions
Deceleration from front internal
gear
Deceleration from front internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
Condition — Fixed Input/Output
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions
Acceleration from under drive internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
front carrier
Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from rear internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
under drive internal gear
Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from mid internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
rear carrier
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
TM-57
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
• The 1st one-way clutch and the front brake regulate counterclockwise rotation of the under drive carrier. P
NOTE:
The front brake operates only while coasting.
• The 2nd one-way clutch and the high and low reverse clutch regulate counterclockwise rotation of the rear
sun gear.
NOTE:
The high and low reverse clutch operates only while coasting.
• The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake.
JSDIA0867GB
TM-58
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.
Front planetary gear
Under drive planetary gear
Rear planetary gear
Mid planetary gear
“D2” and “DS2” Positions
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions
Deceleration from front internal
gear
Deceleration from front internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
Condition — Fixed Input/Output
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions
Acceleration from under drive internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
front carrier
Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from rear internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
under drive internal gear
Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from mid internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
rear carrier
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
TM-59
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
• The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake. P
• The 2nd one-way clutch regulates counterclockwise rotation of the rear sun gear.
• The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.
JSDIA0868GB
TM-60
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
Front planetary gear
Under drive planetary gear
Rear planetary gear
Mid planetary gear
“M2” Position
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from front internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
Condition Fixed — Input/Output
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from under drive internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
front carrier
Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from rear internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
under drive internal gear
Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from mid internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
rear carrier
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
TM-61
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
• The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake. P
• The 2nd one-way clutch and the high and low reverse clutch regulate counterclockwise rotation of the rear
sun gear.
NOTE:
The high and low reverse clutch operates only while coasting.
• The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.
JSDIA0869GB
TM-62
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
Front planetary gear
Under drive planetary gear
Rear planetary gear
Mid planetary gear
“D3”, “DS3” and “M3” Positions
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from front internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
Condition Fixed — Input/Output
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from under drive internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
front carrier
Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from rear internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
under drive internal gear
Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions — Deceleration from mid internal gear
Same number of revolution as the
rear carrier
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
TM-63
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
• The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake. P
• The direct clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the rear carrier.
• The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.
JSDIA0870GB
TM-64
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
Front planetary gear
Under drive planetary gear
Rear planetary gear
Mid planetary gear
“D4”, “DS4” and “M4” Positions
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from front internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
Condition Fixed — Input/Output
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from under drive internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
front carrier
Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions
Same number of revolution as the
rear internal gear
Same number of revolution as the
rear internal gear
Same number of revolution as the
under drive internal gear
Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions — Deceleration from mid internal gear
Same number of revolution as the
rear carrier
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
TM-65
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
• The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake. P
• The direct clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the rear carrier.
• The high and low reverse clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the mid sun gear.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.
JSDIA0871GB
TM-66
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
Front planetary gear
Under drive planetary gear
Rear planetary gear
Mid planetary gear
“D5”, “DS5” and “M5” Positions
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from front internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
Condition Fixed — Input/Output
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from under drive internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
front carrier
Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions
Same number of revolution as the
rear internal gear
Same number of revolution as the
rear internal gear
Same number of revolution as the
under drive internal gear
Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions
Same number of revolution as the
mid internal gear
Same number of revolution as the
mid internal gear
Same number of revolution as the
rear carrier
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
TM-67
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
• The input clutch gets engaged and connects the mid internal gear with the rear carrier. P
• The direct clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the rear carrier.
• The high and low reverse clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the mid sun gear.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.
JSDIA0872GB
TM-68
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
Rear planetary gear
Mid planetary gear
“D6”, “DS6” and “M6” Positions
Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition — input/Output —
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions
Same number of revolution as the
rear carrier
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
Same number of revolution as the
rear carrier
Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions
Same number of revolution as the
mid internal gear
Same number of revolution as the
mid internal gear
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
TM-69
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
• The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake. P
• The input clutch gets engaged and connects the mid internal gear with the rear carrier.
• The high and low reverse clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the mid sun gear.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.
JSDIA0873GB
TM-70
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
Front planetary gear
Rear planetary gear
Mid planetary gear
“D7”, “DS7” and “M7” Positions
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from front internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition — Input/Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions Acceleration from rear carrier
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
Same number of revolution as the
front carrier
Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions Acceleration from mid internal gear Acceleration from mid internal gear
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
TM-71
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
• The under drive carrier is fixed by the front brake. P
• The input clutch gets engaged and connects the mid internal gear with the rear carrier.
• The high and low reverse clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the mid sun gear.
• Each planetary gear enters state described below.
JSDIA0874GB
TM-72
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
Front planetary gear
Under drive planetary gear
Rear planetary gear
Mid planetary gear
“R” Position
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions
Deceleration from front internal
gear
Deceleration from front internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
Condition — Fixed Input/Output
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions
Acceleration from under drive internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
front carrier
Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition — Input/Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions Acceleration from rear carrier
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
Same number of revolution as the
under drive internal gear
Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions Acceleration from mid internal gear Acceleration from mid internal gear
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
TM-73
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
• The 1st one-way clutch and the front brake regulate counterclockwise rotation of the under drive carrier. P
NOTE:
The front brake operates at the fixed speed or less.
• The rear carrier and the mid internal gear are fixed by the reverse brake.
• The mid sun gear rotates at the same speed as the rear sun gear by operation of the 2nd one-way clutch
and the high and low reverse clutch.
NOTE:
The high and low reverse clutch operates at the fixed speed or less.
JSDIA0875GB
TM-74
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.
Front planetary gear
Under drive planetary gear
Rear planetary gear
Mid planetary gear
Component Description INFOID:0000000004969593
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions
Deceleration from front internal
gear
Deceleration from front internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
Condition — Fixed Input/Output
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions
Acceleration from under drive internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
front carrier
Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition Output Fixed Input
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions
Acceleration from rear internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
under drive internal gear
Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition Input Output Fixed
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Counterclockwise revolution —
Number of revolutions
Same number of revolution as the
rear sun gear
Deceleration from mid sun gear —
Name of the Part (Abbreviation) Function
Front brake (FR/B) Fastens the under drive carrier.
Input clutch (I/C) Connects the input shaft, the mid internal gear and the rear carrier.
Direct clutch (D/C) Connects the rear carrier and the rear sun gear.
High and low reverse clutch (HLR/C) Connects the rear sun gear and the mid sun gear.
Reverse brake (R/B) Fastens the rear carrier.
Low brake (L/B) Fastens the mid sun gear.
2346 brake (2346/B) Fastens the under drive sun gear.
1st one-way clutch (1st OWC)
Allows the under drive carrier to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it for reverse
rotation.
2nd one-way clutch (2nd OWC)
Allows the rear sun gear to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it for reverse rotation.
Torque converter Amplifies driving force the engine, and transmits it to transmission input shaft.
Oil pump
Driven by the engine, oil pump supplies oil to torque converter, control valve assembly, and
each lubricating system.
SYSTEM
TM-75
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
SYSTEM
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : System Diagram INFOID:0000000004969561
Except for Russia
For Russia
JSDIA1344GB
JSDIA1537GB
TM-76
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
SYSTEM
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000004969562
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
*: Except for Russia
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• The A/T senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors or signals. It always controls the optimum
shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
• Receive input signals transmitted from various switches and sensors.
• Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, etc.
• Transmit required output signals to the respective solenoids.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000005321612
TCM has the electrical fail-safe mode. The mode is divided into a maximum of 3 phases (1st fail-safe, 2nd failsafe
and final fail-safe) and functions so that the operation can be continued even if the signal circuit of the
main electronically controlled input/output parts is damaged.
Even if the electronic circuit is normal, the fail-safe mode may start under special conditions (such as when the
brake pedal is depressed suddenly from a hard wheel spin status to stop the rotation of wheels). In this case,
turn the ignition switch OFF and back to ON after 5 seconds to resume the normal shift pattern.
Consequently, the customer's vehicle may already return to the normal condition. Refer to TM-118, "Diagnosis
Flow".
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
Sensor (or signal)
TCM function
Actuator
Transmission range switch
Accelerator pedal position signal
Closed throttle position signal
Wide open throttle position signal
Engine speed signal
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Output speed sensor
Vehicle speed signal
Manual mode switch signal
Stop lamp switch signal
Side G sensor signal
Input speed sensor 1, 2
G sensor signal*
Line pressure control (TM-80)
Shift change control (TM-82)
Shift pattern control (TM-86)
Lock-up control (TM-88)
Fail-safe control (TM-105)
Self-diagnosis (TM-92)
CONSULT-III communication line (TM-92)
CAN communication line (TM-129)
Input clutch solenoid valve
Direct clutch solenoid valve
Front brake solenoid valve
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
Low brake solenoid valve
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
Line pressure solenoid valve
Anti-interlock solenoid valve
2346 brake solenoid valve
A/T CHECK indicator lamp
Back-up lamp relay
Starter relay
1st Fail-Safe
The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
2nd Fail-Safe
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunctioning
parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
Final Fail-Safe
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.
SYSTEM
TM-77
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
DTC
Vehicle
condition
Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe
P0615 — Starter is disabled — Starter is disabled
P0705 —
• Fixed in the “D” position (The
shifting can be performed)
• 30 km/h (19MPH) or less
• Lock-up is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears
of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Shift position indicator is
switched OFF
• Starter relay is switched OFF
(starter is disabled)
• Back-up lamp is OFF
• Large shift shock
• Fixed in the “D” position (The
shifting can be performed)
• 30 km/h (19 MPH) or less
• Lock-up is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears
of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Shift position indicator is
switched OFF
• Starter relay is switched OFF
(starter is disabled)
• Back-up lamp is OFF
• Large shift shock
P0710
Between
the gears of
1 - 2 - 3
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
Between • Manual mode is prohibited
the gears of
4 - 5 - 6 - 7
• Fix the gear while driving
• Manual mode is prohibited
P0717
Between
the gears of
1 - 2 - 3
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
Between • Manual mode is prohibited
the gears of
4 - 5 - 6 - 7
• Fix the gear while driving
• Manual mode is prohibited
P0720
Between
the gears of
1 - 2 - 3
• Only downshift can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• A vehicle speed signal from the
unified meter and A/C amp. is regarded
as an effective signal
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
Between
the gears of
4 - 5 - 6 - 7
• Fix the gear at driving
• Manual mode is prohibited
• A vehicle speed signal from the
unified meter and A/C amp. is regarded
as an effective signal
P0729
P0731
P0732
P0733
P0734
P0735
P1734
Neutral
malfunction
between
the gears of
1 - 2 - 3 and
7
• Locks in 4GR
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Neutral
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
Other than
the above
• Driving with the gear ratio between
1GR and 2GR
• Driving with the gear ratio between
2GR and 3GR
• Locks in 3GR
• Locks in 4GR
• Fix the gear while driving
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Neutral
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 2 - 3 - 4 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 3 - 4 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
TM-78
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
SYSTEM
P0730 —
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Neutral
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
P0740 —
• Lock-up is prohibited
• Slip lock-up is prohibited
• Lock-up is prohibited
• Slip lock-up is prohibited
P0744 —
• Lock-up is prohibited
• Slip lock-up is prohibited
• Lock-up is prohibited
• Slip lock-up is prohibited
P0750
P0775
P0795
P2713
P2722
P2731
P2807
• Locks in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR,
6GR or 7GR
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 3 - 4 - 5 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
P0780 —
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Neutral
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
P1585 — Idle neutral control is prohibited — Idle neutral control is prohibited
P1705 —
• Downshift when accelerator pedal
is depressed is prohibited
• Upshift when accelerator pedal
is released is prohibited
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Downshift when accelerator pedal
is depressed is prohibited
• Upshift when accelerator pedal
is released is prohibited
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Downshift when accelerator pedal
is depressed is prohibited
• Upshift when accelerator pedal
is released is prohibited
• Manual mode is prohibited
P1730 —
• Neutral
• Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears
of 2 - 3 - 4 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 3 - 4 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
P1815
Paddle
switch malfunction
Only the paddle switch is prohibited — Only the paddle switch is prohibited
Gate switch
malfunction
Only the gate switch is prohibited — Only the gate switch is prohibited
Malfunction
of both
switches
Manual mode is prohibited — Manual mode is prohibited
U0300
U1000
Between
the gears of
1 - 2 - 3
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
— • The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Line pressure is set to the maximum
hydraulic pressure
• Manual mode is prohibited
Between
the gears of
4 - 5 - 6 - 7
• Fix the gear at driving
• Manual mode is prohibited
P0720
and
P1721
— Locks in 5GR — Locks in 5GR
DTC
Vehicle
condition
Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe
SYSTEM
TM-79
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Protection Control INFOID:0000000005321613
The TCM becomes the protection control status temporarily to protect the safety when the safety of TCM and
transmission is lost. It automatically returns to the normal status if the safety is secured.
The TCM has the following protection control.
REVERSE INHIBIT CONTROL
Intercepts the torque transmission and shift to the neutral status if the selector lever is shifted to “R” position
while the vehicle moves forward at the vehicle speed 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more.
1ST ENGINE BRAKE PROTECTION CONTROL
Controls the engine brake so as not to make effective by turning the front brake solenoid output to OFF when
each solenoid becomes the electricity pattern of 1st engine brake during driving at the vehicle speed 25 km/h
or more in any positions other than “R” position and 1GR.
TCM HIGH TEMPERATURE PROTECTION CONTROL
Limit the accelerator opening and forcibly control the vehicle to the low torque driving when the electronic substrate
in TCM reaches the high temperature.
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL
Malfunction detection condition Vehicle speed: 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
Control at malfunction Neutral
Normal return condition
• Vehicle speed: 8 km/h (5 MPH) or less
and
• Engine speed: 2,200 rpm or less
Vehicle behavior
• The torque transmission cannot be performed
• There is a shock just before a vehicle stop
Malfunction detection condition
• Select lever and gear: Any position other than “R” position and 1GR
and
• Vehicle speed: More than 25 km/h (16 MPH)
Control at malfunction Front brake solenoid output signal; OFF
Normal return condition Other than detection condition of malfunction
Vehicle behavior Does not exist
Malfunction detection condition
TCM electronic substrate temperature
• 145°C (293°F) and 120 seconds
or
• 150°C (302°F)
Control at malfunction Accelerator opening: 0.5/8 or less
Normal return condition
• TCM electronic substrate temperature: Less than 140°C (284°F)
and
• Vehicle speed: 5 km/h (3 MPH) or less
Vehicle behavior Accelerator opening: output torque of approximately 0.5/8
TM-80
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
SYSTEM
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL : System Diagram INFOID:0000000005310746
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000005310747
• When an engine and A/T integrated control signal (engine torque) equivalent to the engine drive force is
transmitted from the ECM to the TCM, the TCM controls the line pressure solenoid valve.
This line pressure solenoid controls the pressure regulator valve as the signal pressure and adjusts the pressure
of the operating oil discharged from the oil pump to the line pressure most appropriate to the driving
state.
• The TCM has stored in memory a number of patterns for the optimum line pressure characteristic for the
driving state.
• In order to obtain the most appropriate line pressure characteristic to meet the current driving state, the TCM
controls the line pressure solenoid current value and thus controls the line pressure.
Normal Control
Each clutch is adjusted to the necessary pressure to match the
engine drive force.
Back-up Control (Engine Brake)
When the select operation is performed during driving and the A/T is
shifted down, the line pressure is set according to the vehicle speed.
During Shift Change
JSDIA1345GB
PCIA0008E
PCIA0009E
SYSTEM
TM-81
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
The necessary and adequate line pressure for shift change is set.
For this reason, line pressure pattern setting corresponds to engine
torque and gearshift selection. Also, line pressure characteristic corresponds
to engine speed, during engine brake operation.
At Low Fluid Temperature
When the A/T fluid temperature drops below the prescribed temperature,
in order to speed up the action of each friction element, the line
pressure is set higher than the normal line pressure characteristic.
SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL
PCIA0010E
PCIA0011E
TM-82
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
SYSTEM
SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL : System Diagram INFOID:0000000005310750
JSDIA1675GB
SYSTEM
TM-83
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000005310751
Input/Output Signal Chart
*: This signal is transmitted via communication line.
The clutch pressure control solenoid is controlled by the signals from the switches and sensors. Thus, the
clutch pressure is adjusted to be appropriate to the engine load state and vehicle driving state. It becomes
possible to finely control the clutch hydraulic pressure with high precision and a smoother shift change characteristic
is attained.
The clutch is controlled with the optimum timing and oil pressure by the engine speed, engine torque information,
etc.
Shift Change System Diagram
*1: Full phase real-time feedback control monitors movement of gear ratio at gear change, and controls oil
pressure in real-time to achieve the best gear ratio.
BLIPPING CONTROL
This system makes transmission clutch engage readily by controlling (synchronizing) engine revolution
according to the (calculation of) engine revolution after shifting down.
• “BLIPPING CONTROL” functions.
Sensor Signal TCM function Actuator
Input speed sensor 1, 2 Input speed
Shift change control
• High and low reverse
clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid
valve
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Torque converter clutch solenoid
valve
• Line pressure solenoid
valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid
valve
Output speed sensor Vehicle speed
A/T fluid temperature sensor ATF temperature
ECM
Engine speed signal*
Accelerator pedal position signal*
Closed throttle position signal*
Engine and A/T integrated control signal
(Engine torque)*
BCM Stop lamp switch signal*
PCIA0012E
PCIA0013E
TM-84
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
SYSTEM
- When downshifting by accelerator pedal depression.
- When downshifting by the manual mode.
• TCM selects “BLIPPING CONTROL” or “NORMAL SHIFT CONTROL” according to the gear position, the
selector lever position, the engine torque and the speed when accelerating by pedal depression.
• Engine speed control demand signal is transmitted from TCM to ECM under “BLIPPING CONTROL”.
• ECM synchronizes the engine speed according to the engine speed control demand signal.
Downshifting by accelerator pedal depression
Downshifting by the manual mode
JSDIA0826GB
JSDIA0815GB
JSDIA0817GB
SYSTEM
TM-85
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
IDLE NEUTRAL CONTROL (EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA)
Input/Output Signal Chart
*1: This signal is transmitted via communication line.
*2: V9X models
The TCM activates low brake solenoid valve and controls the low brake oil pressure to the low pressure level
if the driver does not intend to start the vehicle while the vehicle is being stopped in the “D” or “DS” position.
Therefore, the low brake is in the release (slip) status and the power transmission route of A/T is the same status
as the “N” position. This can decrease the engine load and improves the fuel economy because the drive
force of engine is not transmitted to the output shaft of A/T.
NOTE:
During the cold engine starting, the idle speed is increased to activate the three way catalyst. (VQ37VHR models)
Idle Neutral Control Start Condition
Idle neutral control starts when all of the following conditions are satisfied. However, the control ends when
any one of the following conditions becomes insufficient during idle neutral control.
*: V9X models
NOTE:
The idle neutral control is terminated or prohibited when the TCM and ECM detect that the vehicle is in any of
the conditions as per the following.
• Engine cooling water temperature and A/T fluid temperature are below or above a prescribed temperature.
• A/T malfunction occurs.
• DTC is detected.
• Fail-safe mode activates.
• Idle neutral control is performed continuously for a certain period of time.
Sensor
Signal
Each sensor, switch and TCM function Actuator
control unit ⇒ TCM
TCM ⇒ ECM ECM ⇒ TCM
Input speed sensor 1, 2 Input speed
N idle instruction
signal (Standby signal)*
1
N idle instruction
signal (Start signal)*
1
Idle neutral control
Low brake solenoid
valve
Output speed sensor Output shaft revolution
A/T fluid temperature
sensor
ATF temperature
Transmission range
switch
Selector lever position
ECM
Engine speed signal*1
Accelerator pedal position
signal*1
Throttle position signal*1
G sensor signal*1
BCM
Stop lamp switch signal*1
Turn indicator signal*1, *2
ABS actuator electric
unit (control unit) Pressure sensor signal*1
Unified meter and A/C
amp. Vehicle speed signal*1
Driving location : Level road and gentle slope
Selector lever position : “D” and “DS” position
Vehicle speed : 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.0 / 8
Brake pedal : Depress
Engine speed : Idle speed
Turn signal lamp and hazard warning lamp* : OFF
TM-86
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
SYSTEM
Idle Neutral Control Resume Condition
Idle neutral control can be resumed when its start condition is fulfilled after any of the following operations is
performed (unless a malfunction occurs in the vehicle).
• After driving at more than a prescribed speed.
• After shifting the selector lever to any other position than “D” or “DS” position, and then shifting to “D” or “DS”
position again. (VQ37VHR models)
• When idle neutral control start conditions are fulfilled for a certain period of time.
SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL
SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL : System Diagram INFOID:0000000005310752
SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000005310753
It automatically selects the shift pattern (such as road environment and driving style) suitable for the various
situations so as to allow the vehicle to be driven efficiently and smoothly.
ASC (ADAPTIVE SHIFT CONTROL)
JSDIA1426GB
SYSTEM
TM-87
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Input/Output Signal Chart
*: This signal is transmitted via CAN communication line.
• When driving on an up/down slope
ASC judges up/down slope according to engine torque data transmitted from the ECM and vehicle speed.
Fixing at 4GR, 5GR or 6GR on an up-slope prevents shift hunting and controls the vehicle to gain optimum
driving force. On a down-slope, automatic shift-down to 4GR, 5GR or 6GR controls to gain optimum engine
brake.
• When driving on a curve
TCM receives the side G sensor signal from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). It locks to 4GR,
5GR or 6GR position in moderate cornering or to 3GR position in sharp cornering based on this signal. This
prevents any upshift and kickdown during cornering, maintaining smooth vehicle travel.
DS Mode
• Changes to the shift schedule that mainly utilizes the high engine speed zone when ASC is active.
• DS mode can be switched according to the following method.
- When the selector lever is in the “D” position, shifting the selector lever to manual shift gate enables switching
to DS mode.
- When in DS mode, shifting the selector lever to the main shift gate enables to cancel DS mode.
- After switching to manual mode with paddle shifter, switching to DS mode can not be enabled even when the
selector lever is shifted to the manual shift gate.
MANUAL MODE
SYSTEM
Input/Output Signal Chart
*: This signal is transmitted via CAN communication line.
• The TCM receives the manual mode signal, non-manual mode signal, manual mode shift up signal, manual
mode shift down signal, paddle shifter shift up signal and paddle shifter shift down signal from unified meter
and A/C amp. via CAN communication line. The TCM shifts shift pattern control to the manual mode based
on these signals, and then shifts the A/T by operating each solenoid valve according to the shift operation of
the driver.
NOTE:
When paddle shifter is pulled and held for approximately 60 seconds, gear shift using paddle shifter
becomes inoperative. “P1815” is displayed in “self-diagnosis results” of CONSULT-III. In this case, paddle
shifter returns to normal status when ignition switch is turned OFF once and then ON again. Gear shift using
paddle shifter becomes operative.
• The TCM prohibits the manual mode while being in fail-safe mode due to an A/T malfunction, etc. Refer to
TM-105, "Fail-Safe".
• The TCM transmits the manual mode shift refusal signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. if the TCM
refuses the transmission from the driving status of vehicle when the selector lever or paddle shifter shifts to
“UP (+ side)” or “DOWN (− side)” side. The unified meter and A/C amp. blinks shift indicator on the combination
meter and sounds the buzzer to indicate the driver that the shifting is not performed when receiving this
signal. However, the TCM does not transmit the manual mode shift refusal signal in the conditions as per the
following.
- When the selector lever or the paddle shifter shifts to “DOWN (− side)” side while driving in 1GR.
- When the selector lever or the paddle shifter shifts to “UP (+ side)” side while driving in 7GR.
LOCK-UP CONTROL
LOCK-UP CONTROL : System Diagram INFOID:0000000005310754
Sensor Signal TCM function Actuator
Output speed sensor Vehicle speed
Manual mode
• High and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Torque converter clutch solenoid
valve
• Line pressure solenoid valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
A/T fluid temperature sensor ATF temperature
ECM
Engine speed signal*
Accelerator pedal position signal*
Unified meter and A/C amp.
Manual mode signal*
Non-manual mode signal*
Manual mode shift up signal*
Manual mode shift down signal*
Paddle shifter shift up signal*
Paddle shifter shift down signal*
Manual mode shift refusal signal*
JSDIA1350GB
SYSTEM
TM-89
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
LOCK-UP CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000005310755
• The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to eliminate torque converter slip to
increase power transmission efficiency.
• Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low.
• The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the torque converter clutch solenoid
valve, which is controlled by a signal from TCM, and the torque converter clutch control valve engages or
releases the torque converter clutch piston.
Lock-up Operation Condition Table
Lock-up released
• In the lock-up released state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the unlocked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid and the lock-up apply pressure is drained.
in this way, the torque converter clutch piston is not coupled.
Lock-up Applied
• In the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the locked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid and lock-up apply pressure is generated.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is pressed and coupled.
Smooth Lock-up Control
When shifting from the lock-up released state to the lock-up applied state, the current output to the torque converter
clutch solenoid is controlled with the TCM. In this way, when shifting to the lock-up applied state, the
torque converter clutch is temporarily set to the half-clutched state to reduce the shock.
Half-clutched State
• The current output from the TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid is varied to steadily increase the
torque converter clutch solenoid pressure.
In this way, the lock-up apply pressure gradually rises and while the torque converter clutch piston is put into
half-clutched states, the torque converter clutch piston operating pressure is increased and the coupling is
completed smoothly.
Slip Lock-up Control
• In the slip region, the torque converter clutch solenoid current is controlled with the TCM to put it into the
half-clutched state. This absorbs the engine torque fluctuation and lock-up operates from low speed.
This raises the fuel efficiency for 2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR, 6GR and 7GR.
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000004969594
• Shift lock prevents an unintentional start of the vehicle that may be caused by an incorrect operation while
selector lever is in the “P” position.
• Selector lever can be shifted from the “P” position to another position when the following conditions are satisfied.
- Ignition switch ON
- Stop lamp switch is ON (brake pedal is depressed)
JSDIA0847GB
Selector lever “D” position “M” position
Gear position 7 6 5 4 3 2 7 6 5 4 3 2
Lock-up × – – – – – × × × × × ×
Slip lock-up × × × × × × × × × × × ×
TM-90
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
SYSTEM
- Selector lever knob button is pressed
SHIFT LOCK OPERATION AT “P” POSITION
When Brake Pedal Is Not Depressed (No Shift Operation Allowed)
The shift lock solenoid (A) inside the shift lock unit is not energized if
the brake pedal is not depressed while the ignition switch is ON.
The lock plate (B) lowers according to the downward movement of
the position pin (C) when the selector button (D) is pressed, and
presses only slider B (E) into the shift lock unit. Slider A (F) located
below the lock plate prevents the downward movement of the lock
plate with the spring force. The selector lever cannot be shifted from
the “P” position for this reason.
However, slider A is forcibly pressed into the shift lock unit, allowing
the selector lever to shift if the shift lock release button is pressed.
When Brake Pedal Is Depressed (Shift Operation Allowed)
The shift lock solenoid (A) inside the shift lock unit is energized and
the relative positions of sliders A (B) and B (C) are maintained when
the brake pedal is depressed while the ignition switch is ON.
The lock plate (D) lowers according to the downward movement of
the position pin (E), thrusting away sliders A and B, when the selector
button (F) is pressed.
The position pin lowers to the position that allows shift operation for
this reason. As a result, the selector lever can be shifted out of the P
position.
OPERATION AT OTHER THAN “P” POSITION
The shift lock function will not operate at any position other than “P”
because the lock plate (A) is only set for the “P” position. Accordingly,
the selector lever can be shifted to any position regardless of
the brake operation.
The position pin (B) enters the “P” position thrusting away the lock
plate when the selector lever is shifted to the “P” position. Then, the
shift mechanism is locked when the selector button (C) is released.
“P” POSITION RETAINING MECHANISM (IGNITION SWITCH LOCK)
When ignition switch is not in the ON position, power is not applied to the shift lock solenoid in the shift lock
unit. This causes shift lock state, and then “P” position is retained.
When an actuating system in the shift lock unit has a malfunction, selector lever is unable to operate from the
“P” position even when pressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch ON. However, when pressing the shift
lock release button, slider A is forcibly pressed into the shift lock unit. This allows shift lock to be released and
selector lever enables the select operation from the “P” position.
CAUTION:
Never use the shift lock release button except when the select lever is inoperative even when pressing
the brake pedal with the ignition switch ON.
JSDIA0119ZZ
JSDIA0120ZZ
JSDIA0121ZZ
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
TM-91
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000005320775
The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems.
The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD) performed by the TCM in combination with
the ECM. A malfunction is indicated by the MI (malfunction indicator) and is stored as a DTC in the ECM memory
and in the TCM memory.
The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the TCM. A malfunction history is stored in the
TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD self-diagnostic items. For details, refer to TM-109,
"DTC Index".
OBD FUNCTION
The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD) functions for the A/T system.
One function is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is
sent to the ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part.
The other function is to indicate a diagnostic result by means of the MI (malfunction indicator) on the instrument
panel. Sensors, switches and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.
The MI automatically illuminates in “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” when a malfunction is sensed in relation
to A/T system parts. For details, refer to EC-134, "Diagnosis Description".
TM-92
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION) INFOID:0000000004969598
CONSULT-III APPLICATION ITEMS
*: Although “Function Test” and “Special Function” are selectable, do not use its.
WORK SUPPORT
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Refer to TM-109, "DTC Index".
IGN Counter
The IGN counter is indicated in Freeze frame data (FFD) and indicates the number of times that the ignition
switch is turned ON after returning to the normal state from DTC.
• CAN malfunction
- The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now.
- The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition
switch OFF → ON.
- The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39.
• Other than CAN malfunction
- The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now.
- The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...254 → 255 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition
switch OFF → ON.
- The number is fixed to255 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 255.
DATA MONITOR
X: Standard, —: Not applicable, : Option
Diagnostic test mode Function
Work Support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately.
Self Diagnostic Results Retrieve DTC from ECU and display diagnostic items.
Data Monitor Monitor the input/output signal of the control unit in real time.
CAN Diagnosis This mode displays a network diagnosis result about CAN by a diagram.
CAN Diagnostic Support
Monitor
It monitors the starts of CAN communication.
DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
ECU Identification Display the ECU identification number (part number etc.) of the selected system.
Function Test*
This mode can show results of self-diagnosis of ECU with either “OK” or “NG”. For engine, more practical
tests regarding sensors/switches and/or actuators are available.
Special Function* Other results or histories, etc. that are recorded in ECU are displayed.
Item name Description
G SENSOR CALIBRATION Calibrates G sensor.
Monitored item (Unit)
Monitor Item Selection
ECU IN- Remarks
PUT SIGNALS
MAIN SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM
ITEM
VHCL/S SE-A/T (km/h or mph) X X
Displays the vehicle speed calculated by the
TCM from the output shaft revolution.
ESTM VSP SIG (km/h or mph) X —
Displays the vehicle speed signal received via
CAN communication.
OUTPUT REV (rpm) X X
Displays the output speed calculated from the
pulse signal of output speed sensor.
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
TM-93
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
INPUT SPEED (rpm) X X
Displays the input speed calculated from front
sun gear revolution and front carrier revolution.
F SUN GR REV (rpm) — —
Displays the front sun gear revolution calculated
from the pulse signal of input speed sensor
1.
F CARR GR REV (rpm) — —
Displays the front carrier gear revolution calculated
from the pulse signal of input speed sensor
2.
ENGINE SPEED (rpm) X X
Displays the engine speed received via CAN
communication.
TC SLIP SPEED (rpm) — X
Displays the revolution difference between input
speed and engine speed.
ACCELE POSI (0.0/8) X —
Displays the accelerator position estimated value
received via CAN communication.
THROTTLE POSI (0.0/8) X X
Displays the throttle position received via CAN
communication.
ATF TEMP 1 (°C or °F) X X
Displays the ATF temperature of oil pan calculated
from the signal voltage of A/T fluid temperature
sensor.
ATF TEMP 2 (°C or °F) X X
Displays the ATF temperature estimated value
of torque converter outlet calculated from the
signal voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor.
ATF TEMP SE 1 (V) — —
Displays the signal voltage of A/T fluid temperature
sensor.
BATTERY VOLT (V) X — Displays the power supply voltage of TCM.
LINE PRES SOL (A) — X
Displays the command current from TCM to the
line pressure solenoid.
TCC SOLENOID (A) — X
Displays the command current from TCM to the
torque converter clutch solenoid.
L/B SOLENOID (A) — X
Displays the command current from TCM to the
low brake solenoid.
FR/B SOLENOID (A) — X
Displays the command current from TCM to the
front brake solenoid.
HLR/C SOL (A) — X
Displays the command current from TCM to the
high and low reverse clutch solenoid.
I/C SOLENOID (A) — X
Displays the command current from TCM to the
input clutch solenoid.
D/C SOLENOID (A) — X
Displays the command current from TCM to the
direct clutch solenoid.
2346/B SOL (A) — X
Displays the command current from TCM to the
2346 brake solenoid.
L/P SOL MON (A) — —
Monitors the command current from TCM to the
line pressure solenoid, and displays the monitor
value.
TCC SOL MON (A) — —
Monitors the command current from TCM to the
torque converter clutch solenoid, and displays
the monitor value.
L/B SOL MON (A) — —
Monitors the command current from TCM to the
low brake solenoid, and displays the monitor
value.
Monitored item (Unit)
Monitor Item Selection
ECU IN- Remarks
PUT SIGNALS
MAIN SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM
ITEM
TM-94
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
FR/B SOL MON (A) — —
Monitors the command current from TCM to the
front brake solenoid, and displays the monitor
value.
HLR/C SOL MON (A) — —
Monitors the command current from TCM to the
high and low reverse clutch solenoid, and displays
the monitor value.
I/C SOL MON (A) — —
Monitors the command current from TCM to the
input clutch solenoid, and displays the monitor
value.
D/C SOL MON (A) — —
Monitors the command current from TCM to the
direct clutch solenoid, and displays the monitor
value.
2346/B SOL MON (A) — —
Monitors the command current from TCM to the
2346 brake solenoid, and displays the monitor
value.
GEAR RATIO — X
Displays the gear ratio calculated from input
speed and output speed.
ENGINE TORQUE (Nm) — —
Displays the engine torque estimated value received
via CAN communication.
ENG TORQUE D (Nm) — —
Displays the engine torque estimated value reflected
the requested torque of each control
unit received via CAN communication.
INPUT TRQ S (Nm) — —
Displays the input torque using for the oil pressure
calculation process of shift change control.
INPUT TRQ L/P (Nm) — —
Displays the input torque using for the oil pressure
calculation process of line pressure control.
TRGT PRES L/P (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
Displays the target oil pressure value of torque
converter clutch solenoid valve calculated by
the oil pressure calculation process of lock-up
control.
TRGT PRES TCC (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
Displays the target oil pressure value of torque
converter clutch solenoid valve calculated by
the oil pressure calculation process of shift
change control.
TRGT PRES L/B (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
Displays the target oil pressure value of low
brake solenoid valve calculated by the oil pressure
calculation process of shift change control.
TRGT PRE FR/B (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
Displays the target oil pressure value of front
brake solenoid valve calculated by the oil pressure
calculation process of shift change control.
TRG PRE HLR/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
Displays the target oil pressure value of high
and low reverse clutch solenoid valve calculated
by the oil pressure calculation process of
shift change control.
TRGT PRES I/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
Displays the target oil pressure value of input
clutch solenoid valve calculated by the oil pressure
calculation process of shift change control.
Monitored item (Unit)
Monitor Item Selection
ECU IN- Remarks
PUT SIGNALS
MAIN SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM
ITEM
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
TM-95
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
TRGT PRES D/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
Displays the target oil pressure value of direct
clutch solenoid valve calculated by the oil pressure
calculation process of shift change control.
TRG PRE 2346/B (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
Displays the target oil pressure value of 2346
brake solenoid valve calculated by the oil pressure
calculation process of shift change control.
SHIFT PATTERN — —
Displays the gear change data using the shift
pattern control.
VEHICLE SPEED (km/h or mph) — —
Displays the vehicle speed for control using the
control of TCM.
G SEN SLOPE* (%) X —
Displays the inclination angle calculated by the
G sensor signal received via CAN communication.
RANGE SW 4 (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the operation status of transmission
range switch 4.
RANGE SW 3 (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the operation status of transmission
range switch 3.
RANGE SW 2 (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the operation status of transmission
range switch 2.
RANGE SW 1 (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the operation status of transmission
range switch 1.
SFT DWN ST SW (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the operation status of paddle shifter
(down switch).
SFT UP ST SW (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the operation status of paddle shifter
(up switch).
DOWN SW LEVER (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the operation status of selector lever
(down switch).
UP SW LEVER (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the operation status of selector lever
(up switch).
NON M-MODE SW (ON/OFF) X —
Displays whether the selector lever is in any
position other than manual shift gate position.
MANU MODE SW (ON/OFF) X —
Displays whether the selector lever is in the
manual shift gate position.
TOW MODE SW (ON/OFF) — —
• Displays the reception status of tow mode
signal received via CAN communication.
• Not mounted but displayed.
DS RANGE (ON/OFF) — — Displays whether it is the DS mode.
1 POSITION SW (ON/OFF) X —
• Displays the reception status of 1 position
switch signal received via CAN communication.
• Not mounted but displayed.
OD CONT SW (ON/OFF) X —
• Displays the reception status of overdrive
control switch signal received via CAN communication.
• Not mounted but displayed.
BRAKESW (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the reception status of stop lamp
switch signal received via CAN communication.
Monitored item (Unit)
Monitor Item Selection
ECU IN- Remarks
PUT SIGNALS
MAIN SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM
ITEM
TM-96
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
POWERSHIFT SW (ON/OFF) X —
• Displays the reception status of POWER
mode signal received via CAN communication.
• Not mounted but displayed.
ASCD-OD CUT (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the reception status of ASCD OD cancel
request signal received via CAN communication.
ASCD-CRUISE (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the reception status of ASCD operation
signal received via CAN communication.
ABS SIGNAL (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the reception status of ABS operation
signal received via CAN communication.
TCS GR/P KEEP (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the reception status of TCS gear keep
request signal received via CAN communication.
TCS SIGNAL 2 (ON/OFF) X —
Displays whether the reception value of A/T
shift schedule change demand signal received
via CAN communication is “cold”.
TCS SIGNAL 1 (ON/OFF) X —
Displays whether the reception value of A/T
shift schedule change demand signal received
via CAN communication is “warm”.
LOW/B PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — —
In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the
identified malfunction point judged by TCM is
the related parts of low brake.
HC/IC/FRB PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — —
In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the
identified malfunction point judged by TCM is
the related parts of high and low reversed
clutch, input clutch or front brake.
IC/FRB PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — —
In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the
identified malfunction point judged by TCM is
the related parts of input clutch or front brake.
HLR/C PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — —
In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the
identified malfunction point judged by TCM is
the related parts of high and low reversed
clutch.
W/O THL POS (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the kickdown condition signal status
received via CAN communication.
CLSD THL POS (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the idling status signal status received
via CAN communication.
DRV CST JUDGE (DRIVE/COAST) — —
Displays the judgment results of “driving” or
“coasting” judged by TCM.
SHIFT IND SIGNAL — —
Displays the transmission value of shift position
signal transmitted via CAN communication.
STARTER RELAY (ON/OFF) — —
Displays the command status from TCM to
starter relay.
F-SAFE IND/L (ON/OFF) — —
Displays the transmission status of A/T CHECK
indicator lamp signal transmitted via CAN communication.
ATF WARN LAMP (ON/OFF) — —
• Displays the transmission status of ATF temperature
signal transmitted via CAN communication.
• Not mounted but displayed.
Monitored item (Unit)
Monitor Item Selection
ECU IN- Remarks
PUT SIGNALS
MAIN SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM
ITEM
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
TM-97
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
*: Except for Russia
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION
MANU MODE IND (ON/OFF) — —
Displays the transmission status of manual
mode signal transmitted via CAN communication.
ON OFF SOL MON (ON/OFF) — —
Monitors the command value from TCM to the
anti-interlock solenoid, and displays the monitor
status.
START RLY MON (ON/OFF) — —
Monitors the command value from TCM to the
starter relay, and displays the monitor status.
ON OFF SOL (ON/OFF) — —
Displays the command status from TCM to
anti-interlock solenoid.
SLCT LVR POSI — X Displays the shift positions recognized by TCM.
GEAR — X
Displays the current transmission gear position
recognized by TCM.
NEXT GR POSI — —
Displays the target gear position of gear
change that is calculated based on the vehicle
speed information and throttle information.
SHIFT MODE — —
Displays the transmission driving mode recognized
by TCM.
D/C PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — —
In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the
identified malfunction point judged by TCM is
the related parts of direct clutch.
FR/B PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — —
In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the
identified malfunction point judged by TCM is
the related parts of front brake.
2346/B PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — —
In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the
identified malfunction point judged by TCM is
the related parts of 2346 brake.
2346B/DC PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — —
In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the
identified malfunction point judged by TCM is
the related parts of 2346 brake or direct clutch.
N IDLE STATUS* (ON/OFF) — —
Displays the control status of idle neutral control.
Monitored item (Unit)
Monitor Item Selection
ECU IN- Remarks
PUT SIGNALS
MAIN SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM
ITEM
TM-98
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
Item Description Check item
1ST GR FNCTN P0731
Following items for “1GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed.
• Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
• Input clutch solenoid
valve
• Front brake solenoid
valve
• Direct clutch solenoid
valve
• High and low reverse
clutch solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid
valve
• 2346 brake solenoid
valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid
valve
• Reverse brake
• Each clutch
• Hydraulic control circuit
2ND GR FNCTN P0732
Following items for “2GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed.
• Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
3RD GR FNCTN P0733
Following items for “3GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed.
• Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
4TH GR FNCTN P0734
Following items for “4GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed.
• Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
5TH GR FNCTN P0735
Following items for “5GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed.
• Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
6TH GR FNCTN P0729
Following items for “6GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed.
• Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
7TH GR FNCTN P1734
Following items for “7GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed.
• Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
TCC SOL FUNCTN CHECK
Following items for “TCC solenoid function” can be confirmed.
• Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
• Harness or connectors
• Torque converter
clutch solenoid valve
• Torque converter
• Input speed sensor 1,
2
• Hydraulic control circuit
TCM
TM-99
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
TCM
Reference Value INFOID:0000000004969713
VALUES ON DIAGNOSIS TOOL
NOTE:
1. The CONSULT-III electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each
solenoid).
Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT-III display. If the difference is
noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical
parts in accordance with the specified diagnostic procedures.
2. Shift schedule (that implies gear position) on CONSULT-III may slightly differ from that is described in Service
Manual. This occurs because of the reason as per the following:
- Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance
- Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start
- Gear position displayed on CONSULT-III indicates the point where shifts are completed
3. Display of solenoid valves on CONSULT-III changes at the start of shifting, while gear position is displayed
upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM).
CONSULT-III MONITOR ITEM
Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.)
VHCL/S SE-A/T During driving
Approximately equals the speedometer
reading.
ESTM VSP SIG During driving
Approximately equals the speedometer
reading.
OUTPUT REV During driving (lock-up ON) Tachometer / Gear ratio
INPUT SPEED During driving (lock-up ON)
Approximately equals the engine
speed.
F SUN GR REV During driving
Revolution of front sun gear is indicated.
F CARR GR REV During driving Revolution of front carrier is indicated.
ENGINE SPEED Engine running
Closely equals the tachometer reading.
TC SLIP SPEED During driving Engine speed − Input speed
ACCELE POSI
Accelerator pedal is released 0.0/8
Accelerator pedal is fully depressed 8.0/8
THROTTLE POSI
Accelerator pedal is released 0.0/8
Accelerator pedal is fully depressed 8.0/8
ATF TEMP 1 Ignition switch ON
Temperature of ATF in the oil pan is indicated.
ATF TEMP 2 Ignition switch ON
Temperature of ATF at the exit of
torque converter.
ATF TEMP SE 1 0°C (32° F) – 20°C (68°F) – 80°C (176°F) 3.3 – 2.7 – 0.9 V
BATTERY VOLT Ignition switch ON Battery voltage (11 V – 14 V)
LINE PRES SOL During driving 0.2 – 0.6 A
TCC SOLENOID
Slip lock-up is active 0.2 – 0.8 A
Lock-up is active 0.8 A
Other than the above 0 A
L/B SOLENOID
Low brake is engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
Low brake is disengaged 0 – 0.05 A
TM-100
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
TCM
FR/B SOLENOID
Front brake is engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
Front brake is disengaged 0 – 0.05 A
HLR/C SOL
High and low reverse clutch is disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
High and low reverse clutch is engaged 0 – 0.05 A
I/C SOLENOID
Input clutch is disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
Input clutch is engaged 0 – 0.05 A
D/C SOLENOID
Direct clutch is disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
Direct clutch is engaged 0 – 0.05 A
2346/B SOL
2346 brake is engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
2346 brake is disengaged 0 – 0.05 A
L/P SOL MON During driving 0.2 – 0.6 A
TCC SOL MON
Slip lock-up is active 0.2 – 0.8 A
Lock-up is active 0.8 A
Other than the above 0 A
L/B SOL MON
Low brake is engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
Low brake is disengaged 0 – 0.05 A
FR/B SOL MON
Front brake is engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
Front brake is disengaged 0 – 0.05 A
HLR/C SOL MON
High and low reverse clutch is disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
High and low reverse clutch is engaged 0 – 0.05 A
I/C SOL MON
Input clutch is disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
Input clutch is engaged 0 – 0.05 A
D/C SOL MON
Direct clutch is disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
Direct clutch is engaged 0 – 0.05 A
2346/B SOL MON
2346 brake is engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
2346 brake is disengaged 0 – 0.05 A
GEAR RATIO
Driving with 1GR 4.924
Driving with 2GR 3.194
Driving with 3GR 2.043
Driving with 4GR 1.412
Driving with 5GR 1.000
Driving with 6GR 0.862
Driving with 7GR 0.772
ENGINE TORQUE During driving
Changes the value according to the acceleration
or deceleration.
ENG TORQUE D During driving
Changes the value according to the acceleration
or deceleration.
INPUT TRQ S During driving
Changes the value according to the acceleration
or deceleration.
INPUT TRQ L/P During driving
Changes the value according to the acceleration
or deceleration.
TRGT PRES L/P
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions 490 kPa
Other than the above 490 – 1370 kPa
TRGT PRES TCC
Slip lock-up is active 0 – 600 kPa
Lock-up is active 600 kPa
Other than the above 0 kPa
Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.)
TCM
TM-101
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
TRGT PRES L/B
Low brake is engaged 1370 kPa
Low brake is disengaged 0 kPa
TRGT PRES FR/B
Front brake is engaged 1370 kPa
Front brake is disengaged 0 kPa
TRG PRE HLR/C
High and low reverse clutch is disengaged 1370 kPa
High and low reverse clutch is engaged 0 kPa
TRGT PRES I/C
Input clutch is disengaged 1370 kPa
Input clutch is engaged 0 kPa
TRGT PRES D/C
Direct clutch is disengaged 1370 kPa
Direct clutch is engaged 0 kPa
TRG PRE 2346/B
2346 brake is engaged 1370 kPa
2346 brake is disengaged 0 kPa
SHIFT PATTERN During normal driving (without shift changes) FF
VEHICLE SPEED During driving
Approximately equals the speedometer
reading.
G SEN SLOPE*1
Level road 0%
Uphill slope Positive value (maximum 40.45%)
Downhill slope Negative value (minimum −40.45%)
RANGE SW 4
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions OFF
Other than the above ON
RANGE SW 3
Selector lever in “P”, “R” and “N” positions OFF
Other than the above ON
RANGE SW 2
Selector lever in “P” and “R” positions OFF
Other than the above ON
RANGE SW 1
Selector lever in “P” position OFF
Other than the above ON
SFT DWN ST SW
Paddle shifter (shift-down) is pulled to − side ON
Other than the above OFF
SFT UP ST SW
Paddle shifter (shift-up) is pulled to + side ON
Other than the above OFF
DOWN SW LEVER
Selector lever is shifted to − side ON
Other than the above OFF
UP SW LEVER
Selector lever is shifted to + side ON
Other than the above OFF
NON M-MODE SW
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side OFF
Other than the above ON
MANU MODE SW
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side ON
Other than the above OFF
TOW MODE SW*2
Tow mode ON
Other than the above OFF
DS RANGE
Driving with DS mode ON
Other than the above OFF
1 POSITION SW*2
Selector lever in “1” position ON
Other than the above OFF
Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.)
TM-102
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
TCM
OD CONT SW*2
When overdrive control switch is depressed ON
When overdrive control switch is released OFF
BRAKESW
Brake pedal is depressed ON
Brake pedal is released OFF
POWERSHIFT SW*2
Power mode ON
Other than the above OFF
ASCD-OD CUT
When TCM receives ASCD OD cancel request signal ON
Other than the above OFF
ASCD-CRUISE
ASCD operate ON
Other than the above OFF
ABS SIGNAL
ABS operate ON
Other than the above OFF
TCS GR/P KEEP
When TCM receives TCS gear keep request signal ON
Other than the above OFF
TCS SIGNAL 2
When the reception value of A/T shift schedule change demand
signal is “cold”
ON
Other than the above OFF
TCS SIGNAL 1
When the reception value of A/T shift schedule change demand
signal is “warm”
ON
Other than the above OFF
LOW/B PARTS
At 4GR - 5GR - 6GR shift control FAIL
Other than the above NOTFAIL
HC/IC/FRB PARTS
At 1GR - 2GR - 3GR shift control FAIL
Other than the above NOTFAIL
IC/FRB PARTS
At 4GR - 5GR - 6GR shift control FAIL
Other than the above NOTFAIL
HLR/C PARTS
At 4GR - 5GR - 6GR shift control FAIL
Other than the above NOTFAIL
W/O THL POS
Accelerator pedal is fully depressed ON
Accelerator pedal is released OFF
CLSD THL POS
Accelerator pedal is released ON
Accelerator pedal is fully depressed OFF
DRV CST JUDGE
Accelerator pedal is depressed DRIVE
Accelerator pedal is released COAST
Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.)
TCM
TM-103
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
SHIFT IND SIGNAL
When the selector lever is positioned in between each position
OFF
Selector lever in “P” position P
Selector lever in “R” position R
Selector lever in “N” position N
Selector lever in “D” position
D
Selector lever in “D” position: 7GR
Selector lever in “D” position: 6GR 6
Selector lever in “D” position: 5GR 5
Selector lever in “D” position: 4GR 4
Selector lever in “D” position: 3GR 3
Selector lever in “D” position: 2GR 2
Selector lever in “D” position: 1GR 1
Selector lever in “M” position: 1GR M1
Selector lever in “M” position: 2GR M2
Selector lever in “M” position: 3GR M3
Selector lever in “M” position: 4GR M4
Selector lever in “M” position: 5GR M5
Selector lever in “M” position: 6GR M6
Selector lever in “M” position: 7GR M7
Driving with DS mode DS
STARTER RELAY
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions ON
Other than the above OFF
F-SAFE IND/L
For 2 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON ON
Other than the above OFF
ATF WARN LAMP*2
When TCM transmits the ATF indicator lamp signal ON
Other than the above OFF
MANU MODE IND
Driving with manual mode ON
Other than the above OFF
ON OFF SOL MON
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions
ON
Driving with 1GR to 3GR
Other than the above OFF
START RLY MON
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions ON
Other than the above OFF
ON OFF SOL
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions
ON
Driving with 1GR to 3GR
Other than the above OFF
Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.)
TM-104
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
TCM
*1: Except for Russia
*2: Not mounted but always display as OFF.
TERMINAL LAYOUT
PHYSICAL VALUES
SLCT LVR POSI
Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions N/P
Selector lever in “R” position R
Selector lever in “D” and “DS” positions
D
Selector lever in “M” position: 7GR
Selector lever in “M” position: 6GR 6
Selector lever in “M” position: 5GR 5
Selector lever in “M” position: 4GR 4
Selector lever in “M” position: 3GR 3
Selector lever in “M” position: 2GR 2
Selector lever in “M” position: 1GR 1
GEAR During driving 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th
NEXT GR POSI During driving 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th
SHIFT MODE
Driving with the D position 0 or 3
Driving with the manual mode 4 or 8
D/C PARTS
At 1GR - 2GR shift control FAIL
Other than the above NOTFAIL
FR/B PARTS
At control fixed to 1GR FAIL
Other than the above NOTFAIL
2346/B PARTS
At control fixed to 1GR FAIL
Other than the above NOTFAIL
2346B/DC PARTS
At 2GR - 3GR - 4GR shift control FAIL
Other than the above NOTFAIL
N IDLE STATUS*1
Idle neutral control is active ON
Other than the above OFF
Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.)
SCIA1658E
Terminal
(Wire color)
Description
Condition
Value (Approx.)
+ − Signal name
Input/
Output
1
(Y)
Ground Power supply Input
Ignition switch ON
Battery
voltage
Ignition switch OFF 0 V
TCM
TM-105
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
*1: VQ37VHR models
*2: V9X models
*3: LHD models
*4: RHD models
*5: RHD models with VQ37VHR
*6: Except RHD models with VQ37VHR
Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000005321585
TCM has the electrical fail-safe mode. The mode is divided into a maximum of 3 phases (1st fail-safe, 2nd failsafe
and final fail-safe) and functions so that the operation can be continued even if the signal circuit of the
main electronically controlled input/output parts is damaged.
Even if the electronic circuit is normal, the fail-safe mode may start under special conditions (such as when the
brake pedal is depressed suddenly from a hard wheel spin status to stop the rotation of wheels). In this case,
turn the ignition switch OFF and back to ON after 5 seconds to resume the normal shift pattern.
Consequently, the customer's vehicle may already return to the normal condition. Refer to TM-118, "Diagnosis
Flow".
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
2
(R)*1
(LG)*2
Ground
Power supply
(Memory back-up)
Input Always
Battery
voltage
3
(L)
— CAN-H
Input/
Output
— —
4
(V)
K-line (CONSULT-III
signal)
Input/
Output
— —
5
(B)
Ground Ground Output Always 0 V
6
(Y)*3
(G)*4
Ground Power supply Input
Ignition switch ON
Battery
voltage
Ignition switch OFF 0 V
7
(SB)*5
(R)*6
Ground Back-up lamp relay Input Ignition switch ON
Selector lever in “R” position. 0 V
Selector lever in other positions.
Battery
voltage
8
(P)
— CAN-L
Input/
Output
— —
9
(GR)
Ground Starter relay Output Ignition switch ON
Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions.
Battery
voltage
Selector lever in other positions. 0 V
10
(B)
Ground Ground Output Always 0 V
Terminal
(Wire color)
Description
Condition
Value (Approx.)
+ − Signal name
Input/
Output
1st Fail-Safe
The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
2nd Fail-Safe
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunctioning
parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
Final Fail-Safe
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.
TM-106
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
TCM
DTC
Vehicle
condition
Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe
P0615 — Starter is disabled — Starter is disabled
P0705 —
• Fixed in the “D” position (The
shifting can be performed)
• 30 km/h (19MPH) or less
• Lock-up is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears
of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Shift position indicator is
switched OFF
• Starter relay is switched OFF
(starter is disabled)
• Back-up lamp is OFF
• Large shift shock
• Fixed in the “D” position (The
shifting can be performed)
• 30 km/h (19 MPH) or less
• Lock-up is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears
of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Shift position indicator is
switched OFF
• Starter relay is switched OFF
(starter is disabled)
• Back-up lamp is OFF
• Large shift shock
P0710
Between
the gears of
1 - 2 - 3
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
Between • Manual mode is prohibited
the gears of
4 - 5 - 6 - 7
• Fix the gear while driving
• Manual mode is prohibited
P0717
Between
the gears of
1 - 2 - 3
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
Between • Manual mode is prohibited
the gears of
4 - 5 - 6 - 7
• Fix the gear while driving
• Manual mode is prohibited
P0720
Between
the gears of
1 - 2 - 3
• Only downshift can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• A vehicle speed signal from the
unified meter and A/C amp. is regarded
as an effective signal
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
Between
the gears of
4 - 5 - 6 - 7
• Fix the gear at driving
• Manual mode is prohibited
• A vehicle speed signal from the
unified meter and A/C amp. is regarded
as an effective signal
P0729
P0731
P0732
P0733
P0734
P0735
P1734
Neutral
malfunction
between
the gears of
1 - 2 - 3 and
7
• Locks in 4GR
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Neutral
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
Other than
the above
• Driving with the gear ratio between
1GR and 2GR
• Driving with the gear ratio between
2GR and 3GR
• Locks in 3GR
• Locks in 4GR
• Fix the gear while driving
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Neutral
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 2 - 3 - 4 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 3 - 4 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
TCM
TM-107
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P0730 —
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Neutral
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
P0740 —
• Lock-up is prohibited
• Slip lock-up is prohibited
• Lock-up is prohibited
• Slip lock-up is prohibited
P0744 —
• Lock-up is prohibited
• Slip lock-up is prohibited
• Lock-up is prohibited
• Slip lock-up is prohibited
P0750
P0775
P0795
P2713
P2722
P2731
P2807
• Locks in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR,
6GR or 7GR
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 3 - 4 - 5 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
P0780 —
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Neutral
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
P1585 — Idle neutral control is prohibited — Idle neutral control is prohibited
P1705 —
• Downshift when accelerator pedal
is depressed is prohibited
• Upshift when accelerator pedal
is released is prohibited
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Downshift when accelerator pedal
is depressed is prohibited
• Upshift when accelerator pedal
is released is prohibited
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Downshift when accelerator pedal
is depressed is prohibited
• Upshift when accelerator pedal
is released is prohibited
• Manual mode is prohibited
P1730 —
• Neutral
• Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears
of 2 - 3 - 4 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 3 - 4 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
P1815
Paddle
switch malfunction
Only the paddle switch is prohibited — Only the paddle switch is prohibited
Gate switch
malfunction
Only the gate switch is prohibited — Only the gate switch is prohibited
Malfunction
of both
switches
Manual mode is prohibited — Manual mode is prohibited
U0300
U1000
Between
the gears of
1 - 2 - 3
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
— • The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Line pressure is set to the maximum
hydraulic pressure
• Manual mode is prohibited
Between
the gears of
4 - 5 - 6 - 7
• Fix the gear at driving
• Manual mode is prohibited
P0720
and
P1721
— Locks in 5GR — Locks in 5GR
DTC
Vehicle
condition
Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe
TM-108
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
TCM
Protection Control INFOID:0000000005321586
The TCM becomes the protection control status temporarily to protect the safety when the safety of TCM and
transmission is lost. It automatically returns to the normal status if the safety is secured.
The TCM has the following protection control.
REVERSE INHIBIT CONTROL
Intercepts the torque transmission and shift to the neutral status if the selector lever is shifted to “R” position
while the vehicle moves forward at the vehicle speed 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more.
1ST ENGINE BRAKE PROTECTION CONTROL
Controls the engine brake so as not to make effective by turning the front brake solenoid output to OFF when
each solenoid becomes the electricity pattern of 1st engine brake during driving at the vehicle speed 25 km/h
or more in any positions other than “R” position and 1GR.
TCM HIGH TEMPERATURE PROTECTION CONTROL
Limit the accelerator opening and forcibly control the vehicle to the low torque driving when the electronic substrate
in TCM reaches the high temperature.
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000005321587
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the priority as per the
following list.
Malfunction detection condition Vehicle speed: 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
Control at malfunction Neutral
Normal return condition
• Vehicle speed: 8 km/h (5 MPH) or less
and
• Engine speed: 2,200 rpm or less
Vehicle behavior
• The torque transmission cannot be performed
• There is a shock just before a vehicle stop
Malfunction detection condition
• Select lever and gear: Any position other than “R” position and 1GR
and
• Vehicle speed: More than 25 km/h (16 MPH)
Control at malfunction Front brake solenoid output signal; OFF
Normal return condition Other than detection condition of malfunction
Vehicle behavior Does not exist
Malfunction detection condition
TCM electronic substrate temperature
• 145°C (293°F) and 120 seconds
or
• 150°C (302°F)
Control at malfunction Accelerator opening: 0.5/8 or less
Normal return condition
• TCM electronic substrate temperature: Less than 140°C (284°F)
and
• Vehicle speed: 5 km/h (3 MPH) or less
Vehicle behavior Accelerator opening: output torque of approximately 0.5/8
Priority Detected items (DTC) Reference
1 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT TM-129
TCM
TM-109
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
DTC Index INFOID:0000000005321588
NOTE:
• If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the priority as per
the following list. Refer to TM-108, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart".
• The IGN counter is indicated in Freeze frame data (FFD). Refer to TM-92, "CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION)".
2
P0615 STARTER RELAY TM-130
P0705 T/M RANGE SWITCH A TM-132
P0710 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A TM-133
P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A TM-135
P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR TM-136
P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER TM-153
P0745 PC SOLENOID A TM-155
P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A TM-156
P0775 PC SOLENOID B TM-157
P0795 PC SOLENOID C TM-159
P2713 PC SOLENOID D TM-176
P2722 PC SOLENOID E TM-177
P2731 PC SOLENOID F TM-178
P2807 PC SOLENOID G TM-179
3
P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-140
P0730 INCORRECT GR RATIO TM-142
P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-143
P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-145
P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-147
P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-149
P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-151
P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER TM-154
P0780 SHIFT TM-158
P1730 INTERLOCK TM-167
P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-169
4
U0300 CAN COMM DATA TM-128
P0725 ENGINE SPEED TM-138
P1585 G SENSOR TM-160
P1705 TP SENSOR TM-164
P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL TM-165
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH TM-171
Priority Detected items (DTC) Reference
Items
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
DTC*2
MI*1, “ENGINE” with CON- Reference
SULT-III or GST
CONSULT-III only
“TRANSMISSION”
STARTER RELAY — P0615 TM-130
T/M RANGE SWITCH A P0705 P0705 TM-132
FLUID TEMP SENSOR A P0710 P0710 TM-133
INPUT SPEED SENSOR A P0717 P0717 TM-135
TM-110
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
TCM
*1: Refer to TM-91, "Diagnosis Description".
*2: These numbers are prescribed by ISO 15031-5.
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR P0720 P0720 TM-136
ENGINE SPEED — P0725 TM-138
6GR INCORRECT RATIO P0729 P0729 TM-140
INCORRECT GR RATIO P0730 P0730 TM-142
1GR INCORRECT RATIO P0731 P0731 TM-143
2GR INCORRECT RATIO P0732 P0732 TM-145
3GR INCORRECT RATIO P0733 P0733 TM-147
4GR INCORRECT RATIO P0734 P0734 TM-149
5GR INCORRECT RATIO P0735 P0735 TM-151
TORQUE CONVERTER P0740 P0740 TM-153
TORQUE CONVERTER P0744 P0744 TM-154
PC SOLENOID A P0745 P0745 TM-155
SHIFT SOLENOID A P0750 P0750 TM-156
PC SOLENOID B P0775 P0775 TM-157
SHIFT P0780 P0780 TM-158
PC SOLENOID C P0795 P0795 TM-159
G SENSOR — P1585 TM-160
TP SENSOR — P1705 TM-164
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL — P1721 TM-165
INTERLOCK P1730 P1730 TM-167
7GR INCORRECT RATIO P1734 P1734 TM-169
M-MODE SWITCH — P1815 TM-171
PC SOLENOID D P2713 P2713 TM-176
PC SOLENOID E P2722 P2722 TM-177
PC SOLENOID F P2731 P2731 TM-178
PC SOLENOID G P2807 P2807 TM-179
CAN COMM DATA — U0300 TM-128
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 U1000 TM-129
Items
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
DTC*2
MI*1, “ENGINE” with CON- Reference
SULT-III or GST
CONSULT-III only
“TRANSMISSION”
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
TM-111
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
WIRING DIAGRAM
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
LHD
LHD : Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000004969714
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a (option abbreviation; if notdescribed
in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
VQ37VHR MODELS
TM-112
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
V9X MODELS
JCDWM1015GB
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
TM-113
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
RHD P
RHD : Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000005288356
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a (option abbreviation; if notdescribed
in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
VQ37VHR MODELS
JCDWM1019GB
TM-114
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
V9X MODELS
JCDWM1016GB
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
TM-115
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
JCDWM1020GB
TM-116
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000004969703
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a (option abbreviation; if notdescribed
in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC
JCDWM1021GB
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
TM-117
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC
JCDWM1022GB
TM-118
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Diagnosis Flow INFOID:0000000004969555
1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM
1. Refer to TM-119, "Question sheet" and interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions
and environment when the malfunction occurred) as much as possible when the customer brings
in the vehicle.
2. Check the following:
- Service history
- Harnesses and connectors malfunction. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
1. Before checking the malfunction, check whether any DTC exists.
2. If DTC exists, perform the following operations.
- Record the DTC and freeze frame data. (Print out the data CONSULT-III and affix it to the Work Order
Sheet.)
- Erase DTCs.
- Check the relationship between the cause that is clarified with DTC and the malfunction information
described by the customer. TM-197, "Symptom Table" is effective.
3. Check the information of related service bulletins and others also.
Do malfunction information and DTC exist?
Malfunction information and DTC exists. >>GO TO 3.
Malfunction information exists, but no DTC. >>GO TO 4.
No malfunction information, but DTC exists. >>GO TO 5.
3.REPRODUCE MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM
Check any malfunction described by a customer, except those with DTC on the vehicle.
Also investigate whether the symptom is a fail-safe or normal operation. Refer to TM-105, "Fail-Safe".
When a malfunction symptom is reproduced, the question sheet is effective. Refer to TM-119, "Question
sheet".
Verify the relationship between the symptom and the conditions in which the malfunction described by the customer
occurs.
>> GO TO 5.
4.REPRODUCE MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM
Check the malfunction described by the customer on the vehicle.
Also investigate whether the symptom is a fail-safe or normal operation. Refer to TM-105, "Fail-Safe".
When a malfunction symptom is reproduced, the question sheet is effective. Refer to TM-119, "Question
sheet".
Verify the relationship between the symptom and the conditions in which the malfunction described by the customer
occurs.
>> GO TO 6.
5.PERFORM “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” of the appropriate DTC to check if DTC is detected again.
Refer to TM-108, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" when multiple DTCs are detected, and then determine the
order for performing the diagnosis.
NOTE:
If no DTC is detected, refer to the freeze frame data.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
TM-119
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
NO >> Check according to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
6.IDENTIFY MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM WITH “DIAGNOSIS CHART BY SYMPTOM”
Use TM-197, "Symptom Table" from the symptom inspection result in step 4. Then identify where to start performing
the diagnosis based on possible causes and symptoms.
>> GO TO 8.
7.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Repair or replace the detected malfunctioning parts.
Reconnect parts or connector after repairing or replacing, and then erase DTC if necessary.
>> GO TO 8.
8.FINAL CHECK
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” again to make sure that the repair is correctly performed.
Check that malfunctions are not reproduced when obtaining the malfunction information from the customer,
referring to the symptom inspection result in step 3 or 4.
Is DTC or malfunction symptom reproduced?
YES-1 >> DTC is reproduced: GO TO 5.
YES-2 >> Malfunction symptom is reproduced: GO TO 6.
NO >> Before delivering the vehicle to the customer, make sure that DTC is erased.
Question sheet INFOID:0000000004969556
DESCRIPTION
There are many operating conditions that may cause a malfunction
of the transmission parts. By understanding those conditions properly,
a quick and exact diagnosis can be achieved.
In general, customers have their own criteria for a problem. Therefore,
it is important to understand the symptom and status well
enough by asking the customer about the concerns carefully. In
order to systemize all the information for the diagnosis, prepare the
question sheet referring to the question points.
WORKSHEET SAMPLE
SEF907L
Question Sheet
Customer name MR/MS Engine # Manuf. Date
Incident Date VIN
Model & Year In Service Date
Trans. Mileage Km / Mile
TM-120
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Symptoms 􀂆 Vehicle does not move (􀂆 Any position 􀂆 Particular position )
􀂆 No up shift (􀂆 1GR → 2GR 􀂆 2GR → 3GR 􀂆 3GR → 4GR 􀂆 4GR → 5GR 􀂆 5GR →
6GR 􀂆 6GR → 7GR)
􀂆 No down shift (􀂆 7GR → 6GR 􀂆 6GR → 5GR 􀂆 5GR → 4GR 􀂆 4GR → 3GR 􀂆 3GR →
2GR 􀂆 2GR → 1GR)
􀂆 Lock-up malfunction
􀂆 Shift point too high or too low
􀂆 Shift shock or slip
􀂆 Noise or vibration
􀂆 No kick down
􀂆 No pattern select
􀂆 Others
Frequency 􀂆 All the time 􀂆 Under certain conditions 􀂆 Sometimes ( times a day)
Weather conditions 􀂆 Not affected
Weather 􀂆 Fine 􀂆 Clouding 􀂆 Raining 􀂆 Snowing 􀂆 Other ( )
Temp. 􀂆 Hot 􀂆 Warm 􀂆 Cool 􀂆 Cold
􀂆 Temp. [Approx. °C (
°F)]
Humidity 􀂆 High 􀂆 Middle 􀂆 Low
Transmission conditions 􀂆 Not affected
􀂆 Cold 􀂆 During warm-up 􀂆 After warm-up
􀂆 Engine speed ( rpm)
Road conditions 􀂆 Not affected
􀂆 In town 􀂆 In suburbs 􀂆 Freeway 􀂆 Off road (Up / Down)
Driving conditions 􀂆 Not affected
􀂆 At starting 􀂆 While idling 􀂆 While engine racing 􀂆 At racing
􀂆 While cruising
􀂆 While accelerating 􀂆 While decelerating 􀂆 While turning (Right / Left)
􀂆 Vehicle speed [ km/h ( MPH)]
Other conditions
Question Sheet
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
TM-121
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
Description INFOID:0000000004969557
G sensor calibration must be performed when replacing transmission assembly.
Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000004969558
1.PREPARATION BEFORE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
1. Park the vehicle on a flat road.
2. Adjust pressure in all tires to the specified value. Refer to WT-84, "Tire Air Pressure".
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM CALIBRATION
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “G SENSOR CALIBRATION” in “Work Support” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Touch “START”.
CAUTION:
• Never start the engine.
• Never give any motion to the vehicle during the calibration.
Is “completed” displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Perform the calibration again.
3.CHECK DTC
With CONSULT-III
Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “P1585” detected?
YES >> Refer to TM-160, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Calibration end.
TM-122
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
G SENSOR CALIBRATION
G SENSOR CALIBRATION
Description INFOID:0000000004969559
G sensor calibration must be performed when the following operation is performed.
• Removal and installation or replacement of G sensor
• Replacement of transmission assembly
• Replacement of ECM
Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000004969560
1.PREPARATION BEFORE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
1. Park the vehicle on a flat road.
2. Adjust pressure in all tires to the specified value. Refer to WT-84, "Tire Air Pressure".
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM CALIBRATION
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “G SENSOR CALIBRATION” in “Work Support” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Touch “START”.
CAUTION:
• Never start the engine.
• Never give any motion to the vehicle during the calibration.
Is “completed” displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Perform the calibration again.
3.CHECK DTC
With CONSULT-III
Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “P1585” detected?
YES >> Refer to TM-160, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Calibration end.
A/T FLUID
TM-123
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
A/T FLUID
Changing INFOID:0000000005321666
CAUTION:
• Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. Never mix with other ATF.
• Using ATF other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and A/T
durability, and may damage the A/T, which is not covered by the warranty.
• When filling ATF, be careful not to scatter heat generating parts such as exhaust.
1. Step 1
a. Install the O-ring (315268E000) (A) to the charging pipe
(310811EA5A) (B).
2. Step 2
a. Use CONSULT-III to check that the ATF temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less.
b. Lift up the vehicle.
c. Remove the drain plug from the oil pan, and then drain the ATF.
d. When the ATF starts to drip, temporarily tighten the drain plug to the oil pan.
NOTE:
Never replace drain plug and drain plug gasket with new ones yet.
e. Remove overflow plug from oil pan.
f. Install the charging pipe (A) to the overflow plug hole.
CAUTION:
Tighten the charging pipe by hand.
g. Install the bucket pump hose (B) to the charging pipe.
CAUTION:
Insert the bucket pump hose all the way to the end of the
charging pipe.
h. Fill approximately 3 liters (2-5/8 lmp qt) of the ATF.
i. Remove the bucket pump hose to remove the charging pipe,
and then temporarily tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan.
CAUTION:
Quickly perform the procedure to avoid ATF leakage from
the oil pan.
j. Lift down the vehicle.
k. Start the engine and wait for approximately 3 minutes.
l. Stop the engine.
3. Step 3
a. Repeat “Step 2”.
4. Final Step
a. Use CONSULT-III to check that the ATF temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less.
b. Lift up the vehicle.
c. Remove the drain plug from the oil pan, and then drain the ATF.
Recommended fluid and fluid capacity : Refer to TM-231, "General Specification".
JSDIA1334ZZ
JSDIA1335ZZ
TM-124
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
A/T FLUID
d. When the ATF starts to drip, tighten the drain plug to the oil pan to the specified torque. Refer to TM-210,
"VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Never reuse drain plug and drain plug gasket.
e. Remove overflow plug from oil pan.
f. Install the charging pipe (A) to the overflow plug hole.
CAUTION:
Tighten the charging pipe by hand.
g. Install the bucket pump hose (B) to the charging pipe.
CAUTION:
Insert the bucket pump hose all the way to the end of the
charging pipe.
h. Fill approximately 3 liters (2-5/8 lmp qt) of the ATF.
i. Remove the bucket pump hose to remove the charging pipe,
and then temporarily tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan.
CAUTION:
Quickly perform the procedure to avoid ATF leakage from
the oil pan.
j. Lift down the vehicle.
k. Start the engine.
l. Make the ATF temperature approximately 40°C (104°F).
NOTE:
The ATF level is greatly affected by the temperature. Always check the ATF temperature on “ATF TEMP
1” of “Data Monitor” using CONSULT-III.
m. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake.
n. Shift the selector lever through each gear position. Leave selector lever in “P” position.
o. Lift up the vehicle when the ATF temperature reaches 40°C (104°F), and then remove the overflow plug
from the oil pan.
p. When the ATF starts to drip, tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan to the specified torque. Refer to TM-
210, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Never reuse overflow plug.
Adjustment INFOID:0000000005321667
CAUTION:
• Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. Never mix with other ATF.
• Using ATF other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and A/T
durability, and may damage the A/T, which is not covered by the warranty.
• When filling ATF, be careful not to scatter heat generating parts such as exhaust.
• Always maintain the ATF temperature within between 35°C (95°F) and 45°C (113°F) while checking
with CONSULT-III when the ATF level adjustment is performed.
1. Install the O-ring (315268E000) (A) to the charging pipe
(310811EA5A) (B).
2. Start the engine.
3. Make the ATF temperature approximately 40°C (104°F).
NOTE:
The ATF level is greatly affected by the temperature. Always
check the ATF temperature on “ATF TEMP 1” of “Data Monitor”
using CONSULT-III.
4. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake.
5. Shift the selector lever through each gear position. Leave selector
lever in “P” position.
6. Lift up the vehicle.
JSDIA1335ZZ
Recommended fluid and fluid capacity : Refer to TM-231, "General Specification".
JSDIA1334ZZ
A/T FLUID
TM-125
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
7. Check the ATF leakage from transmission.
8. Remove overflow plug from oil pan.
9. Install the charging pipe (A) to the overflow plug hole.
CAUTION:
Tighten the charging pipe by hand.
10. Install the bucket pump hose (B) to the charging pipe.
CAUTION:
Insert the bucket pump hose all the way to the end of the
charging pipe.
11. Fill approximately 0.5 liters (1/2 lmp qt) of the ATF.
12. Check that the ATF leaks when removing the charging pipe and
the bucket pump hose. If the ATF does not leak, refill the ATF.
13. When the ATF starts to drip, tighten the overflow plug to the oil
pan to the specified torque. Refer to TM-210, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Never reuse overflow plug.
JSDIA1335ZZ
TM-126
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
STALL TEST
STALL TEST
Inspection and Judgment INFOID:0000000004969725
INSPECTION
1. Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary.
2. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to
176°F). Inspect the amount of ATF. Replenish if necessary.
3. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.
4. Start the engine, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in “D” position.
5. Gradually press down the accelerator pedal while holding down the foot brake.
6. Quickly read off the stall speed, then quickly remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION:
Never hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds during this test.
7. Shift the selector lever to “N” position.
8. Cool down the ATF.
CAUTION:
Run the engine at idle for at least 1 minute.
9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 with selector lever in “R” position.
JUDGMENT OF STALL TEST
O: Stall speed within standard value position
H: Stall speed higher than standard value
L: Stall speed lower than standard value
Stall test standard value position
Stall speed : Refer to TM-232, "Stall Speed".
Selector lever position
Possible location of malfunction
“D” and “M” “R”
Stall speed
H O
• Low brake
• 1st one-way clutch
• 2nd one-way clutch
O H
• Reverse brake
• 1st one-way clutch
• 2nd one-way clutch
L L • Engine and torque converter one-way clutch
H H • Line pressure low
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 1 → 2 Slipping in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR or 6GR 2346 brake slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 2 → 3 Slipping in 3GR, 4GR or 5GR Direct clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 3 → 4 Slipping in 4GR, 5GR, 6GR or 7GR High and low reverse clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 4 → 5 Slipping in 5GR, 6GR or 7GR Input clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 5 → 6 Slipping in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR or 6GR 2346 brake slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 6 → 7 Slipping in 7GR Front brake slippage
A/T POSITION
TM-127
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
A/T POSITION
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004969726
INSPECTION
1. Place selector lever in “P” position, and turn ignition switch ON (engine stop).
2. Check that selector lever can be shifted to other than “P” position when brake pedal is depressed. Also
check that selector lever can be shifted from “P” position only when brake pedal is depressed.
3. Shift the selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle.
4. Confirm that the selector lever stops at each position by feeling the engagement when it is moved through
all the positions. Check whether or not the actual position the selector lever matches the position shown
by the shift position indicator and the A/T body.
5. The method of operating the lever to individual positions correctly
is shown in the figure.
6. When selector button is pressed in “P”, “R”, or “N” position without
applying forward/backward force to selector lever, check button
operation for sticking.
7. Confirm that the back-up lamps illuminate only when lever is
placed in the “R” position. Confirm that the back-up lamps does
not illuminate when selector lever is pushed against “R” position
in the “P” or “N” position.
8. Confirm that the engine can only be started with the selector
lever in the “P” and “N” positions. (With selector lever in the “P”
position, engine can be started even when selector lever is
moved forward and backward.)
9. Make sure that A/T is locked completely in “P” position.
10. DS mode must be indicated on the combination meter when the selector lever is shifted to the manual
shift gate. When the selector lever is shifted to the “+” or “−” side in the DS mode, manual mode should be
indicated on the combination meter.
In addition, a set shift position must be changed when the selector lever is shifted to the “+” or “−” side in
the manual mode. (Only while driving.)
ADJUSTMENT
1. Loosen nut ( ).
2. Place manual lever and selector lever in “P” position.
3. While pressing lower lever (A) toward rear of vehicle (in “P” position
direction), tighten nut to specified torque. Refer to TM-202,
"Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Be careful not to touch the control rod while pressing lower
lever of A/T shift selector assembly.
NOTE:
Press lower lever of A/T shift selector assembly with a force of
approximately 1 kg (9.8 N).
JSDIA0790GB
JPDIA0885ZZ
TM-128
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
U0300 CAN COMMUNICATION DATA
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
U0300 CAN COMMUNICATION DATA
Description INFOID:0000000005775068
The amount of data transmitted from each control unit is read.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005775069
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 2 seconds or more.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “U0300” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-128, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005775070
1.CHECK CONTROL UNIT
Check the number of control units replaced before detecting “U0300”.
Is the number of replaced control units one?
YES >> Since the replaced control unit may be out of specifications, check the part number and specifications.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.INSPECTION CONTROL UNIT
With CONSULT-III
1. Remove one of the replaced control units.
2. Install the previous control unit mounted before replacement.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 2 seconds or more.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “U0300” detected?
YES >> Turn OFF the ignition switch to check the other control units in the same method.
NO >> Since the removed control unit may be out of specifications, check the part number and specifications.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
U0300
Internal Control Module Software
Incompatibility
When the amount of data transmitted
from each control unit is
smaller than the specified
amount.
Control units other than TCM.
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
TM-129
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000004969599
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex
communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability.
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links
with other control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are connected
with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969600
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
3. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-129, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969601
Go to LAN-29, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
U1000 CAN Communication Line
TCM is not transmitting or receiving
CAN communication
signal for 2 seconds or more.
• Harness or connectors
(CAN communication line is
open or shorted.)
• TCM
TM-130
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
P0615 STARTER RELAY
P0615 STARTER RELAY
Description INFOID:0000000004969602
TCM prohibits cranking other than at “P” or “N” position.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969603
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” and “N” positions.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 2 seconds or more.
3. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “P0615” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-130, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969604
1.CHECK STARTER RELAY SIGNAL
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check starter relay circuit. Refer to STR-12, "Wiring Diagram - STARTING SYSTEM (WITH GASOLINE
ENGINE) -".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T ASSEMBLY AND IPDM E/R (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector and IPDM E/R connector.
3. Check the continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and IPDM E/R vehicle
side harness connector terminal.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0615 Starter Relay Circuit
The starter monitor value is
OFF when the ignition switch is
ON at the “P” and “N” positions.
• Harness or connectors
(Starter relay and TCM circuit
is open or shorted.)
• Starter relay circuit
IPDM E/R connector
Ground
Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
E5 30
Selector lever in “P” and
“N” positions.
Battery voltage
Selector lever in other
positions.
0 V
P0615 STARTER RELAY
TM-131
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T ASSEMBLY AND IPDM E/R (PART 2)
Check the continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
F51 9 E5 30 Existed
A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
F51 9 Not existed
TM-132
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH A
P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969606
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “ACCELE POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Shift the selector lever throughout the entire shift position from “P” to “D”. (Hold the selector lever at each
position for 2 seconds or more)
4. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.
5. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0705” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-132, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969607
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detected if... Possible cause
P0705
Transmission Range Switch A
Circuit (PRNDL Input)
The TCM detects an ON/OFF
combination pattern other than
that of the transmission range
switches 1, 2, 3 and 4. (For ON/
OFF combination patterns of
transmission range switches,
refer to TM-46, "A/T CONTROL
SYSTEM : Transmission Range
Switch".)
• Harness or connectors
(Transmission range switches
1, 2, 3, 4 and TCM circuit
is open or shorted.)
• Transmission range switches
1, 2, 3 and 4
ACCELE POSI : More than 1.0/8
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
TM-133
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969609
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Except for Russia (VQ37VHR)
For Russia (VQ37VHR) and Europe (V9X)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0710
Transmission Fluid Temperature
Sensor A Circuit
The A/T fluid temperature sensor is −40 °C (−40 °F)
or less for 5 seconds while driving the vehicle at the
vehicle speed 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more.
• Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is open.)
• A/T fluid temperature sensor
The A/T fluid temperature sensor is 180 °C (356 °F)
or more for 5 seconds.
• Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is short.)
• A/T fluid temperature sensor
The fluid temperature sensor is in the following conditions
while driving the vehicle at the vehicle speed
10 km/h (7 MPH) or more.
• Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is stuck.)
• A/T fluid temperature sensor
For 4 minutes
: 15 °C – 20 °C (59 °F – 68 °F)
: 10 °C – 15 °C (50 °F – 59 °F)
: 5 °C – 10 °C (41 °F – 50 °F)
: 0 °C – 5 °C (32 °F – 41 °F)
For 7 minutes
: −5 °C – 0 °C (23 °F – 32 °F)
: −10 °C – −5 °C (14 °F – 23 °F)
: −15 °C – −10 °C (5 °F – 14 °F)
: −20 °C – −15 °C (−4 °F – 5 °F)
For 14 minutes : −40 °C – −20 °C (−40 °F – −4 °F)
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0710
Transmission Fluid Temperature
Sensor A Circuit
TCM judges that the A/T fluid temperature is -40 °C (-40
°F) or less continuously for 5 seconds while driving at 10
km/h (7 MPH) or more.
• Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is open.)
• A/T fluid temperature
sensor
TCM judges that the A/T fluid temperature is 180 °C (356
°F) or more continuously for 5 seconds.
• Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is short.)
• A/T fluid temperature
sensor
TCM judges the following conditions while driving the vehicle
at 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more:
• The time required for A/T fluid temperature to rise by
1 °C (1.8 °F) exceeds 14 minutes when A/T fluid temperature
is -20 °C (-4 °F) or less.
• The time required for A/T fluid temperature to rise by
1 °C (1.8 °F) exceeds 7 minutes when A/T fluid temperature
is between -19 °C (-2 °F) and 0 °C (32 °F).
• The time required for A/T fluid temperature to rise by
1 °C (1.8 °F) exceeds 4 minutes when A/T fluid temperature
is between 1 °C (34 °F) and 20 °C (68 °F).
• Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is stuck.)
• A/T fluid temperature
sensor
TM-134
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 14 minutes or more.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0710” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-134, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969610
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
SLCT LVR POSI : D
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A
TM-135
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969612
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI”, “GEAR”, “VHCL/S SE-A/T”, “W/O THL POS” and “ENGINE SPEED” in “Data
Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.
CAUTION:
Keep the same gear position.
NOTE:
Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this
test.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0717” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-135, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969613
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0717
Input/Turbine Speed Sensor A
Circuit No Signal
The revolution of input speed
sensor 1 and/or 2 is 270 rpm or
less.
• Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is open.)
• Input speed sensor 1 and/or
2
SLCT LVR POSI : D
GEAR : 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th or 6th
VHCL/S SE-A/T : More than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
W/O THL POS : ON
ENGINE SPEED : More than 1,500 rpm
TM-136
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969615
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
• Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “ESTM VSP SIG” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 60 seconds or more.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0720” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-136, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969616
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0720 Output Speed Sensor Circuit
• The vehicle speed detected
by the output speed sensor is
5 km/h (3MPH) or less when
the vehicle speed transmitted
from the unified meter and A/
C amp. to TCM is 20 km/h or
more. (Only when starts after
the ignition switch is turned
ON.)
• The vehicle speed transmitted
from the unified meter
and A/C amp. to TCM does
not decrease despite the 36
km/h (23 MPH) or more of deceleration
in vehicle speed
detected by the output speed
sensor. when the vehicle
speed detected by the output
speed sensor is 36 km/h (23
MPH) or more and the vehicle
speed transmitted from the
unified meter and A/C amp. to
TCM is 24 (15 MPH) or more.
• Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is open.)
• Output speed sensor
ESTM VSP SIG : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more
P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
TM-137
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
TM-138
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
P0725 ENGINE SPEED
P0725 ENGINE SPEED
Description INFOID:0000000004969617
The engine speed signal is transmitted from the ECM to the TCM via CAN communication line.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969618
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “P0725” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-138, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969619
1.CHECK DTC OF ECM
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ENGINE”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to EC-487, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC OF TCM
With CONSULT-III
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is any DTC other than “P0725” detected?
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to TM-109, "DTC Index" (VQ37VHR), EC-1184, "DTC Index"
(V9X).
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0725 Engine Speed Input Circuit
• TCM does not receive the
CAN communication signal
from the ECM.
• The engine speed is more
less 150 rpm even if the vehicle
speed is more than 10 km/
h (7 MPH).
Harness or connectors
(ECM to TCM circuit is open or
shorted.)
SLCT LVR POSI : D
VHCL/S SE-A/T : More than 10km/h (7 MPH)
P0725 ENGINE SPEED
TM-139
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
TM-140
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO
P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO
Description INFOID:0000000004969620
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 6GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969621
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-141, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
With GST
1. Start the engine.
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “6TH GR FNCTN P0729” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0729 Gear 6 Incorrect Ratio
The gear ratio is:
• VQ37VHR models
- 0.913 or more
- 0.811 or less
• V9X models
- 0.923 or more
- 0.819 or less
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
• High and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch
• Output speed sensor
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO
TM-141
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF
CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results”
in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0729” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-
109, "DTC Index".
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.
2. Check DTC.
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0729”
detected?
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4.
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-141, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P0729” is detected)>>Go to TM-141, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2)
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock.
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969622
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
P0730 INCORRECT GEAR RATIO
P0730 INCORRECT GEAR RATIO
Description INFOID:0000000004969623
• TCM detects a high-rpm state of the under drive sun gear.
• The number of revolutions of the under drive sun gear is calculated with the input speed sensor 1 and 2.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969624
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-142, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ENGINE”.
3. Drive vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the
table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0730” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-142, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969625
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0730 Incorrect Gear Ratio
The revolution of under drive
sun gear is 8,000 rpm or more.
NOTE:
Not detected when in “P” or “N”
position and during a shift to “P”
or “N” position.
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Input speed sensor 2
ENGINE SPEED Same value as the Freeze Frame Data.
VEHICLE SPEED Same value as the Freeze Frame Data.
B/FUEL SCHDL Same value as the Freeze Frame Data.
P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO
TM-143
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO
Description INFOID:0000000004969626
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 1GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969627
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-144, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
With GST
1. Start the engine.
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “1ST GR FNCTN P0731” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0731 Gear 1 Incorrect Ratio
The gear ratio is:
• VQ37VHR models
- 5.219 or more
- 4.629 or less
• V9X models
- 5.069 or more
- 4.496 or less
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
• High and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch
• Output speed sensor
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
TM-144
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF
CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results”
in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0731” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-
109, "DTC Index".
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.
2. Check DTC.
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0731”
detected?
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4.
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-144, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P0731” is detected)>>Go to TM-144, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2)
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock.
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969628
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
GEAR : 1st
ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
Selector lever : “M” position
Gear position : 1st
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO
TM-145
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO
Description INFOID:0000000004969629
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 2GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969630
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-146, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
With GST
1. Start the engine.
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “2ND GR FNCTN P0732” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0732 Gear 2 Incorrect Ratio
The gear ratio is:
• VQ37VHR models
- 3.385 or more
- 3.003 or less
• VQ37VHR models
- 3.289 or more
- 2.917 or less
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
• High and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch
• Output speed sensor
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
TM-146
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF
CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results”
in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0732” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-
109, "DTC Index".
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.
2. Check DTC.
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0732”
detected?
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4.
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-146, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P0732” is detected)>>Go to TM-146, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2)
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock.
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969631
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
GEAR : 2nd
ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
Selector lever : “M” position
Gear position : 2nd
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO
TM-147
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO
Description INFOID:0000000004969632
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 3GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969633
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-148, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
With GST
1. Start the engine.
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “3RD GR FNCTN P0733” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0733 Gear 3 Incorrect Ratio
The gear ratio is:
• VQ37VHR models
- 2.165 or more
- 1.921 or less
• V9X models
- 2.103 or more
- 1.865 or less
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
• High and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch
• Output speed sensor
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
TM-148
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF
CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results”
in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0733” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-
109, "DTC Index".
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.
2. Check DTC.
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0733”
detected?
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4.
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-148, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P0733” is detected)>>Go to TM-148, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2)
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock.
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969634
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
GEAR : 3rd
ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
Selector lever : “M” position
Gear position : 3rd
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO
TM-149
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO
Description INFOID:0000000004969635
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 4GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969636
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-150, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
With GST
1. Start the engine.
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “4TH GR FNCTN P0734” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0734 Gear 4 Incorrect Ratio
The gear ratio is:
• VQ37VHR models
- 1.496 or more
- 1.328 or less
• V9X models
- 1.453 or more
- 1.289 or less
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
• High and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch
• Output speed sensor
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
TM-150
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF
CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results”
in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0734” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-
109, "DTC Index".
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.
2. Check DTC.
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0734”
detected?
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4.
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-150, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P0734” is detected)>>Go to TM-150, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2)
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock.
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969637
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
GEAR : 4th
ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
Selector lever : “M” position
Gear position : 4th
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO
TM-151
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO
Description INFOID:0000000004969638
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 5GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969639
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-152, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
With GST
1. Start the engine.
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “5TH GR FNCTN P0735” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0735 Gear 5 Incorrect Ratio
The gear ratio is:
• 1.060 or more
• 0.940 or less
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
• High and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch
• Output speed sensor
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
TM-152
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF
CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results”
in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0735” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-
109, "DTC Index".
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.
2. Check DTC.
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0735”
detected?
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4.
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-152, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P0735” is detected)>>Go to TM-152, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2)
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock.
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969640
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
GEAR : 5th
ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
Selector lever : “M” position
Gear position : 5th
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
TM-153
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969642
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 30 seconds or more.
NOTE:
Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this
test.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “P0740” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-153, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969643
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0740
Torque Converter Clutch Circuit/
Open
A DTC is set if the torque converter
clutch solenoid valve
monitor value is 0.4 A or less
when the torque converter
clutch solenoid valve command
value is more than 0.75 A.
• Harness or connectors
(Solenoid valve circuit is
open or shorted.)
• Torque converter clutch solenoid
valve
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 2nd
VEHICLE SPEED : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more
TM-154
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER
P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER
Description INFOID:0000000004969644
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not lock-up. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction
(circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid
valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969645
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more.
NOTE:
Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this
test.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “P0744” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-154, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969646
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0744
Torque Converter Clutch Circuit
Intermittent
The lock-up is not performed in
spite of within the lock-up area.
• Harness or connectors
• Torque converter clutch solenoid
valve
• Torque converter
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 2nd
VEHICLE SPEED : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more
P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A
TM-155
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969648
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Wait for 5 seconds or more at idle speed in “N” position.
3. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0745” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-155, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969649
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0745 Pressure Control Solenoid A
The line pressure solenoid
valve monitor value is 0.4 A or
less when the line pressure solenoid
valve command value is
more than 0.75 A.
• Harness or connectors
(Solenoid valve circuit is
open or shorted.)
• Line pressure solenoid valve
TM-156
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A
P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969651
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0750” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-156, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969652
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0750 Shift Solenoid A
• The anti-interlock solenoid
valve monitor value is ON
when the anti-interlock solenoid
valve command value is
OFF.
• The anti-interlock solenoid
valve monitor value is OFF
when the anti-interlock solenoid
valve command value is
ON.
• Harness or connectors
(Solenoid valve circuit is
open or shorted.)
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 1st
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B
TM-157
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969654
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0775” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-157, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969655
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0775 Pressure Control Solenoid B
The input clutch solenoid valve
monitor value is 0.4 A or less
when the input clutch solenoid
valve command value is more
than 0.75 A.
• Harness or connectors
(Solenoid valve circuit is
open or shorted.)
• Input clutch solenoid valve
BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 1st
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
TM-158
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
P0780 SHIFT
P0780 SHIFT
Description INFOID:0000000004969656
The TCM detects the malfunction of low brake solenoid valve. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction
(circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation,
etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969657
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI”, “ACCELE POSI” and “GEAR” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0780” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-158, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969658
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0780 Shift Error
• When shifting from 3GR to
4GR with the selector lever in
“D” position, the gear ratio
does not shift to 1.412 (gear
ratio of 4GR)
• When shifting from 5GR to
6GR or 6GR to 7GR, the engine
speed exceeds the prescribed
speed.
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• Hydraulic control circuit
SLCT LVR POSI : D
ACCELE POSI : More than 1.0/8
GEAR : 3rd → 4th
P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID C
TM-159
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID C
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969660
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0795” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-159, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969661
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0795 Pressure Control Solenoid C
The front brake solenoid valve
monitor value is 0.4 A or less
when the front brake solenoid
valve command value is more
than 0.75 A.
• Harness or connectors
(Solenoid valve circuit is
open or shorted.)
• Front brake solenoid valve
BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 7th
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
TM-160
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
P1585 G SENSOR
P1585 G SENSOR
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969663
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Shift the selector lever to manual shift gate side.
4. Start up in M1, and then upshift M2.
5. Accelerate the vehicle speed regularly from approximately 20 km/h (13 MPH) to approximately 50 km/h
(31 MPH) for 8 seconds in M2.
6. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “P1585” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-160, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969664
1.CHECK G SENSOR SIGNAL
1. Park vehicle on level surface.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Select “G SEN SLOPE” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
4. Swing the vehicle body and check that the value varies between −40.45 – 40.45%.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
2.PERFORM CALIBRATION (PART 1)
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P1585 G Sensor Circuit
• The output voltage value of G
sensor is outside the standard
for the specified period
of time caused by open circuit,
short circuit, or malfunction
of G sensor.
• The movable gauging component
of G sensor is stuck
for the specified period of
time during driving.
• G sensor
• Harness or connector
(Sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
Monitor item Condition Status
G SEN SLOPE
Level road 0%
Uphill slope Positive value (maximum 40.45%)
Downhill slope Negative value (minimum −40.45%)
P1585 G SENSOR
TM-161
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
1. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Touch “Erase”.
3. Perform calibration of G sensor. Refer to TM-122, "Special Repair Requirement".
4. Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. Refer to TM-160, "DTC Logic".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
3.CHECK G SENSOR POWER
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect G sensor connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between G sensor vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 8.
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND G SENSOR (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM connectors.
3. Check continuity between ECM vehicle side harness connector terminals and G sensor vehicle side harness
connector terminals.
*1: VQ37VHR models
*2: V9X models
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND G SENSOR (PART 2)
Check continuity between ECM vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
*1: VQ37VHR models
*2: V9X models
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
G sensor vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B248 3 5 V
ECM vehicle side harness connector G sensor vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M164*1
116
B248
2
Existed
119 1
M113*2
76 1
77 2
ECM vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
M164*1
116
Not existed
119
M113*2
76
77
TM-162
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
P1585 G SENSOR
6.CHECK G SENSOR
1. Remove G sensor. Refer to TM-209, "Exploded View".
2. Reconnect all the connectors.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between ECM connector terminal and ground.
*1: VQ37VHR models
*2: V9X models
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace G sensor. Refer to TM-209, "Exploded View".
7.PERFORM CALIBRATION (PART 2)
1. Install G sensor. Refer to TM-209, "Exploded View".
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Touch “Erase”.
4. Perform calibration of G sensor. Refer to TM-122, "Special Repair Requirement".
5. Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. Refer to TM-160, "DTC Logic".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
8.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND G SENSOR (SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT) (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM connectors.
3. Check continuity between ECM vehicle side harness connector terminal and G sensor vehicle side harness
connector terminal.
*1: VQ37VHR models
*2: V9X models
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
9.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND G SENSOR (SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT) (PART 2)
Check continuity between ECM vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
: Direction of gravitational force
ECM connector
Ground
Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M164*1
M113*2
119*1
76*2
Vertical (–1G) (A) 1.17 V
Horizontal (B) 2.5 V
Vertical (1G) (C) 3.83 V
SCIA8343J
ECM vehicle side harness connector G sensor vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M164*1 111
B248 3 Existed
M113*2 54
ECM vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Terminal Connector
M164*1 111
Not existed
M113*2 54
P1585 G SENSOR
TM-163
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check ECM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to EC-164, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000004969665
G sensor calibration must be performed when removing or replacing the G sensor.
1.PERFORM CALIBRATION
Perform G sensor calibration.
>> Refer to TM-122, "Special Repair Requirement".
TM-164
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
P1705 TP SENSOR
P1705 TP SENSOR
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969667
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “P1705” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-164, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969668
1.CHECK DTC OF ECM
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ENGINE”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to EC-487, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC OF TCM
With CONSULT-III
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is any DTC other than “P1705” detected?
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to TM-109, "DTC Index" (VQ37VHR), EC-1184, "DTC Index"
(V9X).
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P1705
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
Signal Circuit
TCM detects the difference between
two accelerator pedal position
signals received from
ECM via CAN communication.
Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
SLCT LVR POSI : D
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 5 km/h (3 MPH) or more
P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
TM-165
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
Description INFOID:0000000004969669
The vehicle speed signal is transmitted from unified meter and A/C amp. to TCM via CAN communication line.
The signal functions as an auxiliary device to the output speed sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM will
then use the vehicle speed signal.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969670
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
• Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “VHCL/S SE-AT” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 60 seconds or more.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “P1721” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-166, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P1721 Vehicle Speed Signal Circuit
• The vehicle speed transmitted
from the unified meter
and A/C amp. to TCM is 5 km/
h (3MPH) or less when the
vehicle speed detected by
the output speed sensor is 20
km/h or more. (Only when
starts after the ignition switch
is turned ON.)
• The vehicle speed detected
by the output speed sensor
does not decrease despite
the 36 km/h (23 MPH) or
more of deceleration in vehicle
speed received from the
unified meter and A/C amp.
when the vehicle speed
transmitted from the unified
meter and A/C amp. to TCM
is 36 km/h (23 MPH) or more
and the vehicle speed detected
by the output speed sensor
is 24 (15 MPH) or more.
Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more
TM-166
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969671
1.CHECK DTC OF UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.
With CONSULT-III
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “METER/M&A”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to MWI-116, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC OF TCM
With CONSULT-III
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is any DTC other than “P1721” detected?
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to TM-109, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
P1730 INTERLOCK
TM-167
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P1730 INTERLOCK
Description INFOID:0000000004969672
Fail-safe function to detect interlock conditions.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969673
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
When the vehicle is driven fixed in 2GR, an input speed sensor malfunction is displayed, but this is
not an input speed sensor malfunction.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-168, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “GEAR” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle the following condition.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P1730” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-168, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Judgment of Interlock INFOID:0000000004969674
Refer to TM-105, "Fail-Safe".
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P1730 Interlock
The output speed sensor detects
the deceleration of 12 km/
h (7 MPH) or more for 1 second.
• Harness or connectors
(Solenoid valve circuit is open
or shorted.)
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
• High and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch
• Hydraulic control circuit
SLCT LVR POSI : D
GEAR : 1st through 7th
TM-168
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
P1730 INTERLOCK
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969675
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO
TM-169
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO
Description INFOID:0000000004969676
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 7GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969677
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-170, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
With GST
1. Start the engine.
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “7TH GR FNCTN P1734” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P1734 Gear 7 Incorrect Ratio
The gear ratio is:
• VQ37VHR models
- 0.818 or more
- 0.726 or less
• V9X models
- 0.822 or more
- 0.730 or less
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
• High and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch
• Output speed sensor
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
TM-170
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF
CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results”
in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P1734” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-
109, "DTC Index".
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.
2. Check DTC.
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P1734”
detected?
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4.
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-170, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P1734” is detected)>>Go to TM-170, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2)
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock.
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969678
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
GEAR : 7th
ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
Selector lever : “M” position
Gear position : 7th
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
TM-171
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969680
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “MANU MODE SW” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Maintain the following each conditions more than 60 seconds.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “P1815” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-171, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969681
1.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “MANU MODE SW”, “NON M MODE SW”, “UP SW LEVER”, “DOWN SW LEVER”, “SFT UP ST
SW” and “SFT DWN ST SW” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check the ON/OFF operations of each monitor item.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P1815 Manual Mode Switch Circuit
• TCM monitors manual mode,
non manual mode, up or
down switch signal, and detects
as irregular when impossible
input pattern occurs
2 second or more.
• When shift up/down signal of
paddle shifter continuously
remains ON for 60 seconds.
• Harness or connectors
(These switches circuit is
open or shorted.)
• Mode select switch (Into A/T
shift selector)
• Position select switch (Into A/
T shift selector)
• Paddle shifter
SLCT LVR POSI : D
MANU MODE SW : ON
TM-172
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
Without CONSULT-III
Drive the vehicle in the manual mode, and then check that the indication of the shift position indicator matches
with the actual gear position.
1. Shift the selector lever to UP side, and then accelerate from 1GR to 7GR.
2. Shift the selector lever to − side, and then decelerate from7GR to 1GR.
3. Shift the paddle shifter (shift-up) to UP side, and then accelerate from 1GR to 7GR.
4. Shift the paddle shifter (shift-down) to DOWN side, and then decelerate from 7GR to 1GR.
Which item is abnormal?
Manual mode switch>>GO TO 2.
Paddle shifter>>GO TO 7.
2.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check manual mode switch. Refer to TM-175, "Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT (MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Item Monitor Item Condition Status
Manual mode switch
MANU MODE SW
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side ON
Other than the above OFF
NON M-MODE SW
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side OFF
Other than the above ON
UP SW LEVER
Selector lever is shifted to + side ON
Other than the above OFF
DOWN SW LEVER
Selector lever is shifted to − side ON
Other than the above OFF
Paddle shifter
SFT UP ST SW
Paddle shifter (shift-up) is pulled ON
Other than the above OFF
SFT DWN ST SW
Paddle shifter (shift-down) is pulled ON
Other than the above OFF
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Voltage (Approx.)
Connector
Terminal
+ −
M137
1
4 Battery voltage
2
3
5
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
TM-173
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. (PART 1)
1. Disconnect unified meter and A/C amp. connector.
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals and unified meter
and A/C amp. vehicle side harness connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. (PART 2)
Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
7.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect paddle shifter connectors.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 9.
8.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
M137 4 Existed
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Unified meter and A/C amp. vehicle side harness
connector Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M137
1
M66
10
Existed
2 25
3 5
5 11
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
M137
1
Not existed
2
3
5
Paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector
Voltage (Approx.)
Connector
Terminal
+ −
M38
3 1 Battery voltage
M39
TM-174
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check paddle shifter. Refer to TM-175, "Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-up)]" and TM-175,
"Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-down)]".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
9.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT (PADDLE SHIFTER CIRCUIT)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
10.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN PADDLE SHIFTER AND UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. (PART 1)
1. Disconnect unified meter and A/C amp. connector.
2. Check continuity between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals and unified meter and
A/C amp. vehicle side harness connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
11.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN PADDLE SHIFTER AND UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. (PART 2)
Check continuity between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
12.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
13.CHECK UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.
1. Reconnect all the connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Select “M RANGE SW”, “NM RANGE SW”, “AT SFT UP SW”, “AT SFT DWN SW”, “ST SFT UP SW” and
“ST SFT DWN SW” in “Data Monitor” in “METER/M&A”.
Paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
M38
1 Existed
M39
Paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector
Unified meter and A/C amp. vehicle side harness
connector Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M38
3 M66
6
Existed
M39 26
Paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
M38
3 Not existed
M39
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
TM-175
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
4. Check the ON/OFF operations of each monitor item. Refer to MWI-94, "Reference Value".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Replace unified meter and A/C amp. Refer to MWI-149, "Exploded View".
Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch) INFOID:0000000004969682
1.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH
Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View".
Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-up)]
1.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER
Check continuity between paddle shifter (shift-up) connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-208, "Exploded View".
Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-down)] INFOID:0000000004969684
1.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER
Check continuity between paddle shifter (shift-down) connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-208, "Exploded View".
A/T shift selector connector
Condition Continuity
Connector Terminal
M137
1
4
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side Existed
Other than the above Not existed
2
Selector lever is shifted to − side Existed
Other than the above Not existed
3
Selector lever is shifted to + side Existed
Other than the above Not existed
5
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side Not existed
Other than the above Existed
Paddle shifter (shift-up) connector
Condition Continuity
Connector Terminal
M38 1 3
Paddle shifter (shift-up) is pulled Existed
Other than the above Not existed
Paddle shifter (shift-down) connector
Condition Continuity
Connector Terminal
M39 1 3
Paddle shifter (shift-down) is pulled Existed
Other than the above Not existed
TM-176
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
P2713 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID D
P2713 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID D
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969686
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive the vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P2713” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-176, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969687
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P2713 Pressure Control Solenoid D
The high and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve monitor value is
0.4 A or less when the high and
low reverse clutch solenoid
valve command value is more
than 0.75 A.
• Harness or connectors
(Solenoid valve circuit is
open or shorted.)
• High and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve
BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 3rd
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
P2722 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID E
TM-177
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P2722 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID E
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969689
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P2722” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-177, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969690
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P2722 Pressure Control Solenoid E
The low brake solenoid valve
monitor value is 0.4 A or less
when the low brake solenoid
valve command value is more
than 0.75 A.
• Harness or connectors
(Solenoid valve circuit is
open or shorted.)
• Low brake solenoid valve
BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 1st
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
TM-178
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
P2731 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID F
P2731 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID F
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969692
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P2731” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-178, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969693
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P2731 Pressure Control Solenoid F
The 2346 brake solenoid valve
monitor value is 0.4 A or less
when the 2346 brake solenoid
valve command value is more
than 0.75 A.
• Harness or connectors
(Solenoid valve circuit is
open or shorted.)
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 2nd
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
P2807 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID G
TM-179
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P2807 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID G
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969695
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch
OFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P2807” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-179, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969696
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P2807 Pressure Control Solenoid G
The direct clutch solenoid valve
monitor value is 0.4 A or less
when the direct clutch solenoid
valve command value is more
than 0.75 A.
• Harness or connectors
(Solenoid valve circuit is
open or shorted.)
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 1st
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
TM-180
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969698
1.CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector.
3. Check voltage between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 4.
2.CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE (PART 2)
Check voltage between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 5.
3.CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 1)
Check the following.
• Harness for short or open between battery positive terminal and A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector
terminal 2. Refer to PG-16, "GASOLINE ENGINE MODELS : Wiring Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY
-".
• Battery
• 10A fuse (No.36, located in the fuse, fusible link and relay box). Refer to PG-230, "GASOLINE ENGINE
MODELS : Fuse and Fusible Link Arrangement".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND A/T ASSEMBLY (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F51 2 Always Battery voltage
A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F51
1
Turn ignition switch ON Battery voltage
Turn ignition switch OFF 0 V
6
Turn ignition switch ON Battery voltage
Turn ignition switch OFF 0 V
A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
F51
5
Existed
10
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
TM-181
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector terminal and A/T assembly vehicle
side harness connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND A/T ASSEMBLY (PART 2)
Check continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 2)
Check the following.
• Harness for short or open between ignition switch and IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-34, "GASOLINE ENGINE
MODELS : Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -".
• Ignition switch
• 10A fuse (No.43, located in the IPDM E/R). Refer to PG-232, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement".
• IPDM E/R
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E7 58 F51
1
Existed
6
A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
E51
1
Not existed
6
TM-182
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005332271
TCM transmits a shift position signal and a manual mode indicator signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. via
CAN communication line. While the vehicle is running, the unified meter and A/C amp. displays a shift position
on the combination meter, according to these signals.
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000004969700
1.CHECK SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1. Start the engine.
2. Check the actual selector lever position (“P”, “R”, “N”, “D” and “DS”) and the indication of the shift position
indicator mutually coincide.
3. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and then check that the actual gear position and the indication of the
shift position indicator mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to “UP (+ side)” or “DOWN (−
side)” side (1GR ⇔ 7GR).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Go to TM-182, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969701
1.CHECK INPUT SIGNALS
With CONSULT-III
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check the actual selector lever position (“P”, “R”, “N”, “D” and “DS”) and the indication of the “SLCT LVR
POSI” mutually coincide. Refer to TM-99, "Reference Value".
4. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and then check that the actual gear position and the indication of the
“SLCT LVR POSI” mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to the “UP (+ side)” or “DOWN (−
side)” side (1GR ⇔ 7GR). Refer to TM-99, "Reference Value".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO-1 [The actual gear position does not change, or shifting into the manual mode is not possible (no gear
shifting in the manual mode possible). Or the shift position indicator is not indicated.]>>•Check manual
mode switch. Refer to TM-175, "Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch)".
• Check A/T main system. Refer to TM-105, "Fail-Safe".
- Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-109, "DTC Index".
NO-2 (The actual gear position changes, but the shift position indicator is not indicated.)>>•Perform “Self
Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-109, "DTC Index".
NO-3 (The actual gear position and the indication on the shift position indicator do not coincide.)>>•Perform
“Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-109, "DTC Index".
NO-4 (Only a specific position or positions is/are not indicated on the shift position indicator)>>•Check the
unified meter and A/C amp. Refer to MWI-6, "Work flow".
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
TM-183
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC
FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000004969704
1.CHECK A/T SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Shift the selector lever to “P” position.
3. Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal released.
Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position?
YES >> Go to TM-183, "FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK A/T SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (PART 2)
Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal depressed.
Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Go to TM-183, "FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Diagnosis Procedure".
FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969705
1.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect shift lock relay.
3. Check voltage between shift lock relay harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 10.
2.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT (PART 1)
Check continuity between shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3.CHECK SHIFT LOCK RELAY
Check shift lock relay. Refer to TM-187, "FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock Relay)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 2)
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Shift lock relay harness connector
Ground
Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
E52 2
Depressed brake pedal. Battery voltage
Released brake pedal. 0 V
Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
E52 1 Existed
TM-184
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 20.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT LOCK RELAY AND A/T SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector.
3. Check continuity between shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal and A/T shift selector
vehicle side harness connector terminal.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT LOCK RELAY AND A/T SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 2)
Check continuity between shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal and A/T shift selector vehicle
side harness connector terminal.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
7.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT (PART 2)
Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
8.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND SHIFT LOCK UNIT
1. Disconnect shift lock unit connector.
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector terminals and shift lock unit A/T shift selector side
connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
E52 5 Battery voltage
Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E52 3 E137 8 Existed
Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
E52 3 Not existed
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
M137 4 Existed
A/T shift selector connector Shift lock unit A/T shift selector side connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M137
8
M222
3
Existed
4 4
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
TM-185
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
9.CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
1. Remove shift lock unit. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View".
2. Check shift lock solenoid. Refer to TM-187, "FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock
Solenoid)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Replace shift lock unit. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View".
10.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 3)
1. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector.
2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 1)
1. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector.
2. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and stop lamp switch
vehicle side harness connector terminal.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
12.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 2)
Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and stop lamp switch vehicle
side harness connector terminal.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
13.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 1)
Check the following.
• Harness for short or open between battery and fuse block (J/B). Refer to PG-16, "GASOLINE ENGINE
MODELS : Wiring Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY -".
• Battery
• 10A fuse [No.7, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-229, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement".
• Fuse block (J/B)
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
14.CHECK DTC OF ICC
Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
E110 3 Battery voltage
Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E103 8F E110 3 Existed
Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
E103 8F Not existed
TM-186
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
With CONSULT-III
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ICC”.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check the DTC detected item. Refer to CCS-293, "DTC Index".
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
15.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 1)
Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-188, "FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Stop Lamp
Switch)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 18.
NO >> GO TO 16.
16.CHECK INSTALLATION POSITION OF STOP LAMP SWITCH
Adjust stop lamp switch position. Refer to BR-9, "Inspection and Adjustment" (LHD), BR-60, "Inspection and
Adjustment" (RHD).
>> GO TO 17.
17.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 2)
Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-188, "FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Stop Lamp
Switch)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-20, "Exploded View" (LHD), BR-71, "Exploded View"
(RHD).
18.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND SHIFT LOCK RELAY (PART 1)
Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and shift lock relay vehicle
side harness connector terminal.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 19.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
19.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND SHIFT LOCK RELAY (PART 2)
Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and shift lock relay vehicle
side harness connector terminal.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
20.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector.
3. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and shift lock relay
vehicle side harness connector terminal.
Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E110 4 E52 2 Existed
Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
E110 4 Not existed
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
TM-187
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 21.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
21.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 2)
Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and shift lock relay vehicle
side harness connector terminal.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 22.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
22.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 2)
Check the following.
• Harness for short or open between ignition switch and fuse block (J/B). Refer to PG-34, "GASOLINE
ENGINE MODELS : Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -".
• Ignition switch
• 10A fuse [No.3, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-229, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement".
• Fuse block (J/B)
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid) INFOID:0000000004969706
1.CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
Apply voltage to terminals 3 and 4 of shift lock unit connector, and then check that shift lock solenoid is activated.
CAUTION:
Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage.
Can the lock plate be moved up and down?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace shift lock unit. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View".
FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock Relay) INFOID:0000000004969707
1.CHECK SHIFT LOCK RELAY
Check continuity between shift lock relay terminals 3 and 5.
CAUTION:
Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage.
Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E103 4F E52 5 Existed
Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
E103 4F Not existed
Shift lock unit connector
Condition Status
Connector
Terminal
+ (fuse) −
M222 3 4
Apply 12 V direct current
between terminals 3 and 4.
Shift lock solenoid operates
TM-188
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace shift lock relay.
FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) INFOID:0000000004969708
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Check continuity between stop lamp switch connector terminals 3 and 4.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-20, "Exploded View" (LHD), BR-71, "Exploded View"
(RHD).
EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC
EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000006057542
1.CHECK A/T SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (STEP 1)
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” position.
3. Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal released.
Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position?
YES >> Go to TM-188, "EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK A/T SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (STEP 2)
Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal depressed.
Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Go to TM-188, "EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Diagnosis Procedure".
EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006057543
1.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Shift lock relay connector
Condition Continuity
Connector Terminal
E52 3 5
Apply 12 V direct current
between terminals 1 and 2.
Existed
OFF Not existed
Stop lamp switch connector
Condition Continuity
Connector Terminal
E110 3 4
Depressed brake pedal. Existed
Released brake pedal. Not existed
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M137 8
Depressed brake pedal. Battery voltage
Released brake pedal. 0 V
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
TM-189
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 5.
2.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND SHIFT LOCK UNIT
1. Disconnect shift lock unit connector.
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector terminals and shift lock unit A/T shift selector side
connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4.CHECK SHIFT LOCK UNIT
1. Remove shift lock unit. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View".
2. Check shift lock unit. Refer to TM-191, "EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift
Lock Solenoid)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Replace shift lock unit. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View".
5.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 2)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 9.
6.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 1)
Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-191, "EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Stop
Lamp Switch)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 12.
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
M137 4 Existed
A/T shift selector connector Shift lock unit A/T shift selector side connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M137
8
M222
3
Existed
4 4
Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
E110 3 Battery voltage
TM-190
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
7.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 1)
Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and A/T shift selector
vehicle side harness connector terminal.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
8.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 2)
Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
9.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector.
3. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and stop lamp switch
vehicle side harness connector terminal.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
10.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 2)
Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
11.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following.
• Harness for short or open between ignition switch and fuse block (J/B). Refer to PG-34, "GASOLINE
ENGINE MODELS : Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -".
• Ignition switch
• 10A fuse [No.3, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-229, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement".
• Fuse block (J/B)
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E110 4 M137 8 Existed
Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
E110 4 Not existed
Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E103 4F E110 3 Existed
Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
E103 4F Not existed
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
TM-191
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
12.CHECK INSTALLATION POSITION OF STOP LAMP SWITCH
Adjust stop lamp switch position. Refer to BR-9, "Inspection and Adjustment" (LHD) or BR-60, "Inspection and
Adjustment" (RHD).
>> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 2)
Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-191, "EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Stop
Lamp Switch)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-20, "Exploded View" (LHD) or BR-71, "Exploded View"
(RHD).
EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid)
INFOID:0000000006057544
1.CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
Apply voltage to terminals 3 and 4 of shift lock unit connector, and then check that shift lock solenoid is activated.
CAUTION:
Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage.
Can the lock plate be moved up and down?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace shift lock unit. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View".
EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)
INFOID:0000000006057545
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Check continuity between stop lamp switch connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-20, "Exploded View" (LHD) or BR-71, "Exploded View"
(RHD).
Shift lock unit connector
Condition Status
Connector
Terminal
+ (fuse) −
M222 3 4
Apply 12 V direct current
between terminals 3 and
4.
Shift lock solenoid operates
Stop lamp switch connector
Condition Continuity
Connector Terminal
E110 3 4
Brake pedal depressed Existed
Brake pedal released Not existed
TM-192
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000004969710
1.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check that each position indicator lamp of the selector lever position indicator turns on when shifting the
selector lever from “P” to “M” position.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Go to TM-192, "Diagnosis Procedure".
2.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR (PART 2)
Check that the night illumination of the selector lever position indicator turns on when setting the lighting
switch in 1st position.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Go to TM-192, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969711
1.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Which item is abnormal?
Position indicator lamp>> GO TO 2.
Illumination lamp>> GO TO 11.
2.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 8.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4.CHECK SHIFT POSITION SWITCH (PART 1)
1. Disconnect shift position switch connector.
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector harness connector terminals and shift position switch connector
terminals.
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M137 10 Battery voltage
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
M137 4 Existed
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
TM-193
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View".
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT POSITION SWITCH AND SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
(PART 1)
1. Disconnect selector lever position indicator connector.
2. Check continuity between shift position switch harness connector terminals and selector lever position
indicator connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View".
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT POSITION SWITCH AND SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
(PART 2)
Check harness cladding between shift position switch connector and selector lever position indicator connector
for damage.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View".
7.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
Check selector lever position indicator. Refer to TM-195, "Component Inspection (Selector Lever Position Indicator)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
A/T shift selector harness connector Shift position switch connector
Condition Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M137
4
M221
7 Selector lever in “D”
position.
Existed
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, 11 No existed
9 Selector lever in “M”
position.
Existed
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11 No existed
10
2, 6 Selector lever in “N”
and “M” position.
Existed
3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11 No existed
3, 6 Selector lever in “D”
position.
Existed
2, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11 No existed
4, 6 Selector lever in “R”
position.
Existed
2, 3, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11 No existed
5, 6 Selector lever in “P”
position.
Existed
2, 3, 4, 7, 9, 10, 11 No existed
Shift position switch harness connector Selector lever position indicator harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M221
2
M223
3
Existed
3 4
4 5
5 7
6 6
7 8
9 2
TM-194
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
NO >> Replace damaged parts.
8.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND BCM (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and BCM vehicle
side harness connector terminal.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
9.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND BCM (PART 2)
Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
10.CHECK BCM INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL
Check BCM input/output signal. Refer to BCS-50, "Reference Value".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
11.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 2)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Check illumination circuit. Refer to INL-85, "LHD : Wiring Diagram - ILLUMINATION -" (LHD), INL-
92, "RHD : Wiring Diagram - ILLUMINATION -" (RHD).
12.CHECK SHIFT POSITION SWITCH (PART 2)
1. Disconnect shift position switch connector.
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector harness connector terminals and shift position switch connector
terminals.
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector BCM vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M137 10 M122 96 Existed
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
M137 10 Not existed
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector
Terminal
+ −
M137 7 9 Lighting switch 1ST Battery voltage
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
TM-195
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View".
13.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT POSITION SWITCH AND SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
(PART 1)
1. Disconnect selector lever position indicator connector.
2. Check continuity between shift position switch harness connector terminals and selector lever position
indicator connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View".
14.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT POSITION SWITCH AND SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
(PART 2)
Check harness cladding between shift position switch connector and selector lever position indicator connector
for damage.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View".
Component Inspection (Selector Lever Position Indicator) INFOID:0000000004969712
1.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
Check that selector lever position indicator lamps turn on.
CAUTION:
Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage.
A/T shift selector harness connector Shift position switch connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M137
7
M221
10 Existed
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 11 No existed
9
11 Existed
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10 No existed
Shift position switch harness connector Selector lever position indicator harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M221
10
M223
1
Existed
11 9
TM-196
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace the selector lever position indicator. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View".
Selector lever position indicator connector
Condition Status
Connector
Terminal
+ (fuse) −
M223
1 9
Apply 12 V direct current between
terminals 1 and 9.
Illumination lamp turns on.
3
8
Apply 12 V direct current between
terminals 3 and 8.
“N” position indicator lamp
turns on.
4
Apply 12 V direct current between
terminals 4 and 8.
“D” position indicator lamp
turns on.
5
Apply 12 V direct current between
terminals 5 and 8.
“R” position indicator lamp
turns on.
7
Apply 12 V direct current between
terminals 7 and 8.
“P” position indicator lamp
turns on.
6 2
Apply 12 V direct current between
terminals 6 and 2.
“M” mode indicator lamp
turns on.
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
TM-197
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000004969719
The diagnostics item numbers show the sequence for inspection. Inspect in order from item 1.
CAUTION:
If any malfunction occurs in the RE7R01A transmission, replace the A/T assembly.
Symptom
Diagnostic item
Control linkage
Output speed sensor
Vehicle speed signal
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Engine speed signal
Input speed sensor
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Transmission range switch
Line pressure solenoid valve
Torque converter solenoid valve
Low brake solenoid valve
Front brake solenoid valve
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
Input clutch solenoid valve
Direct clutch solenoid valve
2346 brake solenoid valve
Anti-interlock solenoid valve
CAN communication
TM-127
TM-136
TM-165
TM-164
TM-138
TM-135
TM-133
TM-132
TM-155
TM-153
TM-177
TM-159
TM-176
TM-157
TM-179
TM-178
TM-156
TM-129
Poor
performance
Driving
performance
Shift point is high in “D” position. 1 2 3
Shift point is low in “D” position. 1 2
Large
shock
When
shifting
gears
→ “D” position 3 6 5 5 4 2 1 2 5
→ “R” position 3 6 5 5 4 2 1 5
1GR ⇔ 2GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 4
2GR ⇔ 3GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 4
3GR ⇔ 4GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 2 4
4GR ⇔ 5GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 2 4
5GR ⇔ 6GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 2 4
6GR ⇔ 7GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 2 4
Downshift when accelerator
pedal is depressed
2 1 4 2 2 3
Upshift when accelerator
pedal is released
2 1 4 2 2 3
Lock-up 3 1 3 3 3 2 4
Judder Lock-up 2 1 1 4 3
Strange noise
In “R” position 2 1
In “N” position 2 1
In “D” position 2 1
Engine at idle 2 1
TM-198
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Symptom
Diagnostic item
Output speed sensor
Engine speed signal
Input speed sensor
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Battery voltage
Transmission range switch
Manual mode switch
Stop lamp switch
Line pressure solenoid valve
Torque converter solenoid valve
Low brake solenoid valve
Front brake solenoid valve
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
Input clutch solenoid valve
Direct clutch solenoid valve
2346 brake solenoid valve
Anti-interlock solenoid valve
CAN communication
TM-136
TM-138
TM-135
TM-133
TM-180
TM-132
TM-171
TM-188
TM-155
TM-153
TM-177
TM-159
TM-176
TM-157
TM-179
TM-178
TM-156
TM-129
Function
trouble
Gear
does no
change
“D” position
Locks in 1GR 1 1 1 1
Locks in 5GR 1
1GR → 2GR 1 1 1 1
2GR → 3GR 1
3GR → 4GR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4GR → 5GR 1 1
5GR → 6GR 1
6GR → 7GR 1 1 1 1 1
5GR → 4GR 1
4GR → 3GR 1 1 1
3GR → 2GR 1 1
2GR → 1GR 1 1 1
Does not lock-up 1 1 1 1 3 4 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
“M” position
1GR ⇔ 2GR 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2GR ⇔ 3GR 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3GR ⇔ 4GR 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
4GR ⇔ 5GR 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
5GR ⇔ 6GR 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
6GR ⇔ 7GR 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
TM-199
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Symptom
Diagnostic item
Control linkage
Output speed sensor
Engine speed signal
Input speed sensor
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Transmission range switch
Manual mode switch
Line pressure solenoid valve
Torque converter solenoid valve
Low brake solenoid valve
Front brake solenoid valve
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
Input clutch solenoid valve
Direct clutch solenoid valve
2346 brake solenoid valve
Anti-interlock solenoid valve
CAN communication
TM-127
TM-136
TM-138
TM-135
TM-133
TM-132
TM-171
TM-155
TM-153
TM-177
TM-159
TM-176
TM-157
TM-179
TM-178
TM-156
TM-129
Function
trouble
Poor
shifting
Slip
When shifting
gears
1GR ⇔ 2GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 2
2GR ⇔ 3GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 2
3GR ⇔ 4GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 2
4GR ⇔ 5GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2
5GR ⇔ 6GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2
6GR ⇔ 7GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2
Engine
brake
does
not
work
“D” position → “M” position 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 3
“M” position
7GR → 6GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 2 3
6GR → 5GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 2 3
5GR → 4GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 2 3
4GR → 3GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 2 2 3
3GR → 2GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 3
2GR → 1GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 3
Poor
power
transmission
Slip
With selector lever in
“D” position, acceleration
is extremely poor.
5 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2
With selector lever in
“R” position, acceleration
is extremely poor.
5 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2
While starting off by
accelerating in 1GR,
engine races.
3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2
While accelerating in
2GR, engine races.
3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 2
While accelerating in
3GR, engine races.
3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 2
While accelerating in
4GR, engine races.
3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 2
TM-200
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Function
trouble
Poor
power
transmission
Slip
While accelerating in
5GR, engine races.
3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 2
While accelerating in
6GR, engine races.
3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 2
While accelerating in
7GR, engine races.
3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 2
Lock-up 3 3 3 4 1 1 2
No creep at all. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Extremely large
creep.
1
Symptom
Diagnostic item
Control linkage
Output speed sensor
Engine speed signal
Input speed sensor
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Transmission range switch
Manual mode switch
Line pressure solenoid valve
Torque converter solenoid valve
Low brake solenoid valve
Front brake solenoid valve
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
Input clutch solenoid valve
Direct clutch solenoid valve
2346 brake solenoid valve
Anti-interlock solenoid valve
CAN communication
TM-127
TM-136
TM-138
TM-135
TM-133
TM-132
TM-171
TM-155
TM-153
TM-177
TM-159
TM-176
TM-157
TM-179
TM-178
TM-156
TM-129
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
TM-201
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Symptom
Diagnostic item
Control linkage
Output speed sensor
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Engine speed signal
Battery voltage
Transmission range switch
Stop lamp switch
Line pressure solenoid valve
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
Low brake solenoid valve
Front brake solenoid valve
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
Input clutch solenoid valve
Direct clutch solenoid valve
2346 brake solenoid valve
Anti-interlock solenoid valve
Starter relay
TM-127
TM-136
TM-164
TM-138
TM-180
TM-132
TM-188
TM-155
TM-153
TM-177
TM-159
TM-176
TM-157
TM-179
TM-178
TM-156
TM-130
Function
trouble
Power transmission
cannot be
performed
Vehicle cannot run in all position. 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Driving is not possible in “D” position.
3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Driving is not possible in “R” position.
3 2 1 1 1
Engine stall 3 4 4 5 2 1
Engine stalls when selector lever
shifted “N” → “D” or “R”.
3 4 4 2 1
Engine does not start in “N” or “P”
position.
3 1 2 1
Engine starts in position other than
“N” or “P”.
3 2 1
Poor operation
Vehicle does not enter parking condition.
1 2
Parking condition is not cancelled. 1 2
Vehicle runs with A/T in “P” position. 1 2
Vehicle moves forward with the “R”
position.
1 2
Vehicle runs with A/T in “P” position. 1 2
Vehicle moves backward with the
“D” position.
1 2
TM-202
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004969727
LHD models
JSDIA1414GB
A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
TM-203
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
1. Selector lever knob 2. Lock pin 3. Indicator plate
4. Selector lever position indicator 5. Harness connector 6. Insert finisher
7. Control rod 8. Dust cover 9. Bracket
10. Dust cover plate 11. Snap pin 12. Washer
13. Collar 14. Pivot pin 15. Insulator
16. Shift lock unit 17. A/T shift selector assembly 18. Adapter
: Apply multi-purpose grease.
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not describe on the above.
TM-204
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
RHD models
JSDIA1415GB
1. Selector lever knob 2. Lock pin 3. Adapter
4. A/T shift selector assembly 5. Shift lock unit 6. Pivot pin
7. Washer 8. Collar 9. Snap pin
10. Insulator 11. Dust cover plate 12. Bracket
13. Dust cover 14. Control rod 15. Insert finisher
16. Harness connector 17. Selector lever position indicator 18. Indicator plate
A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
TM-205
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004969728
REMOVAL
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” position.
2. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector.
3. Shift the selector lever to “N” position.
4. Remove knob cover (A) below selector lever downward.
5. Pull lock pin (1) out of selector lever knob (2).
6. Remove selector lever knob.
7. Remove center console assembly. Refer to IP-37, "A/T MODELS
: Exploded View".
CAUTION:
When disconnecting selector lever position indicator connector
from shift position switch, never twist or apply an
excessive load to the connector.
8. Remove rear ventilator duct 1. Refer to VTL-10, "Exploded
View".
9. Disconnect A/T shift selector harness connector.
10. Remove harness clips from A/T shift selector assembly.
11. Shift the selector lever to “P” position.
12. Remove A/T shift selector assembly mounting bolts.
13. Slightly lift the A/T shift selector assembly (1) and slide it rightward.
Then pull it out in the diagonally right direction.
14. Remove snap pin, washers, insulator, collar and pivot pin from
A/T shift selector assembly.
15. Remove adapter from A/T shift selector assembly.
16. Remove dust cover and dust cover plate from A/T shift selector
assembly.
17. Remove dust cover from dust cover plate.
18. Remove shift lock unit from A/T shift selector assembly.
19. Remove brackets from vehicle floor panel.
20. Remove selector lever position indicator from console finisher
assembly.
a. Remove indicator assembly from console finisher assembly. Refer to IP-37, "A/T MODELS : Exploded
View".
b. Remove insert finisher from indicator assembly.
c. Remove selector lever position indicator.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Apply multi-purpose grease on the pin surface (that slides after installing a collar) of the pivot pin.
• Apply multi-purpose grease on the surface that the shift lock unit plate slides vertically.
• Refer to the followings when installing selector lever knob to A/T shift selector assembly.
1. Insert lock pin to selector lever knob.
2. Install selector lever knob over selector lever until a click is felt.
CAUTION:
• Install it straight, and never tap or apply any shock to install it.
• Never press selector button.
: Apply multi-purpose grease.
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not describe on the above.
JPDIA0898ZZ
JPDIA0055ZZ
TM-206
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004969729
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check the A/T position after adjusting A/T position. Refer to TM-127, "Inspection and Adjustment".
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Adjust the A/T position. Refer to TM-127, "Inspection and Adjustment".
CONTROL ROD
TM-207
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
CONTROL ROD
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004969730
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004969731
REMOVAL
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” position.
2. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector assembly. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View".
3. Remove manual lever from A/T assembly.
4. Remove control rod from manual lever.
5. Remove insulator and collar from manual lever.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Apply multi-purpose grease on the pin surface (that slides after installing collar) of the tip of the control
rod.
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004969732
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check A/T position after adjusting A/T position. Refer to TM-127, "Inspection and Adjustment".
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Adjust A/T position. Refer to TM-127, "Inspection and Adjustment".
1. A/T assembly 2. Manual lever 3. Lock washer
4. Control rod 5. Washer 6. Insulator
7. Collar 8. Conical washer 9. Snap pin
: Apply multi-purpose grease.
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.
JSDIA1002GB
TM-208
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
PADDLE SHIFTER
PADDLE SHIFTER
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004969733
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004969734
REMOVAL
1. Remove steering column cover. Refer to IP-14, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View".
2. Disconnect paddle shifter connectors from each paddle shifter.
3. Remove paddle shifter mounting bolts and nuts.
4. Remove each paddle shifter from steering column assembly.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
1. Steering column assembly 2. Paddle shifter (shift-down) 3. Paddle shifter (shift-up)
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
JPDIA0051GB
G SENSOR
TM-209
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
G SENSOR
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004969735
CAUTION:
• Refer to TM-121, "Description" when removing or replacing G sensor.
• Never drop or strike G sensor, because it has little tolerance for impact.
• Never use power tool to avoid impact.
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004969736
CAUTION:
• Refer to TM-121, "Description" when removing or replacing G sensor.
• Never drop or strike G sensor, because it has little tolerance for impact.
• Never use power tool to avoid impact.
REMOVAL
1. Remove luggage floor spacer (RH). Refer to INT-30, "FOR EUROPE : Exploded View".
2. Disconnect G sensor connector.
3. Remove G sensor from bracket.
4. Remove bracket from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Install bracket with care of correct installation direction.
Adjustment INFOID:0000000004969737
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Refer to TM-121, "Description".
1. G sensor 2. Bracket
: Vehicle front
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
JSDIA0950GB
TM-210
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
OIL PAN
OIL PAN
VQ37VHR
VQ37VHR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000004969738
VQ37VHR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004969739
REMOVAL
1. Drain ATF through drain plug.
2. Remove exhaust mounting bracket. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 connectors (A).
4. Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 harness (B) from clips (1).
5. Remove bracket (2) from A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225,
"VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
1. A/T assembly 2. Oil pan gasket 3. Oil pan
4. Clip 5. Oil pan mounting bolt 6. Overflow plug
7. Drain plug 8. Drain plug gasket 9. Magnet
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
JPDIA0883GB
: Vehicle front
: Bolt
SCIA8269E
OIL PAN
TM-211
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
6. Remove clips (1).
7. Remove oil pan (2) and oil pan gasket.
8. Remove magnets from oil pan.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Clean foreign materials (gear wear particles) that adhere on the inside of the oil pan and on the magnet,
and then assembly.
• Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan gasket mounting surface of
transmission case and oil pan.
• Never reuse oil pan gasket and oil pan mounting bolts.
• Install oil pan gasket in the direction to align hole position.
• Never reuse drain plug and drain plug gasket. In addition, install new drain plug and drain plug gasket
after adjustment of A/T fluid filling.
• Tighten the oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in the
numerical order as shown in the figure after temporarily tightening
them.
VQ37VHR : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004969740
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of malfunction.
If the ATF is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreign
particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may need replacement.
A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up.
Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and can
inhibit pump pressure.
• If frictional material is detected, replace radiator after repair A/
T. Refer to CO-16, "Exploded View".
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check for A/T fluid leakage.
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-124, "Adjustment".
V9X
: Vehicle front
: Oil pan mounting bolt
JSDIA0793ZZ
: Vehicle front
JSDIA0794ZZ
SCIA5199E
TM-212
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
OIL PAN
V9X : Exploded View INFOID:0000000005986728
V9X : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005986729
REMOVAL
1. Drain ATF through drain plug.
2. Remove oil pan (1) and oil pan gasket.
3. Remove magnets from oil pan.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Clean foreign materials (gear wear particles) that adhere on the inside of the oil pan and on the magnet,
and then assembly.
• Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan gasket mounting surface of
transmission case and oil pan.
• Never reuse oil pan gasket and oil pan mounting bolts.
• Install oil pan gasket in the direction to align hole position.
1. A/T assembly 2. Oil pan gasket 3. Oil pan
4. Oil pan mounting bolt 5. Overflow plug 6. Drain plug
7. Drain plug gasket 8. Magnet
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
JPDIA1072GB
: Vehicle front
: Oil pan mounting bolt
JPDIA1073ZZ
OIL PAN
TM-213
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
• Never reuse drain plug and drain plug gasket. In addition, install new drain plug and drain plug gasket
after adjustment of A/T fluid filling.
• Tighten the oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in the
numerical order as shown in the figure after temporarily tightening
them.
V9X : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000005986730
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of malfunction.
If the ATF is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreign
particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may need replacement.
A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up.
Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and can
inhibit pump pressure.
• If frictional material is detected, replace radiator after repair A/
T. Refer to CO-16, "Exploded View".
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check for A/T fluid leakage.
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-124, "Adjustment".
: Vehicle front
JPDIA1074ZZ
SCIA5199E
TM-214
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
AIR BREATHER HOSE
AIR BREATHER HOSE
VQ37VHR
VQ37VHR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000004969741
VQ37VHR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004969742
REMOVAL
1. Remove propeller shaft assembly (front). Refer to DLN-114, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
2. Remove A/T air breather hose.
3. Remove propeller shaft assembly (rear). Refer to DLN-124, "Exploded View".
4. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector. Refer to TM-207, "Exploded View".
5. Support A/T assembly with a transmission jack.
CAUTION:
When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to allow it to collide against the drain plug and
overflow plug.
6. Remove rear engine mounting member with a power tool. Refer to EM-71, "Exploded View".
7. Remove bolt fixing A/T assembly to engine with power tool.
8. Remove transfer air breather hose from air breathre tube.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Never bend the A/T air breather hose to prevent damage to the hose.
• Insert A/T air breather hose to A/T air breather tube all the way to the curve of the tube.
1. Air breather tube 2. A/T assembly 3. A/T air breather hose
4. Clip 5. A/T air breather tube
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
JPDIA0932GB
AIR BREATHER HOSE
TM-215
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
• Be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the radius curve
end when inserting A/T air breather hose to air breather tube
(for A/T) (1).
• Install A/T air breather hose to air breather tube (for A/T) so
that the paint mark is facing upward.
• Securely install the clip to the brackets when installing A/T air
breather hose to the bracket.
V9X
V9X : Exploded View INFOID:0000000005986726
V9X : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005986727
REMOVAL
1. Remove propeller shaft assembly (rear). Refer to DLN-118, "V9X : Exploded View".
2. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector. Refer to TM-207, "Exploded View".
3. Support A/T assembly with a transmission jack.
CAUTION:
When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to allow it to collide against the drain plug and
overflow plug.
4. Remove rear engine mounting member with a power tool. Refer to EM.
5. Remove air breather tube mounting bolt.
6. Remove air breathre tube and A/T air breathre hose.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Never bend the A/T air breather hose to prevent damage to the hose.
• Insert A/T air breather hose to A/T air breather tube all the way to the curve of the tube.
2 : For transfer
JPDIA0931ZZ
1. Air breather tube 2. A/T assembly 3. A/T air breather tube
4. Clip 5. A/T air breather hose
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
JPDIA1077GB
TM-216
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
AIR BREATHER HOSE
• Be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the spool (A) portion
when inserting A/T air breather hose to the air breather
tube (for A/T) (1).
• Install A/T air breather hose to air breather tube (for A/T) so
that the paint mark is facing upward.
• Securely install the clip to the brackets when installing air
breather hose to the bracket.
2 : For transfer
JPDIA1079ZZ
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
TM-217
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
VQ37VHR
VQ37VHR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000004969743
LHD models
JPDIA0854GB
1. A/T assembly 2. Copper washer 3. A/T fluid cooler tube
4. A/T fluid cooler tube 5. Clip 6. Bracket
7. Bracket 8. Hose clamp 9. A/T fluid cooler hose B
10. A/T fluid cooler hose A
A. To radiator
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
TM-218
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
RHD models
VQ37VHR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004969744
REMOVAL
1. Remove air cleaner case (LH). Refer to EM-29, "Exploded View".
2. Remove engine under cover with a power tool. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
3. Remove A/T fluid cooler hose A and A/T fluid cooler hose B.
4. Remove propeller shaft assembly (front). Refer to DLN-114, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
5. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 connectors (A).
6. Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 harness (B) from clips (1).
7. Remove harness bracket (2) from A/T assembly. Refer to TM-
225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
8. Remove front suspension member. Refer to FSU-22, "Exploded
View".
9. Remove A/T fluid cooler tubes from A/T assembly and engine
assembly.
10. Plug up opening such as the A/T fluid cooler tube hole.
11. Remove clips and brackets.
12. Remove A/T fluid cooler tubes from the vehicle.
JPDIA0930GB
1. A/T assembly 2. Copper washer 3. A/T fluid cooler tube
4. A/T fluid cooler tube 5. Bracket 6. Clip
7. Bracket 8. Hose clamp 9. A/T fluid cooler hose B
10. A/T fluid cooler hose A
A. To radiator
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
: Vehicle front
: Bolt
SCIA8269E
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
TM-219
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
CAUTION:
Be careful not to bend A/T fluid cooler tubes.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Never reuse copper washer.
• Refer to the following when installing A/T fluid cooler hoses.
*: Refer to the illustrations for the specific position each hose clamp tab.
- The illustrations indicate the view from the hose ends.
- When installing hose clamps center line of each hose clamp tab
should be positioned as shown in the figure.
- Insert A/T fluid cooler hose according to dimension “L” described below.
Hose name Hose end Paint mark Position of hose clamp*
A/T fluid cooler hose A
Radiator assembly side Facing backward A
A/T fluid cooler tube side Facing downward B
A/T fluid cooler hose B
Radiator assembly side Facing downward C
A/T fluid cooler tube side Facing downward B
D : Vehicle front
E : Vehicle upper
JPDIA0965ZZ
(1) (2) Tube type Dimension “L”
A/T fluid cooler hose A
Radiator assembly side A End reaches the radius curve end.
A/T fluid cooler tube side B
30 mm (1.18 in) [End reaches the 2-stage bulge
(D).]
A/T fluid cooler hose B
Radiator assembly side C Insert the hose until the hose touches the radiator.
A/T fluid cooler tube side B
30 mm (1.18 in) [End reaches the 2-stage bulge
(D).]
JSDIA0882ZZ
TM-220
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
- Set hose clamps (1) at the both ends of A/T fluid cooler hoses (2)
with dimension (A) from the hose edge.
- Hose clamp should not interfere with the bulge of fluid cooler tube.
VQ37VHR : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004969745
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check for A/T fluid leakage.
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-124, "Adjustment".
V9X
Dimension
“A”
: 5 – 9 mm (0.20 – 0.35 in)
SCIA8123E
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
TM-221
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
V9X : Exploded View INFOID:0000000005986723
1. A/T assembly 2. A/T fluid cooler hose A 3. Hose clamp
4. A/T fluid cooler tube A 5. Copper washer 6. A/T fluid cooler tube B
7. A/T fluid cooler hose B 8. A/T fluid cooler hose C 9. A/T fluid cooler hose D
10. Bypass valve 11. Heat insulator 12. Bracket
13. Clip 14. A/T fluid cooler tube C 15. A/T fluid cooler tube D
16. Bracket 17. Bracket 18. A/T fluid cooler hose E
19. A/T fluid cooler hose F
C. Tightening must be done following the installation procedure. Refer to TM-228, "V9X : Removal and Installation".
JPDIA1078GB
TM-222
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
V9X : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005986724
REMOVAL
1. Remove air cleaner case (LH). Refer to EM-29, "Exploded View".
2. Remove engine under cover with a power tool. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
3. Remove A/T fluid cooler hose E and F.
4. Separate propeller shaft assembly (front). Refer to DLN-118, "V9X : Exploded View".
5. Remove heat insulator from A/T assembly.
6. Remove the following parts.
• A/T fluid cooler tube A
• A/T fluid cooler tube B
• A/T fluid cooler hose A
• A/T fluid cooler hose B
• A/T fluid cooler hose C
• A/T fluid cooler hose D
• Bypass valve
CAUTION:
Be careful not to bend cooler tubes.
7. Plug up opening such as the A/T fluid cooler tube hole.
8. Remove clips and brackets.
9. Remove A/T fluid cooler tube C and D, according to the following steps.
a. Remove starter motor. Refer to STR-30, "V9X : Exploded View".
b. Remove steering gear assembly. Refer to ST-20, "Exploded View".
c. Remove lower mounting nuts for the engine mounting insulators (RH and LH). Refer to EM.
d. Set a jack under the engine to lift it.
e. Loosen front suspension member mounting bolts and nuts to lower front suspension member. Refer to
FSU-22, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop the front suspension member.
f. Remove A/T fluid cooler tube C and D from the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to bend A/T fluid cooler tubes.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Never reuse copper washer.
• Refer to the following when installing A/T fluid cooler hoses.
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
TM-223
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
*: Refer to the illustrations for the specific position each hose clamp tab.
- The illustrations indicate the view from the hose ends.
- When installing hose clamps center line of each hose clamp tab
should be positioned as shown in the figure.
- Insert A/T fluid cooler hose according to dimension “L” described below.
A/T fluid cooler hose F
A/T fluid cooler tube D side Facing downward B
Radiator assembly side Facing backward E
Hose name Hose end Paint mark Position of hose clamp*
G : Vehicle upper
H : Vehicle front
JPDIA1087ZZ
(1) (2) Tube type Dimension “L”
A/T fluid cooler hose A
A/T fluid cooler tube A side A 31 mm (1.22 in) [End reaches the 2-stage bulge (E).]
Bypass valve B
Until paint mark (F) on the tube is completely hidden.
A/T fluid cooler hose B
A/T fluid cooler tube B side A 31 mm (1.22 in) [End reaches the 2-stage bulge (E).]
Bypass valve B
Until paint mark (F) on the tube is completely hidden.
A/T fluid cooler hose C
A/T fluid cooler tube C side A 31 mm (1.22 in) [End reaches the 2-stage bulge (E).]
Bypass valve B
Until paint mark (F) on the tube is completely hidden.
A/T fluid cooler hose D
A/T fluid cooler tube D side A 31 mm (1.22 in) [End reaches the 2-stage bulge (E).]
Bypass valve B
Until paint mark (F) on the tube is completely hidden.
A/T fluid cooler hose E
A/T fluid cooler tube C side A 30 mm (1.18 in) [End reaches the 2-stage bulge (E).]
Radiator assembly side C Insert the hose until the hose touches the radiator.
A/T fluid cooler hose F
A/T fluid cooler tube D side A 30 mm (1.18 in) [End reaches the 2-stage bulge (E).]
Radiator assembly side D End reaches the radius curve end.
TM-224
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
- Set hose clamps (1) at the both ends of A/T fluid cooler hoses (2)
with dimension “A” from the hose edge.
- Hose clamp should not interfere with the bulge of fluid cooler tube.
V9X : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000005986725
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check for A/T fluid leakage.
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-124, "Adjustment".
JPDIA1088ZZ
Dimension “A” : 5 – 9 mm (0.20 – 0.35 in)
SCIA8123E
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
TM-225
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
VQ37VHR
VQ37VHR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000004969746
VQ37VHR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004969747
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS)
from the A/T assembly.
• Be careful not to damage sensor edge.
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” position, and then release the parking brake.
2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
3. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector assembly. Refer to TM-207, "Exploded View".
4. Remove propeller shaft (rear). Refer to DLN-124, "Exploded View".
5. Remove propeller shaft (front). Refer to DLN-114, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
6. Remove manual lever from A/T assembly. Refer to TM-207, "Exploded View".
7. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS) from A/T assembly. Refer to EM-116, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
• Never subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.
• Never disassemble.
• Never allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front edge magnetic area.
1. A/T assembly 2. Bracket 3. Bracket
4. Bracket 5. Bracket
A. Tightening must be done following the installation procedure. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Removal and Installation".
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
JPDIA1071GB
TM-226
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
• Never place in an area affected by magnetism.
8. Remove starter motor. Refer to STR-19, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
9. Remove rear plate cover. Refer to EM-46, "Exploded View".
10. Turn crankshaft, and remove four tightening bolts of the drive plate and the torque converter.
CAUTION:
When turning the crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine.
11. Remove A/T fluid cooler tubes. Refer to TM-217, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
12. Plug up openings such as the A/T fluid cooler tube hole.
13. Support A/T assembly with a transmission jack.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to allow it to collide against the drain plug and overflow plug when setting the transmission
jack.
NOTE:
Be placing wooden block between oil pan (upper) and front suspension member, the removal of A/T
assembly from engine becomes easier.
14. Remove rear engine mounting member and engine mounting insulator (rear) with power tool. Refer to
EM-71, "Exploded View".
15. Disconnect A/T assembly connector and 4WD solenoid connector.
16. Remove harness and harness brackets.
17. Remove bolts fixing A/T assembly to engine with power tool.
18. Remove A/T air breather hose, transfer air breather hose and air breather tube. Refer to TM-214,
"VQ37VHR : Exploded View" (A/T), DLN-72, "V9X (A/T) : Removal and Installation" (transfer).
19. Remove A/T assembly with transfer assembly from the vehicle.
CAUTION:
• Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.
• Secure A/T assembly to a transmission jack.
20. Remove transfer assembly from A/T assembly with power tool.
Refer to DLN-66, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal.
• Check fitting of dowel pin ( ).
SCIA2203E
JPDIA0900ZZ
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
TM-227
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
• When installing A/T assembly to the engine, be sure to check
dimension “A” to ensure it is within the reference value limit.
• When installing A/T assembly to the engine, attach the fixing bolts
in accordance with the following standard.
*: Tightening the bolt with bracket of air breather tube.
• Align the positions of tightening bolts for drive plate with those of the torque converter, and temporarily
tighten the bolts. Then, tighten the bolts with the specified torque.
CAUTION:
• When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine.
• When tightening the tightening bolts for the torque converter after fixing the crankshaft pulley
bolts, be sure to confirm the tightening torque of the crankshaft pulley mounting bolts. Refer to
EM-84, "Exploded View".
• Rotate crankshaft several turns and check to be sure that A/T rotates freely without binding after
converter is installed to drive plate.
VQ37VHR : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004969748
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check A/T fluid leakage.
• Check A/T position after adjusting A/T position. Refer to TM-127, "Inspection and Adjustment".
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
• Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-124, "Adjustment".
• Adjust A/T position. Refer to TM-127, "Inspection and Adjustment".
• Perform G sensor calibration when replacing A/T assembly. Refer to TM-122, "Special Repair Requirement".
(Except for Russia)
V9X
B : Scale
C : Straightedge
Dimension
“A”
: Refer to TM-232, "Torque Converter".
JPDIA0042ZZ
Bolt position A B
Insertion direction A/T assembly to engine Engine to A/T assembly
Number of bolts 8 4
Bolt length (L)
mm (in)
65 (2.56) 35 (1.38)
Tightening torque
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
75 (7.7, 55) 46.6 (4.8, 34) JPDIA0979ZZ
TM-228
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
V9X : Exploded View INFOID:0000000005986720
V9X : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005986721
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS)
from the A/T assembly.
• Be careful not to damage sensor edge.
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” position, and then release the parking brake.
2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
3. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector assembly. Refer to TM-207, "Exploded View".
4. Separate propeller shaft assembly (rear). Refer to DLN-118, "V9X : Exploded View".
5. Separate propeller shaft assembly (front). Refer to DLN-131, "Exploded View".
6. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS) from A/T assembly. Refer to EM.
CAUTION:
• Never subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.
• Never disassemble.
• Never allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front edge magnetic area.
• Never place in an area affected by magnetism.
7. Remove starter motor. Refer to STR-30, "V9X : Exploded View".
8. Remove six tightening bolts of the drive plate and the torque converter, according to the following steps.
a. Remove steering outer sockets (LH and RH) from steering knuckles. Refer to ST-24, "Removal and Installation".
1. A/T assembly 2. Dust cover 3. Bracket
4. Bracket 5. Bracket
A. Tightening must be done following the installation procedure. Refer to TM-228, "V9X : Removal and Installation".
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
JPDIA1075GB
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
TM-229
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
b. Remove the steering gear assembly mounting bolts and slide the steering gear assembly to obtain work
space. Refer to ST-20, "Exploded View".
c. Remove rear plate cover. Refer to EM.
d. Turn crankshaft, and remove six tightening bolts of the drive plate and the torque converter.
CAUTION:
When turning the crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine.
9. Remove A/T fluid cooler tubes, A/T fluid cooler hoses and bypass valve from A/T assembly. Refer to TM-
221, "V9X : Exploded View".
10. Plug up openings such as the A/T fluid cooler tube hole.
11. Remove rear engine mounting member and engine mounting insulator (rear) with power tool. Refer to
EM-71, "Exploded View".
12. Disconnect A/T assembly connector and 4WD solenoid connector.
13. Remove harness and brackets.
14. Remove A/T air breather hose and air breather tube. Refer to TM-214, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View".
15. Remove bolts fixing A/T assembly to engine with power tool.
16. Remove A/T assembly from the vehicle.
CAUTION:
• Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.
• Secure A/T assembly to a transmission jack.
17. Remove manual lever from A/T assembly. Refer to TM-207,
"Exploded View".
18. Remove dust cover from A/T assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal.
• Check fitting of the dowel pins ( ).
• When installing A/T assembly to the engine, be sure to check
dimension “A” to ensure it is within the reference value limit.
SCIA2203E
JSDIA1689ZZ
B : Scale
C : Straightedge
Dimension “A” : Refer to TM-232, "Torque Converter".
JPDIA0042ZZ
TM-230
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
• When installing A/T assembly to the engine, attach the fixing bolts
in accordance with the following standard.
*: Tightening the bolt with bracket of air breather tube. Refer to TM-215, "V9X : Exploded View".
• Align the positions of tightening bolts for drive plate with those of the torque converter, and temporarily
tighten the bolts. Then, tighten the bolts with the specified torque.
CAUTION:
• When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine.
• When tightening the tightening bolts for the torque converter after fixing the crankshaft pulley
bolts, be sure to confirm the tightening torque of the crankshaft pulley mounting bolts. Refer to
EM.
• Rotate crankshaft several turns and check to be sure that A/T rotates freely without binding after
converter is installed to drive plate.
V9X : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000005986722
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check A/T fluid leakage.
• Check A/T position after adjusting A/T position. Refer to TM-127, "Inspection and Adjustment".
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
• Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-124, "Adjustment".
• Adjust A/T position. Refer to TM-127, "Inspection and Adjustment".
• Perform G sensor calibration when replacing A/T assembly. Refer to TM-122, "Special Repair Requirement".
Bolt position A B
Insertion direction A/T assembly to engine
Number of bolts 6 3
Bolt length “L”
mm (in)
60 (2.36) 70 (2.76)
Tightening torque
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
35 (3.6, 26) JPDIA1076ZZ
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
TM-231
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specification INFOID:0000000004969749
*1: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants".
*2: The fluid capacity is the reference value.
Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs INFOID:0000000004969750
VQ37VHR
km/h (MPH)
• At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.
V9X
Destination For Russia Except for Russia
Engine models VQ37VHR V9X
Transmission model code number 3RX4E 3RX5A 1XJ5D
Stall torque ratio 1.92 : 1
Transmission gear ratio
1st 4.924 4.783
2nd 3.194 3.103
3rd 2.043 1.984
4th 1.412 1.371
5th 1.000 1.000
6th 0.862 0.871
7th 0.772 0.776
Reverse 3.972 3.859
Recommended fluid Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF*1
Fluid capacity 9.2 liter (8-1/8 Imp qt)*2
CAUTION:
• Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. Never mix with other ATF.
• Using ATF other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration driveability and A/T durability, and may damage
the A/T, which is not covered by the warranty.
Gear position
Throttle position
Full throttle Half throttle
D1 → D2 53 – 57 (33 – 35) 41 – 45 (25 – 28)
D2 → D3 82 – 90 (51 – 56) 64 – 72 (40 – 45)
D3 → D4 129 – 139 (80 – 86) 96 – 106 (60 – 66)
D4 → D5 189 – 199 (117 – 124) 138 – 148 (86 – 92)
D5 → D6 250 – 260 (155 – 162) 175 – 185 (109 – 115)
D6 → D7 250 – 260 (155 – 162) 250 – 260 (155 – 162)
D7 → D6 240 – 250 (150 – 155) 115 – 125 (71 – 78)
D6 → D5 240 – 250 (150 – 155) 115 – 125 (71 – 78)
D5 → D4 163 – 173 (101 – 108) 95 – 105 (59 – 65)
D4 → D3 108 – 118 (67 – 73) 54 – 64 (34 – 40)
D3 → D2 56 – 64 (35 – 40) 10 – 14 (6 – 9)
D2 → D1 17 – 21 (11 – 13) 5 – 9 (3 – 6)
TM-232
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
km/h (MPH)
• At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.
Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases INFOID:0000000004969751
VQ37VHR
• At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. (Closed throttle position signal OFF)
• At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.
V9X
• At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. (Closed throttle position signal OFF)
• At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.
Stall Speed INFOID:0000000004969752
Torque Converter INFOID:0000000004969753
Gear position
Throttle position
Full throttle Half throttle
D1 → D2 36 – 40 (22 – 25) 32 – 36 (20 – 22)
D2 → D3 58 – 66 (36 – 41) 50 – 58 (31 – 36)
D3 → D4 95 – 105 (59 – 65) 74 – 84 (46 – 52)
D4 → D5 139 – 149 (86 – 93) 95 – 105 (59 – 65)
D5 → D6 180 – 190 (112 – 118) 119 – 129 (74 – 80)
D6 → D7 195 – 205 (121 – 127) 145 – 155 (90 – 96)
D7 → D6 185 – 195 (114 – 121) 99 – 109 (62 – 67)
D6 → D5 170 – 180 (106 – 112) 77 – 87 (48 – 54)
D5 → D4 129 – 139 (80 – 86) 56 – 66 (35 – 41)
D4 → D3 80 – 90 (50 – 56) 38 – 48 (24 – 30)
D3 → D2 47 – 55 (29 – 34) 21 – 25 (13 – 16)
D2 → D1 7 – 11 (4 – 7) 7 – 11 (4 – 7)
Throttle position
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Lock-up ON Lock-up OFF
Closed throttle 47 – 55 (29 – 34) 46 – 54 (29 – 34)
Half throttle 58 – 64 (36 – 40) 55 – 63 (34 – 39)
Throttle position
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Lock-up ON Lock-up OFF
Closed throttle 41 – 49 (25 – 30) 41 – 49 (25 – 30)
Half throttle 109 – 117 (68 – 73) 109 – 117 (68 – 73)
Engine models VQ37VHR V9X
Stall speed 2,475 – 2,775 rpm 2,117 – 2,417 rpm
Engine models VQ37VHR V9X
Dimension between end of converter housing and torque converter 25.0 mm (0.98 in) 32.83 mm (1.293 in)
PRECAUTIONS
TM-233
< PRECAUTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
FOR RUSSIA
FOR RUSSIA : Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and
"SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000006134085
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s)
with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly
causing serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
FOR RUSSIA : General Precautions INFOID:0000000006134086
• Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable
from the negative terminal before connecting or disconnecting
the A/T assembly harness connector. Because battery
voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned
OFF.
SEF289H
TM-234
< PRECAUTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
PRECAUTIONS
• Perform “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE” after performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS.
If the repair is completed DTC should not be displayed in the
“DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Always use the specified brand of ATF. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and
Lubricants".
• Use lint-free paper not cloth rags during work.
• Dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordinance,
etc. after replacing the ATF.
• Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside
of the transmission. It is important to prevent the internal parts from
becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
• Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
• Use lint-free paper or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere
with the operation of the transmission.
• Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly.
• All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or
reassembly.
• Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the A/T is disassembled.
• It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated.
• The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced.
Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent springs
and small parts from becoming scattered or lost.
• Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight.
• Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and
seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Never use grease.
• Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling.
• When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the ATF is drained. Old ATF will remain in torque converter
and ATF cooling system.
Always follow the procedures under “Changing” when changing ATF. Refer to TM-314, "Changing".
• Occasionally, the parking gear may be locked with the torque insufficiently released, when stopping the vehicle
by shifting the selector lever from “D” or “R” to “P” position with the brake pedal depressed.
In this case, the shock with a thud caused by the abrupt release of torque may occur when shifting the selector
lever from “P” position to other positions.
However, this symptom is not a malfunction witch results in the damage of parts.
EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA
EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA : Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR
BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000005476661
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and
“SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s)
SAT652J
PRECAUTIONS
TM-235
< PRECAUTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly
causing serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA : General Precautions INFOID:0000000005288326
• Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable
from the negative terminal before connecting or disconnecting
the A/T assembly harness connector. Because battery
voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned
OFF.
• Perform “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE” after performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS.
If the repair is completed DTC should not be displayed in the
“DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Always use the specified brand of ATF. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and
Lubricants".
• Use lint-free paper not cloth rags during work.
• Dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordinance,
etc. after replacing the ATF.
• Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside
of the transmission. It is important to prevent the internal parts from
becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
• Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
• Use lint-free paper or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere
with the operation of the transmission.
• Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly.
• All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or
reassembly.
• Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the A/T is disassembled.
• It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated.
• The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced.
Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent springs
and small parts from becoming scattered or lost.
• Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight.
• Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and
seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Never use grease.
• Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling.
• When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the ATF is drained. Old ATF will remain in torque converter
and ATF cooling system.
Always follow the procedures under “Changing” when changing ATF. Refer to TM-314, "Changing".
• Occasionally, the parking gear may be locked with the torque insufficiently released, when stopping the vehicle
by shifting the selector lever from “D” or “R” to “P” position with the brake pedal depressed.
In this case, the shock with a thud caused by the abrupt release of torque may occur when shifting the selector
lever from “P” position to other positions.
However, this symptom is not a malfunction witch results in the damage of parts.
SEF289H
SAT652J
TM-236
< PREPARATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000005288330
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Tool number
Tool name
Description
1. 315268E000*
O-ring
2. 310811EA5A*
Charging pipe
A/T fluid changing and adjustment
Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts
JSDIA1332ZZ
PBIC0190E
COMPONENT PARTS
TM-237
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000005318352
*1: Control valve with TCM is included in A/T assembly.
*2: Except for Russia
NOTE:
1. Selector lever position indicator 2. A/T shift selector assembly 3. A/T assembly connector
4. Control valve with TCM*1 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor 6. Manual mode indicator
7. Shift position indicator 8. A/T CHECK indicator lamp 9. G sensor*2
10. Paddle shifter (shift-down) 11. Paddle shifter (shift-up)
A. Center console B. A/T assembly C. Accelerator pedal
D. Combination meter E. Luggage floor RH F. Steering wheel
JSDIA0922ZZ
TM-238
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
COMPONENT PARTS
• The following components are included in A/T shift selector assembly (2).
- Manual mode select switch
- Manual mode position select switch
- Shift position switch
• The following components are included in control valve with TCM (4).
- TCM
- Input speed sensor 1, 2
- Output speed sensor
- A/T fluid temperature sensor
- Transmission range switch
- Direct clutch solenoid valve
- High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
- Input clutch solenoid valve
- Front brake solenoid valve
- Low brake solenoid valve
- Anti-interlock solenoid valve
- 2346 brake solenoid valve
- Line pressure solenoid valve
- Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Description INFOID:0000000004969763
Name Function
TCM TM-239, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM"
Transmission range switch TM-239, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range Switch"
Output speed sensor TM-239, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Output Speed Sensor"
Input speed sensor 1
TM-239, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Speed Sensor"
Input speed sensor 2
A/T fluid temperature sensor TM-239, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor"
Input clutch solenoid valve TM-239, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Clutch Solenoid Valve"
Front brake solenoid valve TM-239, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Front Brake Solenoid Valve"
Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-240, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Direct Clutch Solenoid Valve"
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve TM-240, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : High and Low Reverse Clutch Solenoid Valve"
Low brake solenoid valve TM-240, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Low Brake Solenoid Valve"
Anti-interlock solenoid valve TM-240, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Anti-interlock Solenoid Valve"
2346 brake solenoid valve TM-240, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : 2346 Brake Solenoid Valve"
Line pressure solenoid valve TM-240, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Solenoid Valve"
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-240, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve"
Accelerator pedal position sensor
TM-240, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor"
Throttle position sensor
Manual mode switch TM-240, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Switch"
Paddle shifter TM-241, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Paddle Shifter"
G sensor* TM-241, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : G Sensor"
A/T CHECK indicator lamp When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, the light comes on for 2 seconds.
Starter relay STR-6, "A/T : System Description"
Stop lamp switch TM-242, "A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Description"
ECM EC-553, "System Description"
BCM BCS-11, "System Description"
Unified meter and A/C amp. MWI-9, "METER SYSTEM : System Description"
COMPONENT PARTS
TM-239
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
*: Except for Russia
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM INFOID:0000000005318354
• The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The
TCM controls the A/T.
• The TCM is integral with the control valve assembly and built into the A/T assembly.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range Switch INFOID:0000000005318355
• The transmission range switch incorporates four contact switches. Each contact switch transmits an ON/
OFF signal to the TCM.
• The TCM judges a select lever position from a combination of ON/OFF signals transmitted from each contact
switch.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Output Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000005318356
The output speed sensor detects the revolution of the parking gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal
is transmitted to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000005318357
The input speed sensor detects input shaft rpm (revolutions per minute). It is located on the input side of the A/
T. Monitors revolution of sensor 1 and sensor 2 for non-standard conditions.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000005318358
The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and transmits a signal to the TCM.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Clutch Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005318359
• The Input clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmission
range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted
to the optimum position.
• The Input clutch solenoid valve controls the input clutch control valve in response to a signal transmitted
from the TCM.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Front Brake Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005318360
• The front brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmission
range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted to
the optimum position.
• The front brake solenoid valve controls the front brake control valve in response to a signal transmitted from
the TCM.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) BRC-24, "System Description"
Wheel sensor BRC-39, "Description"
Yaw rate/side G sensor BRC-66, "Description"
Name Function
Select lever position
Transmission range switch
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
P OFF OFF OFF OFF
R ON OFF OFF ON
N ON ON OFF OFF
D and M ON ON ON ON
TM-240
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
COMPONENT PARTS
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Direct Clutch Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005318361
• The direct clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmission
range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted
to the optimum position.
• The direct clutch solenoid valve controls the direct clutch control valve in response to a signal transmitted
from the TCM.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : High and Low Reverse Clutch Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005318362
• The high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted
from the transmission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will
then be shifted to the optimum position.
• The high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve controls the high and low reverse clutch control valve in
response to a signal transmitted from the TCM.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Low Brake Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005318363
• The low brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmission
range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted to
the optimum position.
• The low brake solenoid valve controls the low brake control valve in response to a signal transmitted from
the TCM.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Anti-interlock Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005318364
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve prevents the simultaneous activation of the input clutch and the low brake.
• The anti-interlock solenoid valve is an ON/OFF type solenoid valve.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : 2346 Brake Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005318365
• The 2346 brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmission
range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted
to the optimum position.
• The 2346 brake solenoid valve controls the 2346 brake control valve in response to a signal transmitted from
the TCM.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005318366
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the gear in D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, M2, M3, M4,
M5, M6 and M7 by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the output speed sensor and accelerator
pedal position sensor. Torque converter clutch piston operation will then be controlled.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005318367
The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in
response to a signal transmitted from the TCM.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor INFOID:0000000005318368
• The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly.
• The accelerator pedal position sensor detects the accelerator position.
• The accelerator pedal position sensor transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit
the voltage signal to the ECM. Then, the TCM receives accelerator pedal position signal from the ECM via
CAN communication.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Switch INFOID:0000000005318369
• The manual mode switch [mode select switch and position select switch (shift-up/shift-down)] is installed in
the A/T shift selector assembly.
• The mode select switch detects the position (the main shift gate side or manual shift gate side) of the selector
lever and transmits a manual mode signal or a non-manual mode signal to the unified meter and A/C
amp. Then, the TCM receives a manual mode signal or non-manual mode signal from the unified meter and
A/C amp.
COMPONENT PARTS
TM-241
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
• The position select switch (shift-up) detects that the selector lever is shifted to the shift-up side of the manual
shift gate and transmits a manual mode shift up signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. Then, the TCM
receives a manual mode shift up signal from the unified meter and A/C amp.
• The position select switch (shift-down) detects that the selector lever is shifted to the shift-down side of the
manual shift gate and transmits a manual mode shift down signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. Then,
the TCM receives a manual mode shift down signal from the unified meter and A/C amp.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Paddle Shifter INFOID:0000000005318370
When operating the paddle shifter (shift-up/shift-down), a paddle shifter shift up signal or paddle shifter shift
down signal is transmitted to the unified meter and A/C amp. Then, the TCM receives a paddle shifter shift-up
signal or a paddle shifter shift-down signal from the unified meter and A/C amp.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : G Sensor INFOID:0000000005318371
• The G sensor detects the inclination angle and acceleration of the vehicle.
• The G sensor converts the inclination angle and acceleration to the voltage signal and transmits it to ECM.
The TCM calculates the voltage signal that is received from ECM via CAN communication line and judges
the inclination angle and acceleration of the vehicle.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Selector Lever Position Indicator INFOID:0000000005318372
Indicates selector lever position.
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000005318373
1. Position pin 2. Shift lock unit 3. Shift lock solenoid
4. Slider A 5. Control device harness connector 6. Lock plate
7. Slider B 8. Shift lock relay*1 9. Stop lamp switch
10. Brake pedal 11. Shift lock cover *2
A. A/T shift selector assembly B. Engine room C. Brake pedal, upper
D. Center console
JSDIA0915ZZ
TM-242
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
COMPONENT PARTS
*1: For Russia with ICC
*2: Shift lock release button becomes operative by removing shift lock cover.
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Description INFOID:0000000005318374
*: For Russia with ICC
Component Function
Shift lock unit
Shift lock solenoid
Activated by the ignition switch and stop lamp signals, it holds the relative
positions of sliders A and B.
Lock plate Restricts position pin moving.
Shift lock release button Pressing the shift lock release button cancels the shift lock forcibly.
Position pin Links with selector knob button and restricts selector lever shift operation.
Stop lamp switch
For Russia with ICC
• When brake pedal is depressed, stop lamp switch turns ON.
• When stop lamp switch turns ON, power is supplied to shift lock relay.
Except for Russia without ICC
• When brake pedal is depressed, stop lamp switch turns ON.
• When stop lamp switch turns ON, power is supplied to shift lock unit.
Shift lock relay*
Current flow to stop lamp switch allows shift lock relay contact ON, and then
power is applied to shift lock unit.
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
TM-243
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
Cross-Sectional View INFOID:0000000004969788
1. Low brake 2. Reverse brake 3. Direct clutch
4. High and low reverse clutch 5. 2nd one-way clutch 6.*1 Rear carrier
7. Mid carrier 8. Input clutch 9.*2 Front sun gear
10.*3 Front carrier 11. Under drive carrier 12. 1st one-way clutch
13. Front brake 14. 2346 brake 15.*4 Input shaft
16. Torque converter 17. Oil pump 18.*2 Under drive sun gear
19.*3 Under drive internal gear 20.*4 Front internal gear 21. Mid sun gear
22.*1 Mid internal gear 23. Rear sun gear 24. Rear internal gear
25. High and low reverse clutch hub 26. Control valve with TCM 27. Parking gear
28. Adapter case 29. Output shaft
*1: 6 and 22 are one unit.
*2: 9 and 18 are one unit.
*3: 10 and 19 are one unit.
*4: 15 and 20 are one unit.
JSDIA0773ZZ
TM-244
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
System Diagram INFOID:0000000005318380
System Description INFOID:0000000005318381
DESCRIPTION
JSDIA0877GB
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
TM-245
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
With the use of 4 sets of planetary gears, A/T enables 7-speed transmission for forward and 1-speed transmission
for backward, depending on the combination of 3 sets of multiple-disc clutches, 4 sets of multiple-disc
brakes and 2 sets of one-way clutches.
CLUTCH AND BAND CHART
POWER TRANSMISSION
“N” Position
JSDIA1402GB
TM-246
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
Since the low brake is released, torque from the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft.
“P” Position
JSDIA0880GB
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
TM-247
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
• The same as for the “N” position, since the low brake is released, so torque from the input shaft drive is not P
transmitted to the output shaft.
• The parking pawl linked with the selector lever meshes with the parking gear and fastens the output shaft
mechanically.
“D1” and “DS1” Positions
JSDIA1277GB
TM-248
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
• The 1st one-way clutch regulates counterclockwise rotation of the under drive carrier.
• The 2nd one-way clutch regulates counterclockwise rotation of the rear sun gear.
• The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.
JSDIA0866GB
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
TM-249
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Front planetary gear
Under drive planetary gear
Rear planetary gear
Mid planetary gear
“M1” Position
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions
Deceleration from front internal
gear
Deceleration from front internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
Condition — Fixed Input/Output
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions
Acceleration from under drive internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
front carrier
Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from rear internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
under drive internal gear
Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from mid internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
rear carrier
TM-250
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
• The 1st one-way clutch and the front brake regulate counterclockwise rotation of the under drive carrier.
NOTE:
The front brake operates only while coasting.
• The 2nd one-way clutch and the high and low reverse clutch regulate counterclockwise rotation of the rear
sun gear.
NOTE:
The high and low reverse clutch operates only while coasting.
• The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake.
JSDIA0867GB
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
TM-251
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.
Front planetary gear
Under drive planetary gear
Rear planetary gear
Mid planetary gear
“D2” and “DS2” Positions
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions
Deceleration from front internal
gear
Deceleration from front internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
Condition — Fixed Input/Output
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions
Acceleration from under drive internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
front carrier
Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from rear internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
under drive internal gear
Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from mid internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
rear carrier
TM-252
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
• The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake.
• The 2nd one-way clutch regulates counterclockwise rotation of the rear sun gear.
• The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.
JSDIA0868GB
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
TM-253
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Front planetary gear
Under drive planetary gear
Rear planetary gear
Mid planetary gear
“M2” Position
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from front internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
Condition Fixed — Input/Output
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from under drive internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
front carrier
Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from rear internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
under drive internal gear
Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from mid internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
rear carrier
TM-254
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
• The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake.
• The 2nd one-way clutch and the high and low reverse clutch regulate counterclockwise rotation of the rear
sun gear.
NOTE:
The high and low reverse clutch operates only while coasting.
• The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.
JSDIA0869GB
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
TM-255
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Front planetary gear
Under drive planetary gear
Rear planetary gear
Mid planetary gear
“D3”, “DS3” and “M3” Positions
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from front internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
Condition Fixed — Input/Output
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from under drive internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
front carrier
Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from rear internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
under drive internal gear
Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions — Deceleration from mid internal gear
Same number of revolution as the
rear carrier
TM-256
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
• The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake.
• The direct clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the rear carrier.
• The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.
JSDIA0870GB
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
TM-257
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Front planetary gear
Under drive planetary gear
Rear planetary gear
Mid planetary gear
“D4”, “DS4” and “M4” Positions
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from front internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
Condition Fixed — Input/Output
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from under drive internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
front carrier
Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions
Same number of revolution as the
rear internal gear
Same number of revolution as the
rear internal gear
Same number of revolution as the
under drive internal gear
Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions — Deceleration from mid internal gear
Same number of revolution as the
rear carrier
TM-258
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
• The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake.
• The direct clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the rear carrier.
• The high and low reverse clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the mid sun gear.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.
JSDIA0871GB
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
TM-259
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Front planetary gear
Under drive planetary gear
Rear planetary gear
Mid planetary gear
“D5”, “DS5” and “M5” Positions
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from front internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
Condition Fixed — Input/Output
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from under drive internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
front carrier
Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions
Same number of revolution as the
rear internal gear
Same number of revolution as the
rear internal gear
Same number of revolution as the
under drive internal gear
Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions
Same number of revolution as the
mid internal gear
Same number of revolution as the
mid internal gear
Same number of revolution as the
rear carrier
TM-260
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
• The input clutch gets engaged and connects the mid internal gear with the rear carrier.
• The direct clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the rear carrier.
• The high and low reverse clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the mid sun gear.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.
JSDIA0872GB
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
TM-261
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Rear planetary gear
Mid planetary gear
“D6”, “DS6” and “M6” Positions
Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition — input/Output —
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions
Same number of revolution as the
rear carrier
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
Same number of revolution as the
rear carrier
Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions
Same number of revolution as the
mid internal gear
Same number of revolution as the
mid internal gear
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
TM-262
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
• The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake.
• The input clutch gets engaged and connects the mid internal gear with the rear carrier.
• The high and low reverse clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the mid sun gear.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.
JSDIA0873GB
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
TM-263
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Front planetary gear
Rear planetary gear
Mid planetary gear
“D7”, “DS7” and “M7” Positions
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions —
Deceleration from front internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition — Input/Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions Acceleration from rear carrier
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
Same number of revolution as the
front carrier
Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions Acceleration from mid internal gear Acceleration from mid internal gear
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
TM-264
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
• The under drive carrier is fixed by the front brake.
• The input clutch gets engaged and connects the mid internal gear with the rear carrier.
• The high and low reverse clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the mid sun gear.
• Each planetary gear enters state described below.
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
TM-265
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Front planetary gear
Under drive planetary gear
Rear planetary gear
Mid planetary gear
“R” Position
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions
Deceleration from front internal
gear
Deceleration from front internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
Condition — Fixed Input/Output
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions
Acceleration from under drive internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
front carrier
Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition — Input/Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions Acceleration from rear carrier
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
Same number of revolution as the
under drive internal gear
Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions Acceleration from mid internal gear Acceleration from mid internal gear
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
TM-266
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
• The 1st one-way clutch and the front brake regulate counterclockwise rotation of the under drive carrier.
NOTE:
The front brake operates at the fixed speed or less.
• The rear carrier and the mid internal gear are fixed by the reverse brake.
• The mid sun gear rotates at the same speed as the rear sun gear by operation of the 2nd one-way clutch
and the high and low reverse clutch.
NOTE:
The high and low reverse clutch operates at the fixed speed or less.
JSDIA0875GB
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
TM-267
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.
Front planetary gear
Under drive planetary gear
Rear planetary gear
Mid planetary gear
Component Description INFOID:0000000005318382
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions
Deceleration from front internal
gear
Deceleration from front internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
input shaft
Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
Condition — Fixed Input/Output
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions
Acceleration from under drive internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
front carrier
Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition Output Fixed Input
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution
Number of revolutions
Acceleration from rear internal
gear
Same number of revolution as the
under drive internal gear
Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition Input Output Fixed
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Counterclockwise revolution —
Number of revolutions
Same number of revolution as the
rear sun gear
Deceleration from mid sun gear —
Name of the Part (Abbreviation) Function
Front brake (FR/B) Fastens the under drive carrier.
Input clutch (I/C) Connects the input shaft, the mid internal gear and the rear carrier.
Direct clutch (D/C) Connects the rear carrier and the rear sun gear.
High and low reverse clutch (HLR/C) Connects the rear sun gear and the mid sun gear.
Reverse brake (R/B) Fastens the rear carrier.
Low brake (L/B) Fastens the mid sun gear.
2346 brake (2346/B) Fastens the under drive sun gear.
1st one-way clutch (1st OWC)
Allows the under drive carrier to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it for reverse
rotation.
2nd one-way clutch (2nd OWC)
Allows the rear sun gear to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it for reverse rotation.
Torque converter Amplifies driving force the engine, and transmits it to transmission input shaft.
Oil pump
Driven by the engine, oil pump supplies oil to torque converter, control valve assembly, and
each lubricating system.
TM-268
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : System Diagram INFOID:0000000005318383
Except for Russia
For Russia
JSDIA1344GB
JSDIA1537GB
SYSTEM
TM-269
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000005318384
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
*: Except for Russia
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• The A/T senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors or signals. It always controls the optimum
shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
• Receive input signals transmitted from various switches and sensors.
• Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, etc.
• Transmit required output signals to the respective solenoids.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000005321617
TCM has the electrical fail-safe mode. The mode is divided into a maximum of 3 phases (1st fail-safe, 2nd failsafe
and final fail-safe) and functions so that the operation can be continued even if the signal circuit of the
main electronically controlled input/output parts is damaged.
Even if the electronic circuit is normal, the fail-safe mode may start under special conditions (such as when the
brake pedal is depressed suddenly from a hard wheel spin status to stop the rotation of wheels). In this case,
turn the ignition switch OFF and back to ON after 5 seconds to resume the normal shift pattern.
Consequently, the customer's vehicle may already return to the normal condition. Refer to TM-309, "Diagnosis
Flow".
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
Sensor (or signal)
TCM function
Actuator
Transmission range switch
Accelerator pedal position signal
Closed throttle position signal
Wide open throttle position signal
Engine speed signal
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Output speed sensor
Vehicle speed signal
Manual mode switch signal
Stop lamp switch signal
Side G sensor signal
Input speed sensor 1, 2
G sensor signal*
Line pressure control (TM-273)
Shift change control (TM-275)
Shift pattern control (TM-279)
Lock-up control (TM-281)
Fail-safe control (TM-298)
Self-diagnosis (TM-285)
CONSULT-III communication line (TM-
285)
CAN communication line (TM-320)
Input clutch solenoid valve
Direct clutch solenoid valve
Front brake solenoid valve
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
Low brake solenoid valve
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
Line pressure solenoid valve
Anti-interlock solenoid valve
2346 brake solenoid valve
A/T CHECK indicator lamp
Back-up lamp relay
Starter relay
1st Fail-Safe
The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
2nd Fail-Safe
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunctioning
parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
Final Fail-Safe
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.
TM-270
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
SYSTEM
DTC
Vehicle
condition
Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe
P0615 — Starter is disabled — Starter is disabled
P0705 —
• Fixed in the “D” position (The
shifting can be performed)
• 30 km/h (19MPH) or less
• Lock-up is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears
of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Shift position indicator is
switched OFF
• Starter relay is switched OFF
(starter is disabled)
• Back-up lamp is OFF
• Large shift shock
• Fixed in the “D” position (The
shifting can be performed)
• 30 km/h (19 MPH) or less
• Lock-up is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears
of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Shift position indicator is
switched OFF
• Starter relay is switched OFF
(starter is disabled)
• Back-up lamp is OFF
• Large shift shock
P0710
Between
the gears of
1 - 2 - 3
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
Between • Manual mode is prohibited
the gears of
4 - 5 - 6 - 7
• Fix the gear while driving
• Manual mode is prohibited
P0717
Between
the gears of
1 - 2 - 3
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
Between • Manual mode is prohibited
the gears of
4 - 5 - 6 - 7
• Fix the gear while driving
• Manual mode is prohibited
P0720
Between
the gears of
1 - 2 - 3
• Only downshift can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• A vehicle speed signal from the
unified meter and A/C amp. is regarded
as an effective signal
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
Between
the gears of
4 - 5 - 6 - 7
• Fix the gear at driving
• Manual mode is prohibited
• A vehicle speed signal from the
unified meter and A/C amp. is regarded
as an effective signal
P0729
P0731
P0732
P0733
P0734
P0735
P1734
Neutral
malfunction
between
the gears of
1 - 2 - 3 and
7
• Locks in 4GR
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Neutral
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
Other than
the above
• Driving with the gear ratio between
1GR and 2GR
• Driving with the gear ratio between
2GR and 3GR
• Locks in 3GR
• Locks in 4GR
• Fix the gear while driving
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Neutral
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 2 - 3 - 4 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 3 - 4 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
SYSTEM
TM-271
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P0730 —
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Neutral
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
P0740 —
• Lock-up is prohibited
• Slip lock-up is prohibited
• Lock-up is prohibited
• Slip lock-up is prohibited
P0744 —
• Lock-up is prohibited
• Slip lock-up is prohibited
• Lock-up is prohibited
• Slip lock-up is prohibited
P0750
P0775
P0795
P2713
P2722
P2731
P2807
• Locks in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR,
6GR or 7GR
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 3 - 4 - 5 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
P0780 —
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Neutral
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
P1585 — Idle neutral control is prohibited — Idle neutral control is prohibited
P1705 —
• Downshift when accelerator pedal
is depressed is prohibited
• Upshift when accelerator pedal
is released is prohibited
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Downshift when accelerator pedal
is depressed is prohibited
• Upshift when accelerator pedal
is released is prohibited
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Downshift when accelerator pedal
is depressed is prohibited
• Upshift when accelerator pedal
is released is prohibited
• Manual mode is prohibited
P1730 —
• Neutral
• Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears
of 2 - 3 - 4 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 3 - 4 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
P1815
Paddle
switch malfunction
Only the paddle switch is prohibited — Only the paddle switch is prohibited
Gate switch
malfunction
Only the gate switch is prohibited — Only the gate switch is prohibited
Malfunction
of both
switches
Manual mode is prohibited — Manual mode is prohibited
U0300
U1000
Between
the gears of
1 - 2 - 3
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
— • The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Line pressure is set to the maximum
hydraulic pressure
• Manual mode is prohibited
Between
the gears of
4 - 5 - 6 - 7
• Fix the gear at driving
• Manual mode is prohibited
P0720
and
P1721
— Locks in 5GR — Locks in 5GR
DTC
Vehicle
condition
Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe
TM-272
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
SYSTEM
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Protection Control INFOID:0000000005321618
The TCM becomes the protection control status temporarily to protect the safety when the safety of TCM and
transmission is lost. It automatically returns to the normal status if the safety is secured.
The TCM has the following protection control.
REVERSE INHIBIT CONTROL
Intercepts the torque transmission and shift to the neutral status if the selector lever is shifted to “R” position
while the vehicle moves forward at the vehicle speed 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more.
1ST ENGINE BRAKE PROTECTION CONTROL
Controls the engine brake so as not to make effective by turning the front brake solenoid output to OFF when
each solenoid becomes the electricity pattern of 1st engine brake during driving at the vehicle speed 25 km/h
or more in any positions other than “R” position and 1GR.
TCM HIGH TEMPERATURE PROTECTION CONTROL
Limit the accelerator opening and forcibly control the vehicle to the low torque driving when the electronic substrate
in TCM reaches the high temperature.
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL
Malfunction detection condition Vehicle speed: 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
Control at malfunction Neutral
Normal return condition
• Vehicle speed: 8 km/h (5 MPH) or less
and
• Engine speed: 2,200 rpm or less
Vehicle behavior
• The torque transmission cannot be performed
• There is a shock just before a vehicle stop
Malfunction detection condition
• Select lever and gear: Any position other than “R” position and 1GR
and
• Vehicle speed: More than 25 km/h (16 MPH)
Control at malfunction Front brake solenoid output signal; OFF
Normal return condition Other than detection condition of malfunction
Vehicle behavior Does not exist
Malfunction detection condition
TCM electronic substrate temperature
• 145°C (293°F) and 120 seconds
or
• 150°C (302°F)
Control at malfunction Accelerator opening: 0.5/8 or less
Normal return condition
• TCM electronic substrate temperature: Less than 140°C (284°F)
and
• Vehicle speed: 5 km/h (3 MPH) or less
Vehicle behavior Accelerator opening: output torque of approximately 0.5/8
SYSTEM
TM-273
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL : System Diagram INFOID:0000000005318387
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000005318388
• When an engine and A/T integrated control signal (engine torque) equivalent to the engine drive force is
transmitted from the ECM to the TCM, the TCM controls the line pressure solenoid valve.
This line pressure solenoid controls the pressure regulator valve as the signal pressure and adjusts the pressure
of the operating oil discharged from the oil pump to the line pressure most appropriate to the driving
state.
• The TCM has stored in memory a number of patterns for the optimum line pressure characteristic for the
driving state.
• In order to obtain the most appropriate line pressure characteristic to meet the current driving state, the TCM
controls the line pressure solenoid current value and thus controls the line pressure.
Normal Control
Each clutch is adjusted to the necessary pressure to match the
engine drive force.
Back-up Control (Engine Brake)
When the select operation is performed during driving and the A/T is
shifted down, the line pressure is set according to the vehicle speed.
During Shift Change
JSDIA1345GB
PCIA0008E
PCIA0009E
TM-274
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
SYSTEM
The necessary and adequate line pressure for shift change is set.
For this reason, line pressure pattern setting corresponds to engine
torque and gearshift selection. Also, line pressure characteristic corresponds
to engine speed, during engine brake operation.
At Low Fluid Temperature
When the A/T fluid temperature drops below the prescribed temperature,
in order to speed up the action of each friction element, the line
pressure is set higher than the normal line pressure characteristic.
SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL
PCIA0010E
PCIA0011E
SYSTEM
TM-275
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL : System Diagram INFOID:0000000005318389
SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000005318390
Input/Output Signal Chart
Sensor Signal TCM function Actuator
Input speed sensor 1, 2 Input speed
Shift change control
• High and low reverse
clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid
valve
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Torque converter clutch solenoid
valve
• Line pressure solenoid
valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid
valve
Output speed sensor Vehicle speed
A/T fluid temperature sensor ATF temperature
ECM
Engine speed signal*
Accelerator pedal position signal*
Closed throttle position signal*
Engine and A/T integrated control signal
(Engine torque)*
BCM Stop lamp switch signal*
JSDIA1394GB
TM-276
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
SYSTEM
*: This signal is transmitted via communication line.
The clutch pressure control solenoid is controlled by the signals from the switches and sensors. Thus, the
clutch pressure is adjusted to be appropriate to the engine load state and vehicle driving state. It becomes
possible to finely control the clutch hydraulic pressure with high precision and a smoother shift change characteristic
is attained.
The clutch is controlled with the optimum timing and oil pressure by the engine speed, engine torque information,
etc.
Shift Change System Diagram
*1: Full phase real-time feedback control monitors movement of gear ratio at gear change, and controls oil
pressure in real-time to achieve the best gear ratio.
BLIPPING CONTROL
This system makes transmission clutch engage readily by controlling (synchronizing) engine revolution
according to the (calculation of) engine revolution after shifting down.
• “BLIPPING CONTROL” functions.
- When downshifting by accelerator pedal depression.
- When downshifting by the manual mode.
PCIA0012E
PCIA0013E
JSDIA0826GB
SYSTEM
TM-277
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
• TCM selects “BLIPPING CONTROL” or “NORMAL SHIFT CONTROL” according to the gear position, the
selector lever position, the engine torque and the speed when accelerating by pedal depression.
• Engine speed control demand signal is transmitted from TCM to ECM under “BLIPPING CONTROL”.
• ECM synchronizes the engine speed according to the engine speed control demand signal.
Downshifting by accelerator pedal depression
Downshifting by the manual mode
IDLE NEUTRAL CONTROL (EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA)
Input/Output Signal Chart
Sensor
Signal
Each sensor, switch and TCM function Actuator
control unit ⇒ TCM
TCM ⇒ ECM ECM ⇒ TCM
JSDIA0815GB
JSDIA0817GB
TM-278
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
SYSTEM
*: This signal is transmitted via communication line.
The TCM activates low brake solenoid valve and controls the low brake oil pressure to the low pressure level
if the driver does not intend to start the vehicle while the vehicle is being stopped in the “D” or “DS” position.
Therefore, the low brake is in the release (slip) status and the power transmission route of A/T is the same status
as the “N” position. This can decrease the engine load and improves the fuel economy because the drive
force of engine is not transmitted to the output shaft of A/T.
NOTE:
During the cold engine starting, the idle speed is increased to activate the three way catalyst.
Idle Neutral Control Start Condition
Idle neutral control starts when all of the following conditions are satisfied. However, the control ends when
any one of the following conditions becomes insufficient during idle neutral control.
NOTE:
The idle neutral control is terminated or prohibited when the TCM and ECM detect that the vehicle is in any of
the conditions as per the following.
• Engine cooling water temperature and A/T fluid temperature are below or above a prescribed temperature.
• A/T malfunction occurs.
• DTC is detected.
• Fail-safe mode activates.
• Idle neutral control is performed continuously for a certain period of time.
Idle Neutral Control Resume Condition
Idle neutral control can be resumed when its start condition is fulfilled after any of the following operations is
performed (unless a malfunction occurs in the vehicle).
• After driving at more than a prescribed speed.
• After shifting the selector lever to any other position than “D” or “DS” position, and then shifting to “D” or “DS”
position again.
• When idle neutral control start conditions are fulfilled for a certain period of time.
SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL
Input speed sensor 1, 2 Input speed
N idle instruction
signal (Standby signal)*
N idle instruction
signal (Start signal)*
Idle neutral control
Low brake solenoid
valve
Output speed sensor Output shaft revolution
A/T fluid temperature
sensor
ATF temperature
Transmission range
switch
Selector lever position
ECM
Engine speed signal*
Accelerator pedal position
signal*
Throttle position signal*
G sensor signal*
BCM Stop lamp switch signal*
ABS actuator electric
unit (control unit)
Pressure sensor signal*
Unified meter and A/C
amp.
Vehicle speed signal*
Driving location : Level road and gentle slope
Selector lever position : “D” and “DS” position
Vehicle speed : 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.0 / 8
Brake pedal : Depress
Engine speed : Idle speed
SYSTEM
TM-279
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL : System Diagram INFOID:0000000005318391
SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000005318392
It automatically selects the shift pattern (such as road environment and driving style) suitable for the various
situations so as to allow the vehicle to be driven efficiently and smoothly.
ASC (ADAPTIVE SHIFT CONTROL)
Input/Output Signal Chart
JSDIA1426GB
Sensor Signal TCM function Actuator
Input speed sensor 1, 2 Input speed
ASC (Adaptive shift
control)
• High and low reverse
clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid
valve
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Torque converter clutch solenoid
valve
• Line pressure solenoid
valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid
valve
Output speed sensor Vehicle speed
A/T fluid temperature sensor ATF temperature
ECM
Engine speed signal*
Accelerator pedal position signal*
Closed throttle position signal*
Engine and A/T integrated control signal
(engine torque)*
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)
Side G sensor signal*
BCM Stop lamp switch signal*
TM-280
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
SYSTEM
*: This signal is transmitted via CAN communication line.
• When driving on an up/down slope
ASC judges up/down slope according to engine torque data transmitted from the ECM and vehicle speed.
Fixing at 4GR, 5GR or 6GR on an up-slope prevents shift hunting and controls the vehicle to gain optimum
driving force. On a down-slope, automatic shift-down to 4GR, 5GR or 6GR controls to gain optimum engine
brake.
• When driving on a curve
TCM receives the side G sensor signal from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). It locks to 4GR,
5GR or 6GR position in moderate cornering or to 3GR position in sharp cornering based on this signal. This
prevents any upshift and kickdown during cornering, maintaining smooth vehicle travel.
DS Mode
• Changes to the shift schedule that mainly utilizes the high engine speed zone when ASC is active.
• DS mode can be switched according to the following method.
- When the selector lever is in the “D” position, shifting the selector lever to manual shift gate enables switching
to DS mode.
- When in DS mode, shifting the selector lever to the main shift gate enables to cancel DS mode.
- After switching to manual mode with paddle shifter, switching to DS mode can not be enabled even when the
selector lever is shifted to the manual shift gate.
MANUAL MODE
Input/Output Signal Chart
*: This signal is transmitted via CAN communication line.
JSDIA1362GB
Sensor Signal TCM function Actuator
Output speed sensor Vehicle speed
Manual mode
• High and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Torque converter clutch solenoid
valve
• Line pressure solenoid valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
A/T fluid temperature sensor ATF temperature
ECM
Engine speed signal*
Accelerator pedal position signal*
Unified meter and A/C amp.
Manual mode signal*
Not manual mode signal*
Manual mode shift up signal*
Manual mode shift down signal*
Paddle shifter shift up signal*
Paddle shifter shift down signal*
Manual mode shift refusal signal*
SYSTEM
TM-281
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
• The TCM receives the manual mode signal, not manual mode signal, manual mode shift up signal, manual
mode shift down signal, paddle shifter shift up signal and paddle shifter shift down signal from unified meter
and A/C amp. via CAN communication line. The TCM shifts shift pattern control to the manual mode based
on these signals, and then shifts the A/T by operating each solenoid valve according to the shift operation of
the driver.
• The TCM prohibits the manual mode while being in fail-safe mode due to an A/T malfunction, etc. Refer to
TM-298, "Fail-Safe".
• The TCM transmits the manual mode shift refusal signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. if the TCM
refuses the transmission from the driving status of vehicle when the selector lever or paddle shifter shifts to
“UP (+ side)” or “DOWN (− side)” side. The unified meter and A/C amp. blinks shift indicator on the combination
meter and sounds the buzzer to indicate the driver that the shifting is not performed when receiving this
signal. However, the TCM does not transmit the manual mode shift refusal signal in the conditions as per the
following.
- When the selector lever or the paddle shifter shifts to “DOWN (− side)” side while driving in 1GR.
- When the selector lever or the paddle shifter shifts to “UP (+ side)” side while driving in 7GR.
LOCK-UP CONTROL
LOCK-UP CONTROL : System Diagram INFOID:0000000005318393
LOCK-UP CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000005318394
• The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to eliminate torque converter slip to
increase power transmission efficiency.
• Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low.
• The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the torque converter clutch solenoid
valve, which is controlled by a signal from TCM, and the torque converter clutch control valve engages or
releases the torque converter clutch piston.
JSDIA1350GB
JSDIA0847GB
TM-282
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
SYSTEM
Lock-up Operation Condition Table
Lock-up released
• In the lock-up released state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the unlocked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid and the lock-up apply pressure is drained.
in this way, the torque converter clutch piston is not coupled.
Lock-up Applied
• In the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the locked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid and lock-up apply pressure is generated.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is pressed and coupled.
Smooth Lock-up Control
When shifting from the lock-up released state to the lock-up applied state, the current output to the torque converter
clutch solenoid is controlled with the TCM. In this way, when shifting to the lock-up applied state, the
torque converter clutch is temporarily set to the half-clutched state to reduce the shock.
Half-clutched State
• The current output from the TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid is varied to steadily increase the
torque converter clutch solenoid pressure.
In this way, the lock-up apply pressure gradually rises and while the torque converter clutch piston is put into
half-clutched states, the torque converter clutch piston operating pressure is increased and the coupling is
completed smoothly.
Slip Lock-up Control
• In the slip region, the torque converter clutch solenoid current is controlled with the TCM to put it into the
half-clutched state. This absorbs the engine torque fluctuation and lock-up operates from low speed.
This raises the fuel efficiency for 2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR, 6GR and 7GR.
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000005318395
• Shift lock prevents an unintentional start of the vehicle that may be caused by an incorrect operation while
selector lever is in the “P” position.
• Selector lever can be shifted from the “P” position to another position when the following conditions are satisfied.
- Ignition switch ON
- Stop lamp switch is ON (brake pedal is depressed)
- Selector lever knob button is pressed
SHIFT LOCK OPERATION AT “P” POSITION
When Brake Pedal Is Not Depressed (No Shift Operation Allowed)
The shift lock solenoid (A) inside the shift lock unit is not energized if
the brake pedal is not depressed while the ignition switch is ON.
The lock plate (B) lowers according to the downward movement of
the position pin (C) when the selector button (D) is pressed, and
presses only slider B (E) into the shift lock unit. Slider A (F) located
below the lock plate prevents the downward movement of the lock
plate with the spring force. The selector lever cannot be shifted from
the “P” position for this reason.
However, slider A is forcibly pressed into the shift lock unit, allowing
the selector lever to shift if the shift lock release button is pressed.
When Brake Pedal Is Depressed (Shift Operation Allowed)
Selector lever “D” position “M” position
Gear position 7 6 5 4 3 2 7 6 5 4 3 2
Lock-up × – – – – – × × × × × ×
Slip lock-up × × × × × × × × × × × ×
JSDIA0119ZZ
SYSTEM
TM-283
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
The shift lock solenoid (A) inside the shift lock unit is energized and
the relative positions of sliders A (B) and B (C) are maintained when
the brake pedal is depressed while the ignition switch is ON.
The lock plate (D) lowers according to the downward movement of
the position pin (E), thrusting away sliders A and B, when the selector
button (F) is pressed.
The position pin lowers to the position that allows shift operation for
this reason. As a result, the selector lever can be shifted out of the P
position.
OPERATION AT OTHER THAN “P” POSITION
The shift lock function will not operate at any position other than “P”
because the lock plate (A) is only set for the “P” position. Accordingly,
the selector lever can be shifted to any position regardless of
the brake operation.
The position pin (B) enters the “P” position thrusting away the lock
plate when the selector lever is shifted to the “P” position. Then, the
shift mechanism is locked when the selector button (C) is released.
“P” POSITION RETAINING MECHANISM (IGNITION SWITCH LOCK)
When ignition switch is not in the ON position, power is not applied to the shift lock solenoid in the shift lock
unit. This causes shift lock state, and then “P” position is retained.
When an actuating system in the shift lock unit has a malfunction, selector lever is unable to operate from the
“P” position even when pressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch ON. However, when pressing the shift
lock release button, slider A is forcibly pressed into the shift lock unit. This allows shift lock to be released and
selector lever enables the select operation from the “P” position.
CAUTION:
Never use the shift lock release button except when the select lever is inoperative even when pressing
the brake pedal with the ignition switch ON.
JSDIA0120ZZ
JSDIA0121ZZ
TM-284
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000005321442
The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems.
The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD) performed by the TCM in combination with
the ECM. A malfunction is indicated by the MI (malfunction indicator) and is stored as a DTC in the ECM memory
and in the TCM memory.
The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the TCM. A malfunction history is stored in the
TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD self-diagnostic items. For details, refer to TM-302,
"DTC Index".
OBD FUNCTION
The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD) functions for the A/T system.
One function is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is
sent to the ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part.
The other function is to indicate a diagnostic result by means of the MI (malfunction indicator) on the instrument
panel. Sensors, switches and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.
The MI automatically illuminates in “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” when a malfunction is sensed in relation
to A/T system parts. For details, refer to EC-670, "Diagnosis Description".
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
TM-285
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION) INFOID:0000000005318475
CONSULT-III APPLICATION ITEMS
*: Although “Function Test” and “Special Function” are selectable, do not use its.
WORK SUPPORT
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Refer to TM-302, "DTC Index".
IGN Counter
The IGN counter is indicated in Freeze frame data (FFD) and indicates the number of times that the ignition
switch is turned ON after returning to the normal state from DTC.
• CAN malfunction
- The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now.
- The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition
switch OFF → ON.
- The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39.
• Other than CAN malfunction
- The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now.
- The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...254 → 255 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition
switch OFF → ON.
- The number is fixed to255 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 255.
DATA MONITOR
X: Standard, —: Not applicable, : Option
Diagnostic test mode Function
Work Support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately.
Self Diagnostic Results Retrieve DTC from ECU and display diagnostic items.
Data Monitor Monitor the input/output signal of the control unit in real time.
CAN Diagnosis This mode displays a network diagnosis result about CAN by a diagram.
CAN Diagnostic Support
Monitor
It monitors the starts of CAN communication.
DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
ECU Identification Display the ECU identification number (part number etc.) of the selected system.
Function Test*
This mode can show results of self-diagnosis of ECU with either “OK” or “NG”. For engine, more practical
tests regarding sensors/switches and/or actuators are available.
Special Function* Other results or histories, etc. that are recorded in ECU are displayed.
Item name Description
G SENSOR CALIBRATION Calibrates G sensor.
Monitored item (Unit)
Monitor Item Selection
ECU IN- Remarks
PUT SIGNALS
MAIN SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM
ITEM
VHCL/S SE-A/T (km/h or mph) X X
Displays the vehicle speed calculated by the
TCM from the output shaft revolution.
ESTM VSP SIG (km/h or mph) X —
Displays the vehicle speed signal received via
CAN communication.
OUTPUT REV (rpm) X X
Displays the output speed calculated from the
pulse signal of output speed sensor.
TM-286
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
INPUT SPEED (rpm) X X
Displays the input speed calculated from front
sun gear revolution and front carrier revolution.
F SUN GR REV (rpm) — —
Displays the front sun gear revolution calculated
from the pulse signal of input speed sensor
1.
F CARR GR REV (rpm) — —
Displays the front carrier gear revolution calculated
from the pulse signal of input speed sensor
2.
ENGINE SPEED (rpm) X X
Displays the engine speed received via CAN
communication.
TC SLIP SPEED (rpm) — X
Displays the revolution difference between input
speed and engine speed.
ACCELE POSI (0.0/8) X —
Displays the accelerator position estimated value
received via CAN communication.
THROTTLE POSI (0.0/8) X X
Displays the throttle position received via CAN
communication.
ATF TEMP 1 (°C or °F) X X
Displays the ATF temperature of oil pan calculated
from the signal voltage of A/T fluid temperature
sensor.
ATF TEMP 2 (°C or °F) X X
Displays the ATF temperature estimated value
of torque converter outlet calculated from the
signal voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor.
ATF TEMP SE 1 (V) — —
Displays the signal voltage of A/T fluid temperature
sensor.
BATTERY VOLT (V) X — Displays the power supply voltage of TCM.
LINE PRES SOL (A) — X
Displays the command current from TCM to the
line pressure solenoid.
TCC SOLENOID (A) — X
Displays the command current from TCM to the
torque converter clutch solenoid.
L/B SOLENOID (A) — X
Displays the command current from TCM to the
low brake solenoid.
FR/B SOLENOID (A) — X
Displays the command current from TCM to the
front brake solenoid.
HLR/C SOL (A) — X
Displays the command current from TCM to the
high and low reverse clutch solenoid.
I/C SOLENOID (A) — X
Displays the command current from TCM to the
input clutch solenoid.
D/C SOLENOID (A) — X
Displays the command current from TCM to the
direct clutch solenoid.
2346/B SOL (A) — X
Displays the command current from TCM to the
2346 brake solenoid.
L/P SOL MON (A) — —
Monitors the command current from TCM to the
line pressure solenoid, and displays the monitor
value.
TCC SOL MON (A) — —
Monitors the command current from TCM to the
torque converter clutch solenoid, and displays
the monitor value.
L/B SOL MON (A) — —
Monitors the command current from TCM to the
low brake solenoid, and displays the monitor
value.
Monitored item (Unit)
Monitor Item Selection
ECU IN- Remarks
PUT SIGNALS
MAIN SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM
ITEM
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
TM-287
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
FR/B SOL MON (A) — —
Monitors the command current from TCM to the
front brake solenoid, and displays the monitor
value.
HLR/C SOL MON (A) — —
Monitors the command current from TCM to the
high and low reverse clutch solenoid, and displays
the monitor value.
I/C SOL MON (A) — —
Monitors the command current from TCM to the
input clutch solenoid, and displays the monitor
value.
D/C SOL MON (A) — —
Monitors the command current from TCM to the
direct clutch solenoid, and displays the monitor
value.
2346/B SOL MON (A) — —
Monitors the command current from TCM to the
2346 brake solenoid, and displays the monitor
value.
GEAR RATIO — X
Displays the gear ratio calculated from input
speed and output speed.
ENGINE TORQUE (Nm) — —
Displays the engine torque estimated value received
via CAN communication.
ENG TORQUE D (Nm) — —
Displays the engine torque estimated value reflected
the requested torque of each control
unit received via CAN communication.
INPUT TRQ S (Nm) — —
Displays the input torque using for the oil pressure
calculation process of shift change control.
INPUT TRQ L/P (Nm) — —
Displays the input torque using for the oil pressure
calculation process of line pressure control.
TRGT PRES L/P (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
Displays the target oil pressure value of torque
converter clutch solenoid valve calculated by
the oil pressure calculation process of lock-up
control.
TRGT PRES TCC (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
Displays the target oil pressure value of torque
converter clutch solenoid valve calculated by
the oil pressure calculation process of shift
change control.
TRGT PRES L/B (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
Displays the target oil pressure value of low
brake solenoid valve calculated by the oil pressure
calculation process of shift change control.
TRGT PRE FR/B (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
Displays the target oil pressure value of front
brake solenoid valve calculated by the oil pressure
calculation process of shift change control.
TRG PRE HLR/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
Displays the target oil pressure value of high
and low reverse clutch solenoid valve calculated
by the oil pressure calculation process of
shift change control.
TRGT PRES I/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
Displays the target oil pressure value of input
clutch solenoid valve calculated by the oil pressure
calculation process of shift change control.
Monitored item (Unit)
Monitor Item Selection
ECU IN- Remarks
PUT SIGNALS
MAIN SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM
ITEM
TM-288
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
TRGT PRES D/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
Displays the target oil pressure value of direct
clutch solenoid valve calculated by the oil pressure
calculation process of shift change control.
TRG PRE 2346/B (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
Displays the target oil pressure value of 2346
brake solenoid valve calculated by the oil pressure
calculation process of shift change control.
SHIFT PATTERN — —
Displays the gear change data using the shift
pattern control.
VEHICLE SPEED (km/h or mph) — —
Displays the vehicle speed for control using the
control of TCM.
G SEN SLOPE* (%) X —
Displays the inclination angle calculated by the
G sensor signal received via CAN communication.
RANGE SW 4 (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the operation status of transmission
range switch 4.
RANGE SW 3 (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the operation status of transmission
range switch 3.
RANGE SW 2 (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the operation status of transmission
range switch 2.
RANGE SW 1 (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the operation status of transmission
range switch 1.
SFT DWN ST SW (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the operation status of paddle shifter
(down switch).
SFT UP ST SW (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the operation status of paddle shifter
(up switch).
DOWN SW LEVER (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the operation status of selector lever
(down switch).
UP SW LEVER (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the operation status of selector lever
(up switch).
NON M-MODE SW (ON/OFF) X —
Displays whether the selector lever is in any
position other than manual shift gate position.
MANU MODE SW (ON/OFF) X —
Displays whether the selector lever is in the
manual shift gate position.
TOW MODE SW (ON/OFF) — —
• Displays the reception status of tow mode
signal received via CAN communication.
• Not mounted but displayed.
DS RANGE (ON/OFF) — — Displays whether it is the DS mode.
1 POSITION SW (ON/OFF) X —
• Displays the reception status of 1 position
switch signal received via CAN communication.
• Not mounted but displayed.
OD CONT SW (ON/OFF) X —
• Displays the reception status of overdrive
control switch signal received via CAN communication.
• Not mounted but displayed.
BRAKESW (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the reception status of stop lamp
switch signal received via CAN communication.
Monitored item (Unit)
Monitor Item Selection
ECU IN- Remarks
PUT SIGNALS
MAIN SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM
ITEM
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
TM-289
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
POWERSHIFT SW (ON/OFF) X —
• Displays the reception status of POWER
mode signal received via CAN communication.
• Not mounted but displayed.
ASCD-OD CUT (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the reception status of ASCD OD cancel
request signal received via CAN communication.
ASCD-CRUISE (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the reception status of ASCD operation
signal received via CAN communication.
ABS SIGNAL (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the reception status of ABS operation
signal received via CAN communication.
TCS GR/P KEEP (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the reception status of TCS gear keep
request signal received via CAN communication.
TCS SIGNAL 2 (ON/OFF) X —
Displays whether the reception value of A/T
shift schedule change demand signal received
via CAN communication is “cold”.
TCS SIGNAL 1 (ON/OFF) X —
Displays whether the reception value of A/T
shift schedule change demand signal received
via CAN communication is “warm”.
LOW/B PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — —
In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the
identified malfunction point judged by TCM is
the related parts of low brake.
HC/IC/FRB PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — —
In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the
identified malfunction point judged by TCM is
the related parts of high and low reversed
clutch, input clutch or front brake.
IC/FRB PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — —
In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the
identified malfunction point judged by TCM is
the related parts of input clutch or front brake.
HLR/C PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — —
In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the
identified malfunction point judged by TCM is
the related parts of high and low reversed
clutch.
W/O THL POS (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the kickdown condition signal status
received via CAN communication.
CLSD THL POS (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the idling status signal status received
via CAN communication.
DRV CST JUDGE (DRIVE/COAST) — —
Displays the judgment results of “driving” or
“coasting” judged by TCM.
SHIFT IND SIGNAL — —
Displays the transmission value of shift position
signal transmitted via CAN communication.
STARTER RELAY (ON/OFF) — —
Displays the command status from TCM to
starter relay.
F-SAFE IND/L (ON/OFF) — —
Displays the transmission status of A/T CHECK
indicator lamp signal transmitted via CAN communication.
ATF WARN LAMP (ON/OFF) — —
• Displays the transmission status of ATF temperature
signal transmitted via CAN communication.
• Not mounted but displayed.
Monitored item (Unit)
Monitor Item Selection
ECU IN- Remarks
PUT SIGNALS
MAIN SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM
ITEM
TM-290
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
*: Except for Russia
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION
MANU MODE IND (ON/OFF) — —
Displays the transmission status of manual
mode signal transmitted via CAN communication.
ON OFF SOL MON (ON/OFF) — —
Monitors the command value from TCM to the
anti-interlock solenoid, and displays the monitor
status.
START RLY MON (ON/OFF) — —
Monitors the command value from TCM to the
starter relay, and displays the monitor status.
ON OFF SOL (ON/OFF) — —
Displays the command status from TCM to
anti-interlock solenoid.
SLCT LVR POSI — X Displays the shift positions recognized by TCM.
GEAR — X
Displays the current transmission gear position
recognized by TCM.
NEXT GR POSI — —
Displays the target gear position of gear
change that is calculated based on the vehicle
speed information and throttle information.
SHIFT MODE — —
Displays the transmission driving mode recognized
by TCM.
D/C PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — —
In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the
identified malfunction point judged by TCM is
the related parts of direct clutch.
FR/B PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — —
In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the
identified malfunction point judged by TCM is
the related parts of front brake.
2346/B PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — —
In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the
identified malfunction point judged by TCM is
the related parts of 2346 brake.
2346B/DC PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — —
In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the
identified malfunction point judged by TCM is
the related parts of 2346 brake or direct clutch.
N IDLE STATUS* (ON/OFF) — —
Displays the control status of idle neutral control.
Monitored item (Unit)
Monitor Item Selection
ECU IN- Remarks
PUT SIGNALS
MAIN SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM
ITEM
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
TM-291
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Item Description Check item
1ST GR FNCTN P0731
Following items for “1GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed.
• Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
• Input clutch solenoid
valve
• Front brake solenoid
valve
• Direct clutch solenoid
valve
• High and low reverse
clutch solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid
valve
• 2346 brake solenoid
valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid
valve
• Reverse brake
• Each clutch
• Hydraulic control circuit
2ND GR FNCTN P0732
Following items for “2GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed.
• Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
3RD GR FNCTN P0733
Following items for “3GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed.
• Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
4TH GR FNCTN P0734
Following items for “4GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed.
• Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
5TH GR FNCTN P0735
Following items for “5GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed.
• Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
6TH GR FNCTN P0729
Following items for “6GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed.
• Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
7TH GR FNCTN P1734
Following items for “7GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed.
• Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
TCC SOL FUNCTN CHECK
Following items for “TCC solenoid function” can be confirmed.
• Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
• Harness or connectors
• Torque converter
clutch solenoid valve
• Torque converter
• Input speed sensor 1,
2
• Hydraulic control circuit
TM-292
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
TCM
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
TCM
Reference Value INFOID:0000000004969912
VALUES ON DIAGNOSIS TOOL
NOTE:
1. The CONSULT-III electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each
solenoid).
Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT-III display. If the difference is
noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical
parts using applicable diagnostic procedures.
2. Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on CONSULT-III and that indicated in Service Manual
may differ slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons:
- Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance
- Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start
- Gear position displayed on CONSULT-III indicates the point where shifts are completed
3. Display of solenoid valves on CONSULT-III changes at the start of shifting, while gear position is displayed
upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM).
CONSULT-III MONITOR ITEM
Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.)
VHCL/S SE-A/T During driving
Approximately matches the speedometer
reading.
ESTM VSP SIG During driving
Approximately matches the speedometer
reading.
OUTPUT REV During driving (lock-up ON) Tachometer / Gear ratio
INPUT SPEED During driving (lock-up ON)
Approximately matches the engine
speed.
F SUN GR REV During driving
Revolution of front sun gear is indicated.
F CARR GR REV During driving
Revolution of front carrier is indicated.
ENGINE SPEED Engine running
Closely matches the tachometer
reading.
TC SLIP SPEED During driving Engine speed − Input speed
ACCELE POSI
Released accelerator pedal 0.0/8
Fully depressed accelerator pedal 8.0/8
THROTTLE POSI
Released accelerator pedal 0.0/8
Fully depressed accelerator pedal 8.0/8
ATF TEMP 1 Ignition switch ON
Temperature of ATF in the oil pan is
indicated.
ATF TEMP 2 Ignition switch ON
Temperature of ATF at the exit of
torque converter.
ATF TEMP SE 1 0°C (32° F) – 20°C (68°F) – 80°C (176°F) 3.3 – 2.7 – 0.9 V
BATTERY VOLT Ignition switch ON Battery voltage (11 V – 14 V)
LINE PRES SOL During driving 0.2 – 0.6 A
TCC SOLENOID
Slip lock-up is active 0.2 – 0.8 A
Lock-up is active 0.8 A
Other than the above 0 A
L/B SOLENOID
Low brake engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
Low brake disengaged 0 – 0.05 A
TCM
TM-293
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
FR/B SOLENOID
Front brake engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
Front brake disengaged 0 – 0.05 A
HLR/C SOL
High and low reverse clutch disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
High and low reverse clutch engaged 0 – 0.05 A
I/C SOLENOID
Input clutch disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
Input clutch engaged 0 – 0.05 A
D/C SOLENOID
Direct clutch disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
Direct clutch engaged 0 – 0.05 A
2346/B SOL
2346 brake engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
2346 brake disengaged 0 – 0.05 A
L/P SOL MON During driving 0.2 – 0.6 A
TCC SOL MON
Slip lock-up is active 0.2 – 0.8 A
Lock-up is active 0.8 A
Other than the above 0 A
L/B SOL MON
Low brake engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
Low brake disengaged 0 – 0.05 A
FR/B SOL MON
Front brake engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
Front brake disengaged 0 – 0.05 A
HLR/C SOL MON
High and low reverse clutch disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
High and low reverse clutch engaged 0 – 0.05 A
I/C SOL MON
Input clutch disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
Input clutch engaged 0 – 0.05 A
D/C SOL MON
Direct clutch disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
Direct clutch engaged 0 – 0.05 A
2346/B SOL MON
2346 brake engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
2346 brake disengaged 0 – 0.05 A
GEAR RATIO
Driving with 1GR 4.887
Driving with 2GR 3.170
Driving with 3GR 2.027
Driving with 4GR 1.412
Driving with 5GR 1.000
Driving with 6GR 0.864
Driving with 7GR 0.775
ENGINE TORQUE During driving
Changes the value according to
the acceleration or deceleration.
ENG TORQUE D During driving
Changes the value according to
the acceleration or deceleration.
INPUT TRQ S During driving
Changes the value according to
the acceleration or deceleration.
INPUT TRQ L/P During driving
Changes the value according to
the acceleration or deceleration.
TRGT PRES L/P
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions 490 kPa
Other than the above 490 – 1370 kPa
TRGT PRES TCC
Slip lock-up is active 0 – 600 kPa
Lock-up is active 600 kPa
Other than the above 0 kPa
Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.)
TM-294
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
TCM
TRGT PRES L/B
Low brake engaged 1370 kPa
Low brake disengaged 0 kPa
TRGT PRES FR/B
Front brake engaged 1370 kPa
Front brake disengaged 0 kPa
TRG PRE HLR/C
High and low reverse clutch disengaged 1370 kPa
High and low reverse clutch engaged 0 kPa
TRGT PRES I/C
Input clutch disengaged 1370 kPa
Input clutch engaged 0 kPa
TRGT PRES D/C
Direct clutch disengaged 1370 kPa
Direct clutch engaged 0 kPa
TRG PRE 2346/B
2346 brake engaged 1370 kPa
2346 brake disengaged 0 kPa
SHIFT PATTERN During normal driving (without shift changes) FF
VEHICLE SPEED During driving
Approximately matches the speedometer
reading.
G SEN SLOPE*1
Level road 0%
Uphill slope Positive value (maximum 40.45%)
Downhill slope
Negative value (minimum −
40.45%)
RANGE SW 4
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions OFF
Other than the above ON
RANGE SW 3
Selector lever in “P”, “R” and “N” positions OFF
Other than the above ON
RANGE SW 2
Selector lever in “P” and “R” positions OFF
Other than the above ON
RANGE SW 1
Selector lever in “P” position OFF
Other than the above ON
SFT DWN ST SW
Paddle shifter (shift-down) is shifted ON
Other than the above OFF
SFT UP ST SW
Paddle shifter (shift-up) is shifted ON
Other than the above OFF
DOWN SW LEVER
Selector lever is shifted to − side ON
Other than the above OFF
UP SW LEVER
Selector lever is shifted to + side ON
Other than the above OFF
NON M-MODE SW
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side OFF
Other than the above ON
MANU MODE SW
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side ON
Other than the above OFF
TOW MODE SW*2
Tow mode ON
Other than the above OFF
DS RANGE
Driving with DS mode ON
Other than the above OFF
1 POSITION SW*2
Selector lever in “1” position ON
Other than the above OFF
Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.)
TCM
TM-295
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
OD CONT SW*2
When overdrive control switch is depressed ON
When overdrive control switch is released OFF
BRAKESW
Depressed brake pedal ON
Released brake pedal OFF
POWERSHIFT SW*2
Power mode ON
Other than the above OFF
ASCD-OD CUT
When TCM receives ASCD OD cancel request signal ON
Other than the above OFF
ASCD-CRUISE
ASCD operate ON
Other than the above OFF
ABS SIGNAL
ABS operate ON
Other than the above OFF
TCS GR/P KEEP
When TCM receives TCS gear keep request signal ON
Other than the above OFF
TCS SIGNAL 2
When the reception value of A/T shift schedule change
demand signal is “cold”
ON
Other than the above OFF
TCS SIGNAL 1
When the reception value of A/T shift schedule change
demand signal is “warm”
ON
Other than the above OFF
LOW/B PARTS
At 4GR - 5GR - 6GR shift control FAIL
Other than the above NOTFAIL
HC/IC/FRB PARTS
At 1GR - 2GR - 3GR shift control FAIL
Other than the above NOTFAIL
IC/FRB PARTS
At 4GR - 5GR - 6GR shift control FAIL
Other than the above NOTFAIL
HLR/C PARTS
At 4GR - 5GR - 6GR shift control FAIL
Other than the above NOTFAIL
W/O THL POS
Fully depressed accelerator pedal ON
Released accelerator pedal OFF
CLSD THL POS
Released accelerator pedal ON
Fully depressed accelerator pedal OFF
DRV CST JUDGE
Depressed accelerator pedal DRIVE
Released accelerator pedal COAST
Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.)
TM-296
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
TCM
SHIFT IND SIGNAL
When the selector lever is positioned in between each position
OFF
Selector lever in “P” position P
Selector lever in “R” position R
Selector lever in “N” position N
Selector lever in “D” position
D
Selector lever in “D” position: 7GR
Selector lever in “D” position: 6GR 6
Selector lever in “D” position: 5GR 5
Selector lever in “D” position: 4GR 4
Selector lever in “D” position: 3GR 3
Selector lever in “D” position: 2GR 2
Selector lever in “D” position: 1GR 1
Selector lever in “M” position: 1GR M1
Selector lever in “M” position: 2GR M2
Selector lever in “M” position: 3GR M3
Selector lever in “M” position: 4GR M4
Selector lever in “M” position: 5GR M5
Selector lever in “M” position: 6GR M6
Selector lever in “M” position: 7GR M7
Driving with DS mode DS
STARTER RELAY
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions ON
Other than the above OFF
F-SAFE IND/L
For 2 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON ON
Other than the above OFF
ATF WARN LAMP*2
When TCM transmits the ATF indicator lamp signal ON
Other than the above OFF
MANU MODE IND
Driving with manual mode ON
Other than the above OFF
ON OFF SOL MON
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions
ON
Driving with 1GR to 3GR
Other than the above OFF
START RLY MON
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions ON
Other than the above OFF
ON OFF SOL
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions
ON
Driving with 1GR to 3GR
Other than the above OFF
Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.)
TCM
TM-297
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
*1: Except for Russia
*2: Not mounted but always display as OFF.
TERMINAL LAYOUT
PHYSICAL VALUES
SLCT LVR POSI
Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions N/P
Selector lever in “R” position R
Selector lever in “D” and “DS” positions
D
Selector lever in “M” position: 7GR
Selector lever in “M” position: 6GR 6
Selector lever in “M” position: 5GR 5
Selector lever in “M” position: 4GR 4
Selector lever in “M” position: 3GR 3
Selector lever in “M” position: 2GR 2
Selector lever in “M” position: 1GR 1
GEAR During driving 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th
NEXT GR POSI During driving 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th
SHIFT MODE
Driving with the D position 0 or 3
Driving with the manual mode 4 or 8
D/C PARTS
At 1GR - 2GR shift control FAIL
Other than the above NOTFAIL
FR/B PARTS
At control fixed to 1GR FAIL
Other than the above NOTFAIL
2346/B PARTS
At control fixed to 1GR FAIL
Other than the above NOTFAIL
2346B/DC PARTS
At 2GR - 3GR - 4GR shift control FAIL
Other than the above NOTFAIL
N IDLE STATUS*1
Idle neutral control is active ON
Other than the above OFF
Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.)
SCIA1658E
Terminal
(Wire color)
Description
Condition
Value (Approx.)
+ − Signal name
Input/
Output
1
(Y)
Ground Power supply Input
Ignition switch ON
Battery
voltage
Ignition switch OFF 0 V
TM-298
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
TCM
*1: LHD models
*2: RHD models
Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000005321627
TCM has the electrical fail-safe mode. The mode is divided into a maximum of 3 phases (1st fail-safe, 2nd failsafe
and final fail-safe) and functions so that the operation can be continued even if the signal circuit of the
main electronically controlled input/output parts is damaged.
Even if the electronic circuit is normal, the fail-safe mode may start under special conditions (such as when the
brake pedal is depressed suddenly from a hard wheel spin status to stop the rotation of wheels). In this case,
turn the ignition switch OFF and back to ON after 5 seconds to resume the normal shift pattern.
Consequently, the customer's vehicle may already return to the normal condition. Refer to TM-118, "Diagnosis
Flow".
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
2
(R)
Ground
Power supply
(Memory back-up)
Input Always
Battery
voltage
3
(L)
— CAN-H
Input/
Output
— —
4
(V)
K-line (CONSULTIII
signal)
Input/
Output
— —
5
(B)
Ground Ground Output Always 0 V
6
(Y)*1
(G)*2
Ground Power supply Input
Ignition switch ON
Battery
voltage
Ignition switch OFF 0 V
7
(R)*1
(SB)*2
Ground Back-up lamp relay Input Ignition switch ON
Selector lever in “R” position. 0 V
Selector lever in other positions.
Battery
voltage
8
(P)
— CAN-L
Input/
Output
— —
9
(LG)
Ground Starter relay Output Ignition switch ON
Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions.
Battery
voltage
Selector lever in other positions. 0 V
10
(B)
Ground Ground Output Always 0 V
Terminal
(Wire color)
Description
Condition
Value (Approx.)
+ − Signal name
Input/
Output
1st Fail-Safe
The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
2nd Fail-Safe
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunctioning
parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
Final Fail-Safe
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.
TCM
TM-299
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
DTC
Vehicle
condition
Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe
P0615 — Starter is disabled — Starter is disabled
P0705 —
• Fixed in the “D” position (The
shifting can be performed)
• 30 km/h (19MPH) or less
• Lock-up is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears
of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Shift position indicator is
switched OFF
• Starter relay is switched OFF
(starter is disabled)
• Back-up lamp is OFF
• Large shift shock
• Fixed in the “D” position (The
shifting can be performed)
• 30 km/h (19 MPH) or less
• Lock-up is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears
of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Shift position indicator is
switched OFF
• Starter relay is switched OFF
(starter is disabled)
• Back-up lamp is OFF
• Large shift shock
P0710
Between
the gears of
1 - 2 - 3
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
Between • Manual mode is prohibited
the gears of
4 - 5 - 6 - 7
• Fix the gear while driving
• Manual mode is prohibited
P0717
Between
the gears of
1 - 2 - 3
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
Between • Manual mode is prohibited
the gears of
4 - 5 - 6 - 7
• Fix the gear while driving
• Manual mode is prohibited
P0720
Between
the gears of
1 - 2 - 3
• Only downshift can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• A vehicle speed signal from the
unified meter and A/C amp. is regarded
as an effective signal
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
Between
the gears of
4 - 5 - 6 - 7
• Fix the gear at driving
• Manual mode is prohibited
• A vehicle speed signal from the
unified meter and A/C amp. is regarded
as an effective signal
P0729
P0731
P0732
P0733
P0734
P0735
P1734
Neutral
malfunction
between
the gears of
1 - 2 - 3 and
7
• Locks in 4GR
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Neutral
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
Other than
the above
• Driving with the gear ratio between
1GR and 2GR
• Driving with the gear ratio between
2GR and 3GR
• Locks in 3GR
• Locks in 4GR
• Fix the gear while driving
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Neutral
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 2 - 3 - 4 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 3 - 4 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
TM-300
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
TCM
P0730 —
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Neutral
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
P0740 —
• Lock-up is prohibited
• Slip lock-up is prohibited
• Lock-up is prohibited
• Slip lock-up is prohibited
P0744 —
• Lock-up is prohibited
• Slip lock-up is prohibited
• Lock-up is prohibited
• Slip lock-up is prohibited
P0750
P0775
P0795
P2713
P2722
P2731
P2807
• Locks in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR,
6GR or 7GR
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 3 - 4 - 5 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
P0780 —
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Neutral
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
P1585 — Idle neutral control is prohibited — Idle neutral control is prohibited
P1705 —
• Downshift when accelerator pedal
is depressed is prohibited
• Upshift when accelerator pedal
is released is prohibited
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Downshift when accelerator pedal
is depressed is prohibited
• Upshift when accelerator pedal
is released is prohibited
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Downshift when accelerator pedal
is depressed is prohibited
• Upshift when accelerator pedal
is released is prohibited
• Manual mode is prohibited
P1730 —
• Neutral
• Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears
of 2 - 3 - 4 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 3 - 4 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears
of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
P1815
Paddle
switch malfunction
Only the paddle switch is prohibited — Only the paddle switch is prohibited
Gate switch
malfunction
Only the gate switch is prohibited — Only the gate switch is prohibited
Malfunction
of both
switches
Manual mode is prohibited — Manual mode is prohibited
U0300
U1000
Between
the gears of
1 - 2 - 3
• The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
— • The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Line pressure is set to the maximum
hydraulic pressure
• Manual mode is prohibited
Between
the gears of
4 - 5 - 6 - 7
• Fix the gear at driving
• Manual mode is prohibited
P0720
and
P1721
— Locks in 5GR — Locks in 5GR
DTC
Vehicle
condition
Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe
TCM
TM-301
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Protection Control INFOID:0000000005321628
The TCM becomes the protection control status temporarily to protect the safety when the safety of TCM and
transmission is lost. It automatically returns to the normal status if the safety is secured.
The TCM has the following protection control.
REVERSE INHIBIT CONTROL
Intercepts the torque transmission and shift to the neutral status if the selector lever is shifted to “R” position
while the vehicle moves forward at the vehicle speed 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more.
1ST ENGINE BRAKE PROTECTION CONTROL
Controls the engine brake so as not to make effective by turning the front brake solenoid output to OFF when
each solenoid becomes the electricity pattern of 1st engine brake during driving at the vehicle speed 25 km/h
or more in any positions other than “R” position and 1GR.
TCM HIGH TEMPERATURE PROTECTION CONTROL
Limit the accelerator opening and forcibly control the vehicle to the low torque driving when the electronic substrate
in TCM reaches the high temperature.
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000005321629
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the priority as per the
following list.
Malfunction detection condition Vehicle speed: 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
Control at malfunction Neutral
Normal return condition
• Vehicle speed: 8 km/h (5 MPH) or less
and
• Engine speed: 2,200 rpm or less
Vehicle behavior
• The torque transmission cannot be performed
• There is a shock just before a vehicle stop
Malfunction detection condition
• Select lever and gear: Any position other than “R” position and 1GR
and
• Vehicle speed: More than 25 km/h (16 MPH)
Control at malfunction Front brake solenoid output signal; OFF
Normal return condition Other than detection condition of malfunction
Vehicle behavior Does not exist
Malfunction detection condition
TCM electronic substrate temperature
• 145°C (293°F) and 120 seconds
or
• 150°C (302°F)
Control at malfunction Accelerator opening: 0.5/8 or less
Normal return condition
• TCM electronic substrate temperature: Less than 140°C (284°F)
and
• Vehicle speed: 5 km/h (3 MPH) or less
Vehicle behavior Accelerator opening: output torque of approximately 0.5/8
Priority Detected items (DTC) Reference
1 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT TM-320
TM-302
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
TCM
DTC Index INFOID:0000000005321630
NOTE:
• If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the priority as per
the following list. Refer to TM-108, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart".
• The IGN counter is indicated in Freeze frame data (FFD). Refer to TM-92, "CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION)".
2
P0615 STARTER RELAY TM-321
P0705 T/M RANGE SWITCH A TM-323
P0710 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A TM-324
P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A TM-326
P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR TM-327
P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER TM-344
P0745 PC SOLENOID A TM-346
P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A TM-347
P0775 PC SOLENOID B TM-348
P0795 PC SOLENOID C TM-350
P2713 PC SOLENOID D TM-366
P2722 PC SOLENOID E TM-367
P2731 PC SOLENOID F TM-368
P2807 PC SOLENOID G TM-369
3
P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-331
P0730 INCORRECT GR RATIO TM-333
P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-334
P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-336
P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-338
P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-340
P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-342
P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER TM-345
P0780 SHIFT TM-349
P1730 INTERLOCK TM-357
P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-359
4
U0300 CAN COMM DATA TM-319
P0725 ENGINE SPEED TM-329
P1585 G SENSOR TM-351
P1705 TP SENSOR TM-354
P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL TM-355
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH TM-361
Priority Detected items (DTC) Reference
Items
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
DTC*2
MI*1, “ENGINE” with CON- Reference
SULT-III or GST
CONSULT-III only
“TRANSMISSION”
STARTER RELAY — P0615 TM-321
T/M RANGE SWITCH A P0705 P0705 TM-323
FLUID TEMP SENSOR A P0710 P0710 TM-324
INPUT SPEED SENSOR A P0717 P0717 TM-326
TCM
TM-303
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
*1: Refer to TM-284, "Diagnosis Description".
*2: These numbers are prescribed by ISO 15031-5.
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR P0720 P0720 TM-327
ENGINE SPEED — P0725 TM-329
6GR INCORRECT RATIO P0729 P0729 TM-331
INCORRECT GR RATIO P0730 P0730 TM-333
1GR INCORRECT RATIO P0731 P0731 TM-334
2GR INCORRECT RATIO P0732 P0732 TM-336
3GR INCORRECT RATIO P0733 P0733 TM-338
4GR INCORRECT RATIO P0734 P0734 TM-340
5GR INCORRECT RATIO P0735 P0735 TM-342
TORQUE CONVERTER P0740 P0740 TM-344
TORQUE CONVERTER P0744 P0744 TM-345
PC SOLENOID A P0745 P0745 TM-346
SHIFT SOLENOID A P0750 P0750 TM-347
PC SOLENOID B P0775 P0775 TM-348
SHIFT P0780 P0780 TM-349
PC SOLENOID C P0795 P0795 TM-350
G SENSOR — P1585 TM-351
TP SENSOR — P1705 TM-354
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL — P1721 TM-355
INTERLOCK P1730 P1730 TM-357
7GR INCORRECT RATIO P1734 P1734 TM-359
M-MODE SWITCH — P1815 TM-361
PC SOLENOID D P2713 P2713 TM-366
PC SOLENOID E P2722 P2722 TM-367
PC SOLENOID F P2731 P2731 TM-368
PC SOLENOID G P2807 P2807 TM-369
CAN COMM DATA — U0300 TM-319
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 U1000 TM-320
Items
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
DTC*2
MI*1, “ENGINE” with CON- Reference
SULT-III or GST
CONSULT-III only
“TRANSMISSION”
TM-304
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
WIRING DIAGRAM
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
LHD
LHD : Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000005318349
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a (option abbreviation; if notdescribed
in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
TM-305
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
RHD P
RHD : Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000005318350
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a (option abbreviation; if notdescribed
in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
JCDWM1017GB
TM-306
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
JCDWM1018GB
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
TM-307
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000005318351
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a (option abbreviation; if notdescribed
in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC
JCDWM1021GB
TM-308
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC
JCDWM1022GB
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
TM-309
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Diagnosis Flow INFOID:0000000005288301
1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM
1. Refer to TM-310, "Question sheet" and interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions
and environment when the malfunction occurred) as much as possible when the customer brings
in the vehicle.
2. Check the following:
- Service history
- Harnesses and connectors malfunction. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
1. Before checking the malfunction, check whether any DTC exists.
2. If DTC exists, perform the following operations.
- Record the DTC and freeze frame data. (Print out the data CONSULT-III and affix it to the Work Order
Sheet.)
- Erase DTCs.
- Check the relationship between the cause that is clarified with DTC and the malfunction information
described by the customer. TM-387, "Symptom Table" is effective.
3. Check the information of related service bulletins and others also.
Do malfunction information and DTC exist?
Malfunction information and DTC exists. >>GO TO 3.
Malfunction information exists, but no DTC. >>GO TO 4.
No malfunction information, but DTC exists. >>GO TO 5.
3.REPRODUCE MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM
Check any malfunction described by a customer, except those with DTC on the vehicle.
Also investigate whether the symptom is a fail-safe or normal operation. Refer to TM-298, "Fail-Safe".
When a malfunction symptom is reproduced, the question sheet is effective. Refer to TM-310, "Question
sheet".
Verify the relationship between the symptom and the conditions in which the malfunction described by the customer
occurs.
>> GO TO 5.
4.REPRODUCE MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM
Check the malfunction described by the customer on the vehicle.
Also investigate whether the symptom is a fail-safe or normal operation. Refer to TM-298, "Fail-Safe".
When a malfunction symptom is reproduced, the question sheet is effective. Refer to TM-310, "Question
sheet".
Verify the relationship between the symptom and the conditions in which the malfunction described by the customer
occurs.
>> GO TO 6.
5.PERFORM “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” of the appropriate DTC to check if DTC is detected again.
Refer to TM-301, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" when multiple DTCs are detected, and then determine the
order for performing the diagnosis.
NOTE:
If no DTC is detected, refer to the freeze frame data.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
TM-310
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
NO >> Check according to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
6.IDENTIFY MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM WITH “DIAGNOSIS CHART BY SYMPTOM”
Use TM-387, "Symptom Table" from the symptom inspection result in step 4. Then identify where to start performing
the diagnosis based on possible causes and symptoms.
>> GO TO 8.
7.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Repair or replace the detected malfunctioning parts.
Reconnect parts or connector after repairing or replacing, and then erase DTC if necessary.
>> GO TO 8.
8.FINAL CHECK
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” again to make sure that the repair is correctly performed.
Check that malfunctions are not reproduced when obtaining the malfunction information from the customer,
referring to the symptom inspection result in step 3 or 4.
Is DTC or malfunction symptom reproduced?
YES-1 >> DTC is reproduced: GO TO 5.
YES-2 >> Malfunction symptom is reproduced: GO TO 6.
NO >> Before delivering the vehicle to the customer, make sure that DTC is erased.
Question sheet INFOID:0000000005288302
DESCRIPTION
There are many operating conditions that may cause a malfunction
of the transmission parts. By understanding those conditions properly,
a quick and exact diagnosis can be achieved.
In general, customers have their own criteria for a problem. Therefore,
it is important to understand the symptom and status well
enough by asking the customer about the concerns carefully. In
order to systemize all the information for the diagnosis, prepare the
question sheet referring to the question points.
WORKSHEET SAMPLE
SEF907L
Question Sheet
Customer name MR/MS Engine # Manuf. Date
Incident Date VIN
Model & Year In Service Date
Trans. Mileage Km / Mile
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
TM-311
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Symptoms 􀂆 Vehicle does not move (􀂆 Any position 􀂆 Particular position )
􀂆 No up shift (􀂆 1GR → 2GR 􀂆 2GR → 3GR 􀂆 3GR → 4GR 􀂆 4GR → 5GR 􀂆 5GR →
6GR 􀂆 6GR → 7GR)
􀂆 No down shift (􀂆 7GR → 6GR 􀂆 6GR → 5GR 􀂆 5GR → 4GR 􀂆 4GR → 3GR 􀂆 3GR →
2GR 􀂆 2GR → 1GR)
􀂆 Lock-up malfunction
􀂆 Shift point too high or too low
􀂆 Shift shock or slip
􀂆 Noise or vibration
􀂆 No kick down
􀂆 No pattern select
􀂆 Others
Frequency 􀂆 All the time 􀂆 Under certain conditions 􀂆 Sometimes ( times a day)
Weather conditions 􀂆 Not affected
Weather 􀂆 Fine 􀂆 Clouding 􀂆 Raining 􀂆 Snowing 􀂆 Other ( )
Temp. 􀂆 Hot 􀂆 Warm 􀂆 Cool 􀂆 Cold
􀂆 Temp. [Approx. °C (
°F)]
Humidity 􀂆 High 􀂆 Middle 􀂆 Low
Transmission conditions 􀂆 Not affected
􀂆 Cold 􀂆 During warm-up 􀂆 After warm-up
􀂆 Engine speed ( rpm)
Road conditions 􀂆 Not affected
􀂆 In town 􀂆 In suburbs 􀂆 Freeway 􀂆 Off road (Up / Down)
Driving conditions 􀂆 Not affected
􀂆 At starting 􀂆 While idling 􀂆 While engine racing 􀂆 At racing
􀂆 While cruising
􀂆 While accelerating 􀂆 While decelerating 􀂆 While turning (Right / Left)
􀂆 Vehicle speed [ km/h ( MPH)]
Other conditions
Question Sheet
TM-312
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
Description INFOID:0000000005318526
G sensor calibration must be performed when replacing transmission assembly.
Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000005318527
1.PREPARATION BEFORE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
1. Park the vehicle on a flat road.
2. Adjust pressure in all tires to the specified value. Refer to WT-84, "Tire Air Pressure".
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM CALIBRATION
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “G SENSOR CALIBRATION” in “Work Support” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Touch “START”.
CAUTION:
• Never start the engine.
• Never give any motion to the vehicle during the calibration.
Is “completed” displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Perform the calibration again.
3.CHECK DTC
With CONSULT-III
Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “P1585” detected?
YES >> Refer to TM-351, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Calibration end.
G SENSOR CALIBRATION
TM-313
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
G SENSOR CALIBRATION
Description INFOID:0000000005318528
G sensor calibration must be performed when the following operation is performed.
• Removal and installation or replacement of G sensor
• Replacement of transmission assembly
• Replacement of ECM
Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000005318529
1.PREPARATION BEFORE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
1. Park the vehicle on a flat road.
2. Adjust pressure in all tires to the specified value. Refer to WT-84, "Tire Air Pressure".
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM CALIBRATION
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “G SENSOR CALIBRATION” in “Work Support” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Touch “START”.
CAUTION:
• Never start the engine.
• Never give any motion to the vehicle during the calibration.
Is “completed” displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Perform the calibration again.
3.CHECK DTC
With CONSULT-III
Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “P1585” detected?
YES >> Refer to TM-351, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Calibration end.
TM-314
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
A/T FLUID
A/T FLUID
Changing INFOID:0000000005321668
CAUTION:
• Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. Never mix with other ATF.
• Using ATF other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and A/T
durability, and may damage the A/T, which is not covered by the warranty.
• When filling ATF, be careful not to scatter heat generating parts such as exhaust.
1. Step 1
a. Install the O-ring (315268E000) (A) to the charging pipe
(310811EA5A) (B).
2. Step 2
a. Use CONSULT-III to check that the ATF temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less.
b. Lift up the vehicle.
c. Remove the drain plug from the oil pan, and then drain the ATF.
d. When the ATF starts to drip, temporarily tighten the drain plug to the oil pan.
NOTE:
Never replace drain plug and drain plug gasket with new ones yet.
e. Remove overflow plug from oil pan.
f. Install the charging pipe (A) to the overflow plug hole.
CAUTION:
Tighten the charging pipe by hand.
g. Install the bucket pump hose (B) to the charging pipe.
CAUTION:
Insert the bucket pump hose all the way to the end of the
charging pipe.
h. Fill approximately 3 liters (2-5/8 lmp qt) of the ATF.
i. Remove the bucket pump hose to remove the charging pipe,
and then temporarily tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan.
CAUTION:
Quickly perform the procedure to avoid ATF leakage from
the oil pan.
j. Lift down the vehicle.
k. Start the engine and wait for approximately 3 minutes.
l. Stop the engine.
3. Step 3
a. Repeat “Step 2”.
4. Final Step
a. Use CONSULT-III to check that the ATF temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less.
b. Lift up the vehicle.
c. Remove the drain plug from the oil pan, and then drain the ATF.
Recommended fluid and fluid capacity : Refer to TM-410, "General Specification".
JSDIA1334ZZ
JSDIA1335ZZ
A/T FLUID
TM-315
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
d. When the ATF starts to drip, tighten the drain plug to the oil pan to the specified torque. Refer to TM-400,
"Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Never reuse drain plug and drain plug gasket.
e. Remove overflow plug from oil pan.
f. Install the charging pipe (A) to the overflow plug hole.
CAUTION:
Tighten the charging pipe by hand.
g. Install the bucket pump hose (B) to the charging pipe.
CAUTION:
Insert the bucket pump hose all the way to the end of the
charging pipe.
h. Fill approximately 3 liters (2-5/8 lmp qt) of the ATF.
i. Remove the bucket pump hose to remove the charging pipe,
and then temporarily tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan.
CAUTION:
Quickly perform the procedure to avoid ATF leakage from
the oil pan.
j. Lift down the vehicle.
k. Start the engine.
l. Make the ATF temperature approximately 40°C (104°F).
NOTE:
The ATF level is greatly affected by the temperature. Always check the ATF temperature on “ATF TEMP
1” of “Data Monitor” using CONSULT-III.
m. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake.
n. Shift the selector lever through each gear position. Leave selector lever in “P” position.
o. Lift up the vehicle when the ATF temperature reaches 40°C (104°F), and then remove the overflow plug
from the oil pan.
p. When the ATF starts to drip, tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan to the specified torque. Refer to TM-
400, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Never reuse overflow plug.
Adjustment INFOID:0000000005321669
CAUTION:
• Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. Never mix with other ATF.
• Using ATF other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and A/T
durability, and may damage the A/T, which is not covered by the warranty.
• When filling ATF, be careful not to scatter heat generating parts such as exhaust.
• Always maintain the ATF temperature within between 35°C (95°F) and 45°C (113°F) while checking
with CONSULT-III when the ATF level adjustment is performed.
1. Install the O-ring (315268E000) (A) to the charging pipe
(310811EA5A) (B).
2. Start the engine.
3. Make the ATF temperature approximately 40°C (104°F).
NOTE:
The ATF level is greatly affected by the temperature. Always
check the ATF temperature on “ATF TEMP 1” of “Data Monitor”
using CONSULT-III.
4. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake.
5. Shift the selector lever through each gear position. Leave selector
lever in “P” position.
6. Lift up the vehicle.
JSDIA1335ZZ
Recommended fluid and fluid capacity : Refer to TM-410, "General Specification".
JSDIA1334ZZ
TM-316
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
A/T FLUID
7. Check the ATF leakage from transmission.
8. Remove overflow plug from oil pan.
9. Install the charging pipe (A) to the overflow plug hole.
CAUTION:
Tighten the charging pipe by hand.
10. Install the bucket pump hose (B) to the charging pipe.
CAUTION:
Insert the bucket pump hose all the way to the end of the
charging pipe.
11. Fill approximately 0.5 liters (1/2 lmp qt) of the ATF.
12. Check that the ATF leaks when removing the charging pipe and
the bucket pump hose. If the ATF does not leak, refill the ATF.
13. When the ATF starts to drip, tighten the overflow plug to the oil
pan to the specified torque. Refer to TM-400, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Never reuse overflow plug.
JSDIA1335ZZ
STALL TEST
TM-317
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
STALL TEST
Inspection and Judgment INFOID:0000000005288333
INSPECTION
1. Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary.
2. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to
176°F). Inspect the amount of ATF. Replenish if necessary.
3. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.
4. Start the engine, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in “D” position.
5. Gradually press down the accelerator pedal while holding down the foot brake.
6. Quickly read off the stall speed, then quickly remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION:
Never hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds during this test.
7. Shift the selector lever to “N” position.
8. Cool down the ATF.
CAUTION:
Run the engine at idle for at least 1 minute.
9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 with selector lever in “R” position.
JUDGMENT OF STALL TEST
O: Stall speed within standard value position
H: Stall speed higher than standard value
L: Stall speed lower than standard value
Stall test standard value position
Stall speed : Refer to TM-411, "Stall Speed".
Selector lever position
Possible location of malfunction
“D” and “M” “R”
Stall speed
H O
• Low brake
• 1st one-way clutch
• 2nd one-way clutch
O H
• Reverse brake
• 1st one-way clutch
• 2nd one-way clutch
L L • Engine and torque converter one-way clutch
H H • Line pressure low
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 1 → 2 Slipping in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR or 6GR 2346 brake slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 2 → 3 Slipping in 3GR, 4GR or 5GR Direct clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 3 → 4 Slipping in 4GR, 5GR, 6GR or 7GR High and low reverse clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 4 → 5 Slipping in 5GR, 6GR or 7GR Input clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 5 → 6 Slipping in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR or 6GR 2346 brake slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 6 → 7 Slipping in 7GR Front brake slippage
TM-318
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
A/T POSITION
A/T POSITION
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004969925
INSPECTION
1. Place selector lever in “P” position, and turn ignition switch ON (engine stop).
2. Check that selector lever can be shifted to other than “P” position when brake pedal is depressed. Also
check that selector lever can be shifted from “P” position only when brake pedal is depressed.
3. Shift the selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle.
4. Confirm that the selector lever stops at each position by feeling the engagement when it is moved through
all the positions. Check whether or not the actual position the selector lever matches the position shown
by the shift position indicator and the A/T body.
5. The method of operating the lever to individual positions correctly
is shown in the figure.
6. When selector button is pressed in “P”, “R”, or “N” position without
applying forward/backward force to selector lever, check button
operation for sticking.
7. Confirm that the back-up lamps illuminate only when lever is
placed in the “R” position. Confirm that the back-up lamps do not
illuminate when selector lever is pushed against “R” position in
the “P” or “N” position.
8. Confirm that the engine can only be started with the selector
lever in the “P” and “N” positions. (With selector lever in the “P”
position, engine can be started even when selector lever is
moved forward and backward.)
9. Make sure that A/T is locked completely in “P” position.
10. DS mode must be indicated on the combination meter when the selector lever is shifted to the manual
shift gate. When the selector lever is shifted to the “+” or “−” side in the DS mode, manual mode should be
indicated on the combination meter.
In addition, a set shift position must be changed when the selector lever is shifted to the “+” or “−” side in
the manual mode. (Only while driving.)
ADJUSTMENT
1. Loosen nut ( ).
2. Place manual lever and selector lever in “P” position.
3. While pressing lower lever (A) toward rear of vehicle (in “P” position
direction), tighten nut to specified torque. Refer to TM-392,
"Exploded View".
JSDIA0790GB
JPDIA0884ZZ
U0300 CAN COMMUNICATION DATA
TM-319
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
U0300 CAN COMMUNICATION DATA
Description INFOID:0000000005775083
The amount of data transmitted from each control unit is read.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005775084
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 2 seconds or more.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “U0300” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-319, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005775085
1.CHECK CONTROL UNIT
Check the number of control units replaced before detecting “U0300”.
Is the number of replaced control units one?
YES >> Since the replaced control unit may be out of specifications, check the part number and specifications.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.INSPECTION CONTROL UNIT
With CONSULT-III
1. Remove one of the replaced control units.
2. Install the previous control unit mounted before replacement.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 2 seconds or more.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “U0300” detected?
YES >> Turn OFF the ignition switch to check the other control units in the same method.
NO >> Since the removed control unit may be out of specifications, check the part number and specifications.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
U0300
Internal Control Module Software
Incompatibility
When the amount of data transmitted
from each control unit is
smaller than the specified
amount.
Control units other than TCM.
TM-320
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005318673
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex
communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability.
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links
with other control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are connected
with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342376
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
3. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-320, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005342377
Go to LAN-29, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
U1000 CAN Communication Line
TCM is not transmitting or receiving
CAN communication
signal for 2 seconds or more.
• Harness or connectors
(CAN communication line is
open or shorted.)
• TCM
P0615 STARTER RELAY
TM-321
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P0615 STARTER RELAY
Description INFOID:0000000005318674
TCM prohibits cranking other than at “P” or “N” position.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342378
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” and “N” positions.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 2 seconds or more.
3. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “P0615” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-321, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969803
1.CHECK STARTER RELAY SIGNAL
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check starter relay circuit. Refer to STR-12, "Wiring Diagram - STARTING SYSTEM (WITH GASOLINE
ENGINE) -".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T ASSEMBLY AND IPDM E/R (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector and IPDM E/R connector.
3. Check the continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and IPDM E/R vehicle
side harness connector terminal.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0615 Starter Relay Circuit
The starter monitor value is
OFF when the ignition switch is
ON at the “P” and “N” positions.
• Harness or connectors
(Starter relay and TCM circuit
is open or shorted.)
• Starter relay circuit
IPDM E/R connector
Ground
Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
E5 30
Selector lever in “P” and
“N” positions.
Battery voltage
Selector lever in other
positions.
0 V
TM-322
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
P0615 STARTER RELAY
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T ASSEMBLY AND IPDM E/R (PART 2)
Check the continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
F51 9 E5 30 Existed
A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
F51 9 Not existed
P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH A
TM-323
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342379
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “ACCELE POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Shift the selector lever throughout the entire shift position from “P” to “D”. (Hold the selector lever at each
position for 2 seconds or more)
4. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.
5. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0705” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-323, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969806
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detected if... Possible cause
P0705
Transmission Range Switch A
Circuit (PRNDL Input)
The TCM detects an ON/OFF
combination pattern other than
that of the transmission range
switches 1, 2, 3 and 4. (For ON/
OFF combination patterns of
transmission range switches,
refer to TM-239, "A/T CONTROL
SYSTEM : Transmission
Range Switch".)
• Harness or connectors
(Transmission range switches
1, 2, 3, 4 and TCM circuit
is open or shorted.)
• Transmission range switches
1, 2, 3 and 4
ACCELE POSI : More than 1.0/8
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
TM-324
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342380
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Except for Russia (VQ37VHR)
For Russia (VQ37VHR) and Europe (V9X)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0710
Transmission Fluid Temperature
Sensor A Circuit
The A/T fluid temperature sensor is −40 °C (−40 °F)
or less for 5 seconds while driving the vehicle at the
vehicle speed 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more.
• Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is open.)
• A/T fluid temperature sensor
The A/T fluid temperature sensor is 180 °C (356 °F)
or more for 5 seconds.
• Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is short.)
• A/T fluid temperature sensor
The fluid temperature sensor is in the following conditions
while driving the vehicle at the vehicle speed
10 km/h (7 MPH) or more.
• Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is stuck.)
• A/T fluid temperature sensor
For 4 minutes
: 15 °C – 20 °C (59 °F – 68 °F)
: 10 °C – 15 °C (50 °F – 59 °F)
: 5 °C – 10 °C (41 °F – 50 °F)
: 0 °C – 5 °C (32 °F – 41 °F)
For 7 minutes
: −5 °C – 0 °C (23 °F – 32 °F)
: −10 °C – −5 °C (14 °F – 23 °F)
: −15 °C – −10 °C (5 °F – 14 °F)
: −20 °C – −15 °C (−4 °F – 5 °F)
For 14 minutes : −40 °C – −20 °C (−40 °F – −4 °F)
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0710
Transmission Fluid Temperature
Sensor A Circuit
TCM judges that the A/T fluid temperature is -40 °C (-40
°F) or less continuously for 5 seconds while driving at 10
km/h (7 MPH) or more.
• Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is open.)
• A/T fluid temperature
sensor
TCM judges that the A/T fluid temperature is 180 °C (356
°F) or more continuously for 5 seconds.
• Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is short.)
• A/T fluid temperature
sensor
TCM judges the following conditions while driving the vehicle
at 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more:
• The time required for A/T fluid temperature to rise by
1 °C (1.8 °F) exceeds 14 minutes when A/T fluid temperature
is -20 °C (-4 °F) or less.
• The time required for A/T fluid temperature to rise by
1 °C (1.8 °F) exceeds 7 minutes when A/T fluid temperature
is between -19 °C (-2 °F) and 0 °C (32 °F).
• The time required for A/T fluid temperature to rise by
1 °C (1.8 °F) exceeds 4 minutes when A/T fluid temperature
is between 1 °C (34 °F) and 20 °C (68 °F).
• Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is stuck.)
• A/T fluid temperature
sensor
P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
TM-325
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 14 minutes or more.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0710” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-325, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969809
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
SLCT LVR POSI : D
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
TM-326
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A
P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342424
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI”, “GEAR”, “VHCL/S SE-A/T”, “W/O THL POS” and “ENGINE SPEED” in “Data
Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.
CAUTION:
Keep the same gear position.
NOTE:
Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this
test.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0717” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-326, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969812
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0717
Input/Turbine Speed Sensor A
Circuit No Signal
The revolution of input speed
sensor 1 and/or 2 is 270 rpm or
less.
• Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is open.)
• Input speed sensor 1 and/or
2
SLCT LVR POSI : D
GEAR : 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th or 6th
VHCL/S SE-A/T : More than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
W/O THL POS : ON
ENGINE SPEED : More than 1,500 rpm
P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
TM-327
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342425
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
• Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “ESTM VSP SIG” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 60 seconds or more.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0720” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-327, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969815
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0720 Output Speed Sensor Circuit
• The vehicle speed detected
by the output speed sensor is
5 km/h (3MPH) or less when
the vehicle speed transmitted
from the unified meter and A/
C amp. to TCM is 20 km/h or
more. (Only when starts after
the ignition switch is turned
ON.)
• The vehicle speed transmitted
from the unified meter
and A/C amp. to TCM does
not decrease despite the 36
km/h (23 MPH) or more of deceleration
in vehicle speed
detected by the output speed
sensor. when the vehicle
speed detected by the output
speed sensor is 36 km/h (23
MPH) or more and the vehicle
speed transmitted from the
unified meter and A/C amp. to
TCM is 24 (15 MPH) or more.
• Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is open.)
• Output speed sensor
ESTM VSP SIG : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more
TM-328
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
P0725 ENGINE SPEED
TM-329
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P0725 ENGINE SPEED
Description INFOID:0000000005318675
The engine speed signal is transmitted from the ECM to the TCM via CAN communication line.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342463
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “P0725” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-329, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969818
1.CHECK DTC OF ECM
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “ENGINE”.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to EC-1049, "DTC Index".
2.CHECK DTC OF TCM
With CONSULT-III
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”.
Is any DTC other than “P0725” detected?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to TM-302, "DTC Index".
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0725 Engine Speed Input Circuit
• TCM does not receive the
CAN communication signal
from the ECM.
• The engine speed is more
less 150 rpm even if the vehicle
speed is more than 10 km/
h (7 MPH).
Harness or connectors
(ECM to TCM circuit is open or
shorted.)
SLCT LVR POSI : D
VHCL/S SE-A/T : More than 10km/h (7 MPH)
TM-330
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
P0725 ENGINE SPEED
3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO
TM-331
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO
Description INFOID:0000000005342579
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 6GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342488
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-332, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
With GST
1. Start the engine.
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “6TH GR FNCTN P0729” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0729 Gear 6 Incorrect Ratio
The gear ratio is:
• 0.915 or more
• 0.813 or less
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
• High and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch
• Output speed sensor
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
TM-332
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF
CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results”
in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0729” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-
302, "DTC Index".
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.
2. Check DTC.
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0729”
detected?
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4.
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-332, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P0729” is detected)>>Go to TM-332, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2)
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock.
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969821
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
GEAR : 6th
ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
Selector lever : “M” position
Gear position : 6th
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
P0730 INCORRECT GEAR RATIO
TM-333
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P0730 INCORRECT GEAR RATIO
Description INFOID:0000000005318677
• TCM detects a high-rpm state of the under drive sun gear.
• The number of revolutions of the under drive sun gear is calculated with the input speed sensor 1 and 2.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342580
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-333, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ENGINE”.
3. Drive vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the
table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0730” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-333, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969824
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0730 Incorrect Gear Ratio
The revolution of under drive
sun gear is 8,000 rpm or more.
NOTE:
Not detected when in “P” or “N”
position and during a shift to “P”
or “N” position.
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Input speed sensor 2
ENGINE SPEED Same value as the Freeze Frame Data.
VEHICLE SPEED Same value as the Freeze Frame Data.
B/FUEL SCHDL Same value as the Freeze Frame Data.
TM-334
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO
P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO
Description INFOID:0000000005318678
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 1GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342708
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-335, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
With GST
1. Start the engine.
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “1ST GR FNCTN P0731” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0731 Gear 1 Incorrect Ratio
The gear ratio is:
• 5.180 or more
• 4.594 or less
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
• High and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch
• Output speed sensor
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO
TM-335
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF
CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results”
in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0731” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-
302, "DTC Index".
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.
2. Check DTC.
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0731”
detected?
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4.
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-335, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P0731” is detected)>>Go to TM-335, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2)
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock.
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969827
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
GEAR : 1st
ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
Selector lever : “M” position
Gear position : 1st
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
TM-336
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO
P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO
Description INFOID:0000000005318679
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 2GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342709
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-337, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
With GST
1. Start the engine.
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “2ND GR FNCTN P0732” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0732 Gear 2 Incorrect Ratio
The gear ratio is:
• 3.360 or more
• 2.980 or less
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
• High and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch
• Output speed sensor
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO
TM-337
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF
CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results”
in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0732” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-
302, "DTC Index".
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.
2. Check DTC.
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0732”
detected?
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4.
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-337, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P0732” is detected)>>Go to TM-337, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2)
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock.
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969830
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
GEAR : 2nd
ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
Selector lever : “M” position
Gear position : 2nd
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
TM-338
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO
P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO
Description INFOID:0000000005318680
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 3GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342747
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-339, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
With GST
1. Start the engine.
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “3RD GR FNCTN P0733” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0733 Gear 3 Incorrect Ratio
The gear ratio is:
• 2.148 or more
• 1.906 or less
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
• High and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch
• Output speed sensor
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO
TM-339
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF
CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results”
in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0733” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-
302, "DTC Index".
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.
2. Check DTC.
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0733”
detected?
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4.
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-339, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P0733” is detected)>>Go to TM-339, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2)
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock.
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969833
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
GEAR : 3rd
ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
Selector lever : “M” position
Gear position : 3rd
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
TM-340
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO
P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO
Description INFOID:0000000005318681
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 4GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342785
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-341, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
With GST
1. Start the engine.
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “4TH GR FNCTN P0734” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0734 Gear 4 Incorrect Ratio
The gear ratio is:
• 1.496 or more
• 1.328 or less
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
• High and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch
• Output speed sensor
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO
TM-341
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF
CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results”
in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0734” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-
302, "DTC Index".
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.
2. Check DTC.
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0734”
detected?
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4.
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-341, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P0734” is detected)>>Go to TM-341, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2)
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock.
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969836
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
GEAR : 4th
ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
Selector lever : “M” position
Gear position : 4th
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
TM-342
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO
P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO
Description INFOID:0000000005318682
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 5GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342787
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-343, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
With GST
1. Start the engine.
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “5TH GR FNCTN P0735” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0735 Gear 5 Incorrect Ratio
The gear ratio is:
• 1.060 or more
• 0.940 or less
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
• High and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch
• Output speed sensor
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO
TM-343
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF
CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results”
in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0735” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-
302, "DTC Index".
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.
2. Check DTC.
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0735”
detected?
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4.
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-343, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P0735” is detected)>>Go to TM-343, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2)
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock.
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969839
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
GEAR : 5th
ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
Selector lever : “M” position
Gear position : 5th
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
TM-344
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342862
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 30 seconds or more.
NOTE:
Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this
test.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “P0740” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-344, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969842
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0740
Torque Converter Clutch Circuit/
Open
A DTC is set if the torque converter
clutch solenoid valve
monitor value is 0.4 A or less
when the torque converter
clutch solenoid valve command
value is more than 0.75 A.
• Harness or connectors
(Solenoid valve circuit is
open or shorted.)
• Torque converter clutch solenoid
valve
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 2nd
VEHICLE SPEED : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more
P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER
TM-345
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER
Description INFOID:0000000005318683
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not lock-up. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction
(circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid
valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342864
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more.
NOTE:
Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this
test.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “P0744” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-345, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969845
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0744
Torque Converter Clutch Circuit
Intermittent
The lock-up is not performed in
spite of within the lock-up area.
• Harness or connectors
• Torque converter clutch solenoid
valve
• Torque converter
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 2nd
VEHICLE SPEED : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more
TM-346
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A
P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342902
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Wait for 5 seconds or more at idle speed in “N” position.
3. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0745” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-346, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969848
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0745 Pressure Control Solenoid A
The line pressure solenoid
valve monitor value is 0.4 A or
less when the line pressure solenoid
valve command value is
more than 0.75 A.
• Harness or connectors
(Solenoid valve circuit is
open or shorted.)
• Line pressure solenoid valve
P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A
TM-347
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342903
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0750” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-347, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969851
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0750 Shift Solenoid A
• The anti-interlock solenoid
valve monitor value is ON
when the anti-interlock solenoid
valve command value is
OFF.
• The anti-interlock solenoid
valve monitor value is OFF
when the anti-interlock solenoid
valve command value is
ON.
• Harness or connectors
(Solenoid valve circuit is
open or shorted.)
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 1st
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
TM-348
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B
P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342904
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0775” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-348, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969854
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0775 Pressure Control Solenoid B
The input clutch solenoid valve
monitor value is 0.4 A or less
when the input clutch solenoid
valve command value is more
than 0.75 A.
• Harness or connectors
(Solenoid valve circuit is
open or shorted.)
• Input clutch solenoid valve
BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 1st
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
P0780 SHIFT
TM-349
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P0780 SHIFT
Description INFOID:0000000005318684
The TCM detects the malfunction of low brake solenoid valve. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction
(circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation,
etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342942
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI”, “ACCELE POSI” and “GEAR” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0780” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-349, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969857
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0780 Shift Error
• When shifting from 3GR to
4GR with the selector lever in
“D” position, the gear ratio
does not shift to 1.412 (gear
ratio of 4GR)
• When shifting from 5GR to
6GR or 6GR to 7GR, the engine
speed exceeds the prescribed
speed.
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• Hydraulic control circuit
SLCT LVR POSI : D
ACCELE POSI : More than 1.0/8
GEAR : 3rd → 4th
TM-350
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID C
P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID C
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342980
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “CONSULT-III”.
Is “P0795” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-350, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969860
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P0795 Pressure Control Solenoid C
The front brake solenoid valve
monitor value is 0.4 A or less
when the front brake solenoid
valve command value is more
than 0.75 A.
• Harness or connectors
(Solenoid valve circuit is
open or shorted.)
• Front brake solenoid valve
BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 7th
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
P1585 G SENSOR
TM-351
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P1585 G SENSOR
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342981
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Shift the selector lever to manual shift gate side.
4. Start up in M1, and then upshift M2.
5. Accelerate the vehicle speed regularly from approximately 20 km/h (13 MPH) to approximately 50 km/h
(31 MPH) for 8 seconds in M2.
6. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “P1585” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-351, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969863
1.CHECK G SENSOR SIGNAL
1. Park vehicle on level surface.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Select “G SEN SLOPE” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
4. Swing the vehicle body and check that the value varies between −40.45 – 40.45%.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
2.PERFORM CALIBRATION (PART 1)
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P1585 G Sensor Circuit
• The output voltage value of G
sensor is outside the standard
for the specified period
of time caused by open circuit,
short circuit, or malfunction
of G sensor.
• The movable gauging component
of G sensor is stuck
for the specified period of
time during driving.
• G sensor
• Harness or connector
(Sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
Monitor item Condition Status
G SEN SLOPE
Level road 0%
Uphill slope Positive value (maximum 40.45%)
Downhill slope Negative value (minimum −40.45%)
TM-352
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
P1585 G SENSOR
1. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Touch “Erase”.
3. Perform calibration of G sensor. Refer to TM-313, "Special Repair Requirement".
4. Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. Refer to TM-351, "DTC Logic".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END.
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
3.CHECK G SENSOR POWER
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect G sensor connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between G sensor vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 8.
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND G SENSOR (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM connectors.
3. Check continuity between ECM vehicle side harness connector terminals and G sensor vehicle side harness
connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND G SENSOR (PART 2)
Check continuity between ECM vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6.CHECK G SENSOR
1. Remove G sensor. Refer to TM-399, "Exploded View".
2. Reconnect all the connectors.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
G sensor vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B248 3 5 V
ECM vehicle side harness connector G sensor vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M160
107
B248
2
Existed
98 1
ECM vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
M160
107
Not existed
98
P1585 G SENSOR
TM-353
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
4. Check voltage between ECM connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace G sensor. Refer to TM-399, "Exploded View".
7.PERFORM CALIBRATION (PART 2)
1. Install G sensor. Refer to TM-399, "Exploded View".
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Touch “Erase”.
4. Perform calibration of G sensor. Refer to TM-313, "Special Repair Requirement".
5. Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. Refer to TM-351, "DTC Logic".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END.
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
8.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND G SENSOR (SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT) (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM connectors.
3. Check continuity between ECM vehicle side harness connector terminal and G sensor vehicle side harness
connector terminal.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
9.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND G SENSOR (SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT) (PART 2)
Check continuity between ECM vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check ECM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to EC-700, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000004969864
G sensor calibration must be performed when removing and installing or replacing the G sensor.
1.PERFORM CALIBRATION
Perform G sensor calibration.
>> Refer to TM-313, "Special Repair Requirement".
: Direction of gravitational force
ECM connector
Ground
Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M160 98
Vertical (−1G) (A) 1.17 V
Horizontal (B) 2.5 V
Vertical (1G) (C) 3.83 V
SCIA8343J
ECM vehicle side harness connector G sensor vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M160 103 B248 3 Existed
ECM vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Terminal Connector
M160 103 Not existed
TM-354
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
P1705 TP SENSOR
P1705 TP SENSOR
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005343050
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “P1705” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-354, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969867
1.CHECK DTC OF ECM
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ENGINE”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to EC-1049, "DTC Index".
2.CHECK DTC OF TCM
With CONSULT-III
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is any DTC other than “P1705” detected?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to TM-302, "DTC Index".
3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P1705
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
Signal Circuit
TCM detects the difference between
two accelerator pedal position
signals received from
ECM via CAN communication.
Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
SLCT LVR POSI : D
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 5 km/h (3 MPH) or more
P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
TM-355
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
Description INFOID:0000000005318738
The vehicle speed signal is transmitted from unified meter and A/C amp. to TCM via CAN communication line.
The signal functions as an auxiliary device to the output speed sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM will
then use the vehicle speed signal.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005343051
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
• Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “VHCL/S SE-AT” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 60 seconds or more.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “P1721” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-356, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P1721 Vehicle Speed Signal Circuit
• The vehicle speed transmitted
from the unified meter
and A/C amp. to TCM is 5 km/
h (3MPH) or less when the
vehicle speed detected by
the output speed sensor is 20
km/h or more. (Only when
starts after the ignition switch
is turned ON.)
• The vehicle speed detected
by the output speed sensor
does not decrease despite
the 36 km/h (23 MPH) or
more of deceleration in vehicle
speed received from the
unified meter and A/C amp.
when the vehicle speed
transmitted from the unified
meter and A/C amp. to TCM
is 36 km/h (23 MPH) or more
and the vehicle speed detected
by the output speed sensor
is 24 (15 MPH) or more.
Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more
TM-356
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969870
1.CHECK DTC OF UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.
With CONSULT-III
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “METER/M&A”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to MWI-116, "DTC Index".
2.CHECK DTC OF TCM
With CONSULT-III
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”.
Is any DTC other than “P1721” detected?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to TM-302, "DTC Index".
3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
P1730 INTERLOCK
TM-357
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P1730 INTERLOCK
Description INFOID:0000000005318739
Fail-safe function to detect interlock conditions.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005343090
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
When the vehicle is driven fixed in 2GR, an input speed sensor malfunction is displayed, but this is
not an input speed sensor malfunction.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-358, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “GEAR” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle the following condition.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P1730” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-358, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Judgment of Interlock INFOID:0000000004969873
Refer to TM-298, "Fail-Safe".
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P1730 Interlock
The output speed sensor detects
the deceleration of 12 km/
h (7 MPH) or more for 1 second.
• Harness or connectors
(Solenoid valve circuit is open
or shorted.)
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
• High and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch
• Hydraulic control circuit
SLCT LVR POSI : D
GEAR : 1st through 7th
TM-358
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
P1730 INTERLOCK
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969874
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO
TM-359
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO
Description INFOID:0000000005318740
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 7GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005343091
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-360, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
With GST
1. Start the engine.
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “7TH GR FNCTN P1734” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions.
P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF
CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results”
in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P1734” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-
302, "DTC Index".
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.
2. Check DTC.
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P1734”
detected?
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4.
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-360, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P1734” is detected)>>Go to TM-360, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2)
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock.
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969877
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
GEAR : 7th
ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
Selector lever : “M” position
Gear position : 7th
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
TM-361
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005343162
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “MANU MODE SW” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Maintain the following each conditions more than 60 seconds.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “P1815” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-361, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969880
1.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “MANU MODE SW”, “NON M MODE SW”, “UP SW LEVER”, “DOWN SW LEVER”, “SFT UP ST
SW” and “SFT DWN ST SW” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check the ON/OFF operations of each monitor item.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P1815 Manual Mode Switch Circuit
• TCM monitors manual mode,
non manual mode, up or
down switch signal, and detects
as irregular when impossible
input pattern occurs
2 second or more.
• When shift up/down signal of
paddle shifter continuously
remains ON for 60 seconds.
• Harness or connectors
(These switches circuit is
open or shorted.)
• Mode select switch (Into A/T
shift selector)
• Position select switch (Into A/
T shift selector)
• Paddle shifter
SLCT LVR POSI : D
MANU MODE SW : ON
TM-362
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
Without CONSULT-III
Drive the vehicle in the manual mode, and then check that the indication of the shift position indicator matches
with the actual gear position.
1. Shift the selector lever to UP side, and then accelerate from 1GR to 7GR.
2. Shift the selector lever to − side, and then decelerate from7GR to 1GR.
3. Shift the paddle shifter (shift-up) to UP side, and then accelerate from 1GR to 7GR.
4. Shift the paddle shifter (shift-down) to DOWN side, and then decelerate from 7GR to 1GR.
Which item is abnormal?
Manual mode switch>>GO TO 2.
Paddle shifter>>GO TO 7.
2.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check manual mode switch. Refer to TM-365, "Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT (MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Item Monitor Item Condition Status
Manual mode switch
MANU MODE SW
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side ON
Other than the above OFF
NON M-MODE SW
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side OFF
Other than the above ON
UP SW LEVER
Selector lever is shifted to + side ON
Other than the above OFF
DOWN SW LEVER
Selector lever is shifted to − side ON
Other than the above OFF
Paddle shifter
SFT UP ST SW
Paddle shifter (shift-up) is pulled ON
Other than the above OFF
SFT DWN ST SW
Paddle shifter (shift-down) is pulled ON
Other than the above OFF
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Voltage (Approx.)
Connector
Terminal
+ −
M137
1
4 Battery voltage
2
3
5
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
TM-363
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. (PART 1)
1. Disconnect unified meter and A/C amp. connector.
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals and unified meter
and A/C amp. vehicle side harness connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. (PART 2)
Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
7.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect paddle shifter connectors.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 9.
8.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
M137 4 Existed
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Unified meter and A/C amp. vehicle side harness
connector Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M137
1
M66
10
Existed
2 25
3 5
5 11
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
M137
1
Not existed
2
3
5
Paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector
Voltage (Approx.)
Connector
Terminal
+ −
M38
3 1 Battery voltage
M39
TM-364
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check paddle shifter. Refer to TM-365, "Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-up)]" and TM-365,
"Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-down)]".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
9.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT (PADDLE SHIFTER CIRCUIT)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
10.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN PADDLE SHIFTER AND UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. (PART 1)
1. Disconnect unified meter and A/C amp. connector.
2. Check continuity between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals and unified meter and
A/C amp. vehicle side harness connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
11.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN PADDLE SHIFTER AND UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. (PART 2)
Check continuity between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
12.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
13.CHECK UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.
1. Reconnect all the connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Select “M RANGE SW”, “NM RANGE SW”, “AT SFT UP SW”, “AT SFT DWN SW”, “ST SFT UP SW” and
“ST SFT DWN SW” in “Data Monitor” in “METER/M&A”.
Paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
M38
1 Existed
M39
Paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector
Unified meter and A/C amp. vehicle side harness
connector Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M38
3 M66
6
Existed
M39 26
Paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
M38
3 Not existed
M39
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
TM-365
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
4. Check the ON/OFF operations of each monitor item. Refer to MWI-94, "Reference Value".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace unified meter and A/C amp. Refer to MWI-149, "Exploded View".
Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch) INFOID:0000000004969881
1.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH
Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View".
Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-up)] INFOID:0000000004969882
1.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER
Check continuity between paddle shifter (shift-up) connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-398, "Exploded View".
Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-down)] INFOID:0000000004969883
1.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER
Check continuity between paddle shifter (shift-down) connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-398, "Exploded View".
A/T shift selector connector
Condition Continuity
Connector Terminal
M137
1
4
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side Existed
Other than the above Not existed
2
Selector lever is shifted to − side Existed
Other than the above Not existed
3
Selector lever is shifted to + side Existed
Other than the above Not existed
5
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side Not existed
Other than the above Existed
Paddle shifter (shift-up) connector
Condition Continuity
Connector Terminal
M38 1 3
Paddle shifter (shift-up) is pulled Existed
Other than the above Not existed
Paddle shifter (shift-down) connector
Condition Continuity
Connector Terminal
M39 1 3
Paddle shifter (shift-down) is pulled Existed
Other than the above Not existed
TM-366
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
P2713 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID D
P2713 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID D
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005343204
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive the vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P2713” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-366, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969886
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P2713 Pressure Control Solenoid D
The high and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve monitor value is
0.4 A or less when the high and
low reverse clutch solenoid
valve command value is more
than 0.75 A.
• Harness or connectors
(Solenoid valve circuit is
open or shorted.)
• High and low reverse clutch
solenoid valve
BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 3rd
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
P2722 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID E
TM-367
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P2722 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID E
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005343272
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P2722” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-367, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969889
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P2722 Pressure Control Solenoid E
The low brake solenoid valve
monitor value is 0.4 A or less
when the low brake solenoid
valve command value is more
than 0.75 A.
• Harness or connectors
(Solenoid valve circuit is
open or shorted.)
• Low brake solenoid valve
BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 1st
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
TM-368
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
P2731 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID F
P2731 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID F
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005343273
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P2731” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-368, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969892
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P2731 Pressure Control Solenoid F
The 2346 brake solenoid valve
monitor value is 0.4 A or less
when the 2346 brake solenoid
valve command value is more
than 0.75 A.
• Harness or connectors
(Solenoid valve circuit is
open or shorted.)
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 2nd
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
P2807 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID G
TM-369
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
P2807 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID G
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005343274
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch
OFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.
Is “P2807” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-369, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969895
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause
P2807 Pressure Control Solenoid G
The direct clutch solenoid valve
monitor value is 0.4 A or less
when the direct clutch solenoid
valve command value is more
than 0.75 A.
• Harness or connectors
(Solenoid valve circuit is
open or shorted.)
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 1st
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
TM-370
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969897
1.CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector.
3. Check voltage between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 4.
2.CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE (PART 2)
Check voltage between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 5.
3.CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 1)
Check the following.
• Harness for short or open between battery positive terminal and A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector
terminal 2. Refer to PG-16, "GASOLINE ENGINE MODELS : Wiring Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY
-".
• Battery
• 10A fuse (No.36, located in the fuse, fusible link and relay box). Refer to PG-230, "GASOLINE ENGINE
MODELS : Fuse and Fusible Link Arrangement".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND A/T ASSEMBLY (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F51 2 Always Battery voltage
A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F51
1
Turn ignition switch ON Battery voltage
Turn ignition switch OFF 0 V
6
Turn ignition switch ON Battery voltage
Turn ignition switch OFF 0 V
A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
F51
5
Existed
10
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
TM-371
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector terminal and A/T assembly vehicle
side harness connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND A/T ASSEMBLY (PART 2)
Check continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 2)
Check the following.
• Harness for short or open between ignition switch and IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-34, "GASOLINE ENGINE
MODELS : Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -".
• Ignition switch
• 10A fuse (No.43, located in the IPDM E/R). Refer to PG-232, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement".
• IPDM E/R
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E7 58 F51
1
Existed
6
A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
E51
1
Not existed
6
TM-372
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005332272
TCM transmits a shift position signal and a manual mode indicator signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. via
CAN communication line. While the vehicle is running, the unified meter and A/C amp. displays a shift position
on the combination meter, according to these signals.
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000005343365
1.CHECK SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1. Start the engine.
2. Check the actual selector lever position (“P”, “R”, “N”, “D” and “DS”) and the indication of the shift position
indicator mutually coincide.
3. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and then check that the actual gear position and the indication of the
shift position indicator mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to “UP (+ side)” or “DOWN (−
side)” side (1GR ⇔ 7GR).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Go to TM-372, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005343367
1.CHECK INPUT SIGNALS
With CONSULT-III
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check the actual selector lever position (“P”, “R”, “N”, “D” and “DS”) and the indication of the “SLCT LVR
POSI” mutually coincide. Refer to TM-292, "Reference Value".
4. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and then check that the actual gear position and the indication of the
“SLCT LVR POSI” mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to the “UP (+ side)” or “DOWN (−
side)” side (1GR ⇔ 7GR). Refer to TM-292, "Reference Value".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO-1 [The actual gear position does not change, or shifting into the manual mode is not possible (no gear
shifting in the manual mode possible). Or the shift position indicator is not indicated.]>>•Check manual
mode switch. Refer to TM-365, "Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch)".
• Check A/T main system. Refer to TM-298, "Fail-Safe".
- Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-302, "DTC Index".
NO-2 (The actual gear position changes, but the shift position indicator is not indicated.)>>•Perform “Self
Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-302, "DTC Index".
NO-3 (The actual gear position and the indication on the shift position indicator do not coincide.)>>•Perform
“Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-302, "DTC Index".
NO-4 (Only a specific position or positions is/are not indicated on the shift position indicator)>>•Check the
unified meter and A/C amp. Refer to MWI-6, "Work flow".
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
TM-373
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC
FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000004969903
1.CHECK A/T SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Shift the selector lever to “P” position.
3. Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal released.
Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position?
YES >> Go to TM-373, "FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK A/T SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (PART 2)
Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal depressed.
Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Go to TM-373, "FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Diagnosis Procedure".
FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005371146
1.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect shift lock relay.
3. Check voltage between shift lock relay harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 10.
2.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT (PART 1)
Check continuity between shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3.CHECK SHIFT LOCK RELAY
Check shift lock relay. Refer to TM-377, "FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock Relay)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 2)
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Shift lock relay harness connector
Ground
Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
E52 2
Depressed brake pedal. Battery voltage
Released brake pedal. 0 V
Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
E52 1 Existed
TM-374
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 20.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT LOCK RELAY AND A/T SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector.
3. Check continuity between shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal and A/T shift selector
vehicle side harness connector terminal.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT LOCK RELAY AND A/T SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 2)
Check continuity between shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal and A/T shift selector vehicle
side harness connector terminal.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
7.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT (PART 2)
Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
8.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND SHIFT LOCK UNIT
1. Disconnect shift lock unit connector.
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector terminals and shift lock unit A/T shift selector side
connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
E52 5 Battery voltage
Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E52 3 E137 8 Existed
Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
E52 3 Not existed
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
M137 4 Existed
A/T shift selector connector Shift lock unit A/T shift selector side connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M137
8
M222
3
Existed
4 4
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
TM-375
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
9.CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
1. Remove shift lock unit. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View".
2. Check shift lock solenoid. Refer to TM-377, "FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock
Solenoid)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Replace shift lock unit. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View".
10.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 3)
1. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector.
2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 1)
1. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector.
2. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and stop lamp switch
vehicle side harness connector terminal.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
12.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 2)
Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and stop lamp switch vehicle
side harness connector terminal.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
13.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 1)
Check the following.
• Harness for short or open between battery and fuse block (J/B). Refer to PG-16, "GASOLINE ENGINE
MODELS : Wiring Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY -".
• Battery
• 10A fuse [No.7, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-229, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement".
• Fuse block (J/B)
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
14.CHECK DTC OF ICC
Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
E110 3 Battery voltage
Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E103 8F E110 3 Existed
Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
E103 8F Not existed
TM-376
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
With CONSULT-III
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ICC”.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check the DTC detected item. Refer to CCS-293, "DTC Index".
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
15.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 1)
Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-378, "FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Stop Lamp
Switch)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 18.
NO >> GO TO 16.
16.CHECK INSTALLATION POSITION OF STOP LAMP SWITCH
Adjust stop lamp switch position. Refer to BR-9, "Inspection and Adjustment" (LHD), BR-60, "Inspection and
Adjustment" (RHD).
>> GO TO 17.
17.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 2)
Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-378, "FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Stop Lamp
Switch)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-20, "Exploded View" (LHD), BR-71, "Exploded View"
(RHD).
18.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND SHIFT LOCK RELAY (PART 1)
Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and shift lock relay vehicle
side harness connector terminal.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 19.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
19.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND SHIFT LOCK RELAY (PART 2)
Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and shift lock relay vehicle
side harness connector terminal.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
20.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector.
3. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and shift lock relay
vehicle side harness connector terminal.
Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E110 4 E52 2 Existed
Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
E110 4 Not existed
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
TM-377
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 21.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
21.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 2)
Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and shift lock relay vehicle
side harness connector terminal.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 22.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
22.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 2)
Check the following.
• Harness for short or open between ignition switch and fuse block (J/B). Refer to PG-34, "GASOLINE
ENGINE MODELS : Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -".
• Ignition switch
• 10A fuse [No.3, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-229, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement".
• Fuse block (J/B)
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid) INFOID:0000000005371147
1.CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
Apply voltage to terminals 3 and 4 of shift lock unit connector, and then check that shift lock solenoid is activated.
CAUTION:
Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage.
Can the lock plate be moved up and down?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace shift lock unit. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View".
FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock Relay) INFOID:0000000005371148
1.CHECK SHIFT LOCK RELAY
Check continuity between shift lock relay terminals 3 and 5.
CAUTION:
Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage.
Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E103 4F E52 5 Existed
Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
E103 4F Not existed
Shift lock unit connector
Condition Status
Connector
Terminal
+ (fuse) −
M222 3 4
Apply 12 V direct current
between terminals 3 and 4.
Shift lock solenoid operates
TM-378
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace shift lock relay.
FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) INFOID:0000000005371149
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Check continuity between stop lamp switch connector terminals 3 and 4.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-20, "Exploded View" (LHD), BR-71, "Exploded View"
(RHD).
EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC
EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000006057558
1.CHECK A/T SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (STEP 1)
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” position.
3. Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal released.
Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position?
YES >> Go to TM-378, "EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK A/T SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (STEP 2)
Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal depressed.
Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Go to TM-378, "EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Diagnosis Procedure".
EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006057559
1.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Shift lock relay connector
Condition Continuity
Connector Terminal
E52 3 5
Apply 12 V direct current
between terminals 1 and 2.
Existed
OFF Not existed
Stop lamp switch connector
Condition Continuity
Connector Terminal
E110 3 4
Depressed brake pedal. Existed
Released brake pedal. Not existed
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M137 8
Depressed brake pedal. Battery voltage
Released brake pedal. 0 V
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
TM-379
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 5.
2.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND SHIFT LOCK UNIT
1. Disconnect shift lock unit connector.
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector terminals and shift lock unit A/T shift selector side
connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4.CHECK SHIFT LOCK UNIT
1. Remove shift lock unit. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View".
2. Check shift lock unit. Refer to TM-381, "EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift
Lock Solenoid)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Replace shift lock unit. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View".
5.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 2)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 9.
6.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 1)
Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-381, "EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Stop
Lamp Switch)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 12.
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
M137 4 Existed
A/T shift selector connector Shift lock unit A/T shift selector side connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M137
8
M222
3
Existed
4 4
Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
E110 3 Battery voltage
TM-380
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
7.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 1)
Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and A/T shift selector
vehicle side harness connector terminal.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
8.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 2)
Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
9.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector.
3. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and stop lamp switch
vehicle side harness connector terminal.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
10.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 2)
Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
11.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following.
• Harness for short or open between ignition switch and fuse block (J/B). Refer to PG-34, "GASOLINE
ENGINE MODELS : Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -".
• Ignition switch
• 10A fuse [No.3, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-229, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement".
• Fuse block (J/B)
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E110 4 M137 8 Existed
Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
E110 4 Not existed
Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E103 4F E110 3 Existed
Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
E103 4F Not existed
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
TM-381
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
12.CHECK INSTALLATION POSITION OF STOP LAMP SWITCH
Adjust stop lamp switch position. Refer to BR-9, "Inspection and Adjustment" (LHD) or BR-60, "Inspection and
Adjustment" (RHD).
>> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 2)
Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-381, "EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Stop
Lamp Switch)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-20, "Exploded View" (LHD) or BR-71, "Exploded View"
(RHD).
EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid)
INFOID:0000000006057560
1.CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
Apply voltage to terminals 3 and 4 of shift lock unit connector, and then check that shift lock solenoid is activated.
CAUTION:
Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage.
Can the lock plate be moved up and down?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace shift lock unit. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View".
EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)
INFOID:0000000006057561
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Check continuity between stop lamp switch connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-20, "Exploded View" (LHD) or BR-71, "Exploded View"
(RHD).
Shift lock unit connector
Condition Status
Connector
Terminal
+ (fuse) −
M222 3 4
Apply 12 V direct current
between terminals 3 and
4.
Shift lock solenoid operates
Stop lamp switch connector
Condition Continuity
Connector Terminal
E110 3 4
Brake pedal depressed Existed
Brake pedal released Not existed
TM-382
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000005371304
1.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check that each position indicator lamp of the selector lever position indicator turns on when shifting the
selector lever from “P” to “M” position.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Go to TM-382, "Diagnosis Procedure".
2.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR (PART 2)
Check that the night illumination of the selector lever position indicator turns on when setting the lighting
switch in 1st position.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Go to TM-382, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005371305
1.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Which item is abnormal?
Position indicator lamp>> GO TO 2.
Illumination lamp>> GO TO 11.
2.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 8.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4.CHECK SHIFT POSITION SWITCH (PART 1)
1. Disconnect shift position switch connector.
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector harness connector terminals and shift position switch connector
terminals.
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M137 10 Battery voltage
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
M137 4 Existed
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
TM-383
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View".
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT POSITION SWITCH AND SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
(PART 1)
1. Disconnect selector lever position indicator connector.
2. Check continuity between shift position switch harness connector terminals and selector lever position
indicator connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View".
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT POSITION SWITCH AND SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
(PART 2)
Check harness cladding between shift position switch connector and selector lever position indicator connector
for damage.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View".
7.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
Check selector lever position indicator. Refer to TM-385, "Component Inspection (Selector Lever Position Indicator)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
A/T shift selector harness connector Shift position switch connector
Condition Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M137
4
M221
7 Selector lever in “D”
position.
Existed
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, 11 No existed
9 Selector lever in “M”
position.
Existed
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11 No existed
10
2, 6 Selector lever in “N”
and “M” position.
Existed
3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11 No existed
3, 6 Selector lever in “D”
position.
Existed
2, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11 No existed
4, 6 Selector lever in “R”
position.
Existed
2, 3, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11 No existed
5, 6 Selector lever in “P”
position.
Existed
2, 3, 4, 7, 9, 10, 11 No existed
Shift position switch harness connector Selector lever position indicator harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M221
2
M223
3
Existed
3 4
4 5
5 7
6 6
7 8
9 2
TM-384
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
NO >> Replace damaged parts.
8.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND BCM (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and BCM vehicle
side harness connector terminal.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
9.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND BCM (PART 2)
Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
10.CHECK BCM INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL
Check BCM input/output signal. Refer to BCS-50, "Reference Value".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
11.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 2)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Check illumination circuit. Refer to INL-85, "LHD : Wiring Diagram - ILLUMINATION -" (LHD), INL-
92, "RHD : Wiring Diagram - ILLUMINATION -" (RHD).
12.CHECK SHIFT POSITION SWITCH (PART 2)
1. Disconnect shift position switch connector.
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector harness connector terminals and shift position switch connector
terminals.
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector BCM vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M137 10 M122 96 Existed
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Ground
Continuity
Connector Terminal
M137 10 Not existed
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector
Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector
Terminal
+ −
M137 7 9 Lighting switch 1ST Battery voltage
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
TM-385
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View".
13.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT POSITION SWITCH AND SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
(PART 1)
1. Disconnect selector lever position indicator connector.
2. Check continuity between shift position switch harness connector terminals and selector lever position
indicator connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View".
14.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT POSITION SWITCH AND SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
(PART 2)
Check harness cladding between shift position switch connector and selector lever position indicator connector
for damage.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View".
Component Inspection (Selector Lever Position Indicator) INFOID:0000000005371306
1.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
Check that selector lever position indicator lamps turn on.
CAUTION:
Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage.
A/T shift selector harness connector Shift position switch connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M137
7
M221
10 Existed
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 11 No existed
9
11 Existed
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10 No existed
Shift position switch harness connector Selector lever position indicator harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M221
10
M223
1
Existed
11 9
TM-386
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace the selector lever position indicator. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View".
Selector lever position indicator connector
Condition Status
Connector
Terminal
+ (fuse) −
M223
1 9
Apply 12 V direct current between
terminals 1 and 9.
Illumination lamp turns on.
3
8
Apply 12 V direct current between
terminals 3 and 8.
“N” position indicator lamp
turns on.
4
Apply 12 V direct current between
terminals 4 and 8.
“D” position indicator lamp
turns on.
5
Apply 12 V direct current between
terminals 5 and 8.
“R” position indicator lamp
turns on.
7
Apply 12 V direct current between
terminals 7 and 8.
“P” position indicator lamp
turns on.
6 2
Apply 12 V direct current between
terminals 6 and 2.
“M” mode indicator lamp
turns on.
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
TM-387
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000005288321
The diagnostics item numbers show the sequence for inspection. Inspect in order from item 1.
CAUTION:
If any malfunction occurs in the RE7R01B transmission, replace the A/T assembly.
Symptom
Diagnostic item
Control linkage
Output speed sensor
Vehicle speed signal
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Engine speed signal
Input speed sensor
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Transmission range switch
Line pressure solenoid valve
Torque converter solenoid valve
Low brake solenoid valve
Front brake solenoid valve
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
Input clutch solenoid valve
Direct clutch solenoid valve
2346 brake solenoid valve
Anti-interlock solenoid valve
CAN communication
TM-318
TM-327
TM-355
TM-354
TM-329
TM-326
TM-324
TM-323
TM-346
TM-344
TM-367
TM-350
TM-366
TM-348
TM-369
TM-368
TM-347
TM-320
Poor
performance
Driving
performance
Shift point is high in “D” position. 1 2 3
Shift point is low in “D” position. 1 2
Large
shock
When
shifting
gears
→ “D” position 3 6 5 5 4 2 1 2 5
→ “R” position 3 6 5 5 4 2 1 5
1GR ⇔ 2GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 4
2GR ⇔ 3GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 4
3GR ⇔ 4GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 2 4
4GR ⇔ 5GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 2 4
5GR ⇔ 6GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 2 4
6GR ⇔ 7GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 2 4
Downshift when accelerator
pedal is depressed
2 1 4 2 2 3
Upshift when accelerator
pedal is released
2 1 4 2 2 3
Lock-up 3 1 3 3 3 2 4
Judder Lock-up 2 1 1 4 3
Strange noise
In “R” position 2 1
In “N” position 2 1
In “D” position 2 1
Engine at idle 2 1
TM-388
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Symptom
Diagnostic item
Output speed sensor
Engine speed signal
Input speed sensor
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Battery voltage
Transmission range switch
Manual mode switch
Stop lamp switch
Line pressure solenoid valve
Torque converter solenoid valve
Low brake solenoid valve
Front brake solenoid valve
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
Input clutch solenoid valve
Direct clutch solenoid valve
2346 brake solenoid valve
Anti-interlock solenoid valve
CAN communication
TM-327
TM-329
TM-326
TM-324
TM-370
TM-323
TM-361
TM-378
TM-346
TM-344
TM-367
TM-350
TM-366
TM-348
TM-369
TM-368
TM-347
TM-320
Function
trouble
Gear
does no
change
“D” position
Locks in 1GR 1 1 1 1
Locks in 5GR 1
1GR → 2GR 1 1 1 1
2GR → 3GR 1
3GR → 4GR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4GR → 5GR 1 1
5GR → 6GR 1
6GR → 7GR 1 1 1 1 1
5GR → 4GR 1
4GR → 3GR 1 1 1
3GR → 2GR 1 1
2GR → 1GR 1 1 1
Does not lock-up 1 1 1 1 3 4 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
“M” position
1GR ⇔ 2GR 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2GR ⇔ 3GR 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3GR ⇔ 4GR 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
4GR ⇔ 5GR 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
5GR ⇔ 6GR 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
6GR ⇔ 7GR 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
TM-389
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Symptom
Diagnostic item
Control linkage
Output speed sensor
Engine speed signal
Input speed sensor
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Transmission range switch
Manual mode switch
Line pressure solenoid valve
Torque converter solenoid valve
Low brake solenoid valve
Front brake solenoid valve
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
Input clutch solenoid valve
Direct clutch solenoid valve
2346 brake solenoid valve
Anti-interlock solenoid valve
CAN communication
TM-318
TM-327
TM-329
TM-326
TM-324
TM-323
TM-361
TM-346
TM-344
TM-367
TM-350
TM-366
TM-348
TM-369
TM-368
TM-347
TM-320
Function
trouble
Poor
shifting
Slip
When shifting
gears
1GR ⇔ 2GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 2
2GR ⇔ 3GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 2
3GR ⇔ 4GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 2
4GR ⇔ 5GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2
5GR ⇔ 6GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2
6GR ⇔ 7GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2
Engine
brake
does
not
work
“D” position → “M” position 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 3
“M” position
7GR → 6GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 2 3
6GR → 5GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 2 3
5GR → 4GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 2 3
4GR → 3GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 2 2 3
3GR → 2GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 3
2GR → 1GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 3
Poor
power
transmission
Slip
With selector lever in
“D” position, acceleration
is extremely poor.
5 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2
With selector lever in
“R” position, acceleration
is extremely poor.
5 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2
While starting off by
accelerating in 1GR,
engine races.
3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2
While accelerating in
2GR, engine races.
3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 2
While accelerating in
3GR, engine races.
3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 2
While accelerating in
4GR, engine races.
3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 2
TM-390
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Function
trouble
Poor
power
transmission
Slip
While accelerating in
5GR, engine races.
3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 2
While accelerating in
6GR, engine races.
3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 2
While accelerating in
7GR, engine races.
3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 2
Lock-up 3 3 3 4 1 1 2
No creep at all. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Extremely large
creep.
1
Symptom
Diagnostic item
Control linkage
Output speed sensor
Engine speed signal
Input speed sensor
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Transmission range switch
Manual mode switch
Line pressure solenoid valve
Torque converter solenoid valve
Low brake solenoid valve
Front brake solenoid valve
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
Input clutch solenoid valve
Direct clutch solenoid valve
2346 brake solenoid valve
Anti-interlock solenoid valve
CAN communication
TM-318
TM-327
TM-329
TM-326
TM-324
TM-323
TM-361
TM-346
TM-344
TM-367
TM-350
TM-366
TM-348
TM-369
TM-368
TM-347
TM-320
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
TM-391
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Symptom
Diagnostic item
Control linkage
Output speed sensor
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Engine speed signal
Battery voltage
Transmission range switch
Stop lamp switch
Line pressure solenoid valve
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
Low brake solenoid valve
Front brake solenoid valve
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
Input clutch solenoid valve
Direct clutch solenoid valve
2346 brake solenoid valve
Anti-interlock solenoid valve
Starter relay
TM-318
TM-327
TM-354
TM-329
TM-370
TM-323
TM-378
TM-346
TM-344
TM-367
TM-350
TM-366
TM-348
TM-369
TM-368
TM-347
TM-321
Function
trouble
Power transmission
cannot be
performed
Vehicle cannot run in all position. 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Driving is not possible in “D” position.
3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Driving is not possible in “R” position.
3 2 1 1 1
Engine stall 3 4 4 5 2 1
Engine stalls when selector lever
shifted “N” → “D” or “R”.
3 4 4 2 1
Engine does not start in “N” or “P”
position.
3 1 2 1
Engine starts in position other than
“N” or “P”.
3 2 1
Poor operation
Vehicle does not enter parking condition.
1 2
Parking condition is not cancelled. 1 2
Vehicle runs with A/T in “P” position. 1 2
Vehicle moves forward with the “R”
position.
1 2
Vehicle runs with A/T in “P” position. 1 2
Vehicle moves backward with the
“D” position.
1 2
TM-392
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005288337
LHD models
JSDIA1353GB
A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
TM-393
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
1. Selector lever knob 2. Lock pin 3. Indicator plate
4. Selector lever position indicator 5. Harness connector 6. Insert finisher
7. Control rod 8. Dust cover 9. Bracket
10. Dust cover plate 11. Snap pin 12. Washer
13. Collar 14. Clip 15. Pivot pin
16. Insulator 17. Shift lock unit 18. Control device assembly
19. Adapter
: Apply multi-purpose grease.
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not describe on the above.
TM-394
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
RHD models
JSDIA1727GB
1. Selector lever knob 2. Lock pin 3. Adapter
4. A/T shift selector assembly 5. Shift lock unit 6. Clip
7. Pivot pin 8. Washer 9. Collar
10. Snap pin 11. Insulator 12. Dust cover plate
13. Bracket 14. Dust cover 15. Control rod
16. Insert finisher 17. Harness connector 18. Selector lever position indicator
A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
TM-395
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005288338
REMOVAL
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” position.
2. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector.
3. Shift the selector lever to “N” position.
4. Remove knob cover (A) below selector lever downward.
5. Pull lock pin (1) out of selector lever knob (2).
6. Remove selector lever knob.
7. Remove center console assembly. Refer to IP-37, "A/T MODELS
: Exploded View".
CAUTION:
When disconnecting selector lever position indicator connector
from shift position switch, never twist or apply an
excessive load to the connector.
8. Remove rear ventilator duct 1. Refer to VTL-10, "Exploded
View".
9. Disconnect A/T shift selector harness connector.
10. Remove harness clips from A/T shift selector assembly.
11. Shift the selector lever to “P” position.
12. Remove A/T shift selector assembly mounting bolts.
13. Slightly lift the A/T shift selector assembly (1) and slide it rightward.
Then pull it out in the diagonally right direction.
14. Remove snap pin, washers, insulator, collar and pivot pin from
A/T shift selector assembly.
15. Remove adapter from A/T shift selector assembly.
16. Remove dust cover and dust cover plate from A/T shift selector
assembly.
17. Remove dust cover from dust cover plate.
18. Remove shift lock unit from A/T shift selector assembly.
19. Remove brackets from vehicle floor panel.
20. Remove selector lever position indicator from console finisher
assembly.
a. Remove indicator assembly from console finisher assembly. Refer to IP-37, "A/T MODELS : Exploded
View".
b. Remove insert finisher from indicator assembly.
c. Remove selector lever position indicator.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Apply multi-purpose grease on the pin surface (that slides after installing a collar) of the pivot pin.
• Apply multi-purpose grease on the surface that the shift lock unit plate slides vertically.
• Refer to the followings when installing selector lever knob to A/T shift selector assembly.
1. Insert lock pin to selector lever knob.
2. Install selector lever knob over selector lever until a click is felt.
CAUTION:
• Install it straight, and never tap or apply any shock to install it.
• Never press selector button.
19. Indicator plate
: Apply multi-purpose grease.
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not describe on the above.
JPDIA0898ZZ
JPDIA0055ZZ
TM-396
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000005288339
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check the A/T position after adjusting A/T position. Refer to TM-318, "Inspection and Adjustment".
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Adjust the A/T position. Refer to TM-318, "Inspection and Adjustment".
CONTROL ROD
TM-397
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
CONTROL ROD
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005288340
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005363437
REMOVAL
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” position.
2. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector assembly. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View".
3. Remove manual lever from A/T assembly.
4. Remove control rod from manual lever.
5. Remove insulator and collar from manual lever.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Apply multi-purpose grease on the pin surface (that slides after installing collar) of the tip of the control
rod.
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000005288342
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check A/T position after adjusting A/T position. Refer to TM-318, "Inspection and Adjustment".
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Adjust A/T position. Refer to TM-318, "Inspection and Adjustment".
1. A/T assembly 2. Manual lever 3. Lock washer
4. Control rod 5. Washer 6. Insulator
7. Collar 8. Conical washer 9. Snap pin
: Apply multi-purpose grease.
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.
JSDIA1002GB
TM-398
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
PADDLE SHIFTER
PADDLE SHIFTER
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005288343
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005288344
REMOVAL
1. Remove steering column cover. Refer to IP-14, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View".
2. Disconnect paddle shifter connectors from each paddle shifter.
3. Remove paddle shifter mounting bolts and nuts.
4. Remove each paddle shifter from steering column assembly.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
1. Steering column assembly 2. Paddle shifter (shift-down) 3. Paddle shifter (shift-up)
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
JPDIA0051GB
G SENSOR
TM-399
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
G SENSOR
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005288345
CAUTION:
• Refer to TM-312, "Description" when removing or replacing G sensor.
• Never drop or strike G sensor, because it has little tolerance for impact.
• Never use power tool to avoid impact.
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005288346
CAUTION:
• Refer to TM-312, "Description" when removing or replacing G sensor.
• Never drop or strike G sensor, because it has little tolerance for impact.
• Never use power tool to avoid impact.
REMOVAL
1. Remove luggage floor spacer (RH). Refer to INT-30, "FOR EUROPE : Exploded View".
2. Disconnect G sensor connector.
3. Remove G sensor from bracket.
4. Remove bracket from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Install bracket with care of correct installation direction.
Adjustment INFOID:0000000005288347
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Refer to TM-122, "Special Repair Requirement".
1. G sensor 2. Bracket
: Vehicle front
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
JSDIA0950GB
TM-400
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
OIL PAN
OIL PAN
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005288348
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005288349
REMOVAL
1. Drain ATF through drain plug.
2. Remove exhaust mounting bracket. Refer to EX-10, "Exploded View".
3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 connectors (A).
4. Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 harness (B) from clips (1).
5. Remove bracket (2) from A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407,
"Exploded View".
1. A/T assembly 2. Oil pan gasket 3. Oil pan
4. Clip 5. Oil pan mounting bolt 6. Overflow plug
7. Drain plug 8. Drain plug gasket 9. Magnet
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
JPDIA0883GB
: Vehicle front
: Bolt
SCIA8269E
OIL PAN
TM-401
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
6. Remove clips (1).
7. Remove oil pan (2) and oil pan gasket.
8. Remove magnets from oil pan.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Clean foreign materials (gear wear particles) that adhere on the inside of the oil pan and on the magnet,
and then assembly.
• Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan gasket mounting surface of
transmission case and oil pan.
• Never reuse oil pan gasket and oil pan mounting bolts.
• Install oil pan gasket in the direction to align hole position.
• Never reuse drain plug and drain plug gasket. In addition, install new drain plug and drain plug gasket
after adjustment of A/T fluid filling.
• Tighten the oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in the
numerical order as shown in the figure after temporarily tightening
them.
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000005288350
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of malfunction.
If the ATF is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreign
particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may need replacement.
A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up.
Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and can
inhibit pump pressure.
• If frictional material is detected, replace radiator after repair A/
T. Refer to CO-42, "Exploded View".
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check for A/T fluid leakage.
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-315, "Adjustment".
: Vehicle front
: Oil pan mounting bolt
JSDIA0793ZZ
: Vehicle front
JSDIA0794ZZ
SCIA5199E
TM-402
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
AIR BREATHER HOSE
AIR BREATHER HOSE
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004969940
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004969941
REMOVAL
1. Remove propeller shaft assembly (front). Refer to DLN-116, "VK50VE : Exploded View".
2. Remove exhaust mounting bracket and three way catalyst (right bank). Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
3. Remove A/T air breather hose.
4. Remove propeller shaft assembly (rear). Refer to DLN-124, "Exploded View".
5. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View".
6. Support A/T assembly with a transmission jack.
1. Air breather tube 2. Spring washer 3. A/T assembly
4. Clip 5. A/T air breather hose 6. A/T air breather tube
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
JPDIA0866GB
AIR BREATHER HOSE
TM-403
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
7. Insert a wooden block (A) between oil pan (upper) (1) of engine
and front suspension member (2).
CAUTION:
• Always insert a wooden block between oil pan (upper) of
engine and front suspension member when removing air
breather tube. (Because VVEL control shaft position sensor
may be damaged by the interference between VVEL
control shaft position sensor and dash panel if the operation
is performed without the wooden block inserted.)
• After inserting wooden block, check it does not fall out
easily.
8. Remove rear engine mounting member with a power tool. Refer
to EM-196, "Exploded View".
9. Remove bolt fixing A/T assembly to engine with power tool.
10. Remove air breather tube.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to be crushed or blocked by folding or bending the hose when installing A/T air
breather hose.
• Be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the spool (A) portion
when inserting A/T air breather hose to the air breather
tube (for A/T) (1).
• Install A/T air breather hose to air breather tube (for A/T) so
that the paint mark is facing upward.
• Ensure clips are securely installed to brackets when installing
A/T air breather hose to brackets.
W : 150 mm (5.91 in)
D : 30 mm (1.18 in)
H : 20 mm (0.79 in)
: Vehicle front
JPDIA0923ZZ
2 : For transfer
JPDIA0867ZZ
TM-404
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004969942
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004969943
REMOVAL
1. Shift the selector lever to “N” position, and release the parking brake.
2. Remove air duct (inlet). Refer to EM-177, "Exploded View".
3. Remove engine under cover with a power tool. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
4. Remove A/T fluid cooler hose A and A/T fluid cooler hose B.
5. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 connectors (A).
6. Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 harness (B) from clips (1).
7. Remove harness bracket (2) from A/T assembly. Refer to TM-
407, "Exploded View".
8. Remove propeller shaft assembly (front). Refer to DLN-116,
"VK50VE : Exploded View".
9. Remove front drive shaft (right side). Refer to FAX-12,
"Exploded View".
10. Remove A/T fluid cooler tubes from A/T assembly and engine assembly.
11. Plug up opening such as the A/T fluid cooler tube hole.
1. A/T assembly 2. Copper washer 3. A/T fluid cooler tube
4. A/T fluid cooler tube 5. Clip 6. Bracket
7. Hose clamp 8. A/T fluid cooler hose B 9. A/T fluid cooler hose A
A. To radiator
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
JPDIA0855GB
: Vehicle front
JPDIA0902ZZ
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
TM-405
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
12. Remove clips and bracket.
13. Remove A/T fluid cooler tubes from the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to bend A/T fluid cooler tubes.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Never reuse copper washer.
• Refer to the following when installing A/T fluid cooler hoses.
*: Refer to the illustrations for the specific position each hose clamp tab.
- The illustrations indicate the view from the hose ends.
- When installing hose clamps center line of each hose clamp tab
should be positioned as shown in the figure.
- Insert fluid cooler hose according to dimension “L” described below.
Hose name Hose end Paint mark Position of hose clamp*
A/T fluid cooler hose A
Radiator assembly side Facing backward A
A/T fluid cooler tube side Facing downward B
A/T fluid cooler hose B
Radiator assembly side Facing downward C
A/T fluid cooler tube side Facing downward B
D : Vehicle front
E : Vehicle upper
JSDIA0795ZZ
(1) (2) Tube type Dimension “L”
A/T fluid cooler hose A
Radiator assembly side A End reaches the radius curve end.
A/T fluid cooler tube side B
30 mm (1.18 in) [End reaches the 2-stage bulge
(D).]
A/T fluid cooler hose B
Radiator assembly side C Insert the hose until the hose touches the radiator.
A/T fluid cooler tube side B
30 mm (1.18 in) [End reaches the 2-stage bulge
(D).]
JSDIA0882ZZ
TM-406
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
- Set hose clamps (1) at the both ends of A/T fluid cooler hoses (2)
with dimension “A” from the hose edge.
- Hose clamp should not interfere with the bulge of fluid cooler tube.
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004969944
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check for A/T fluid leakage.
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-315, "Adjustment".
Dimension “A” : 5 – 9 mm (0.20 – 0.35 in)
SCIA8123E
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
TM-407
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004969945
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004969946
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS)
from the A/T assembly.
• Be careful not to damage sensor edge.
• Always insert a wooden block between oil pan (upper) of engine and front suspension member when
removing A/T assembly from the engine. (Because VVEL control shaft position sensor may be damaged
by the interference between VVEL control shaft position sensor and dash panel if the operation
is performed without the wooden block inserted.)
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” position, and then release the parking brake.
2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
3. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector assembly. Refer to TM-397, "Exploded View".
4. Remove propeller shaft assembly (rear). Refer to DLN-124, "Exploded View".
5. Remove propeller shaft assembly (front). Refer to DLN-116, "VK50VE : Exploded View".
6. Remove manual lever from A/T assembly. Refer to TM-397, "Exploded View".
7. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS) from A/T assembly. Refer to EM-188, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
• Never subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.
1. Air breather tube 2. A/T assembly 3. Bracket
4. Bracket 5. Bracket 6. Spring washer
A. Tightening must be done following the installation procedure. Refer to TM-407, "Removal and Installation".
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
JPDIA1085GB
TM-408
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
• Never disassemble.
• Never allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front edge magnetic area.
• Never place in an area affected by magnetism.
8. Remove rear plate cover. Refer to EM-255, "Exploded View".
9. Turn crankshaft, and remove the four tightening bolts for drive plate and torque converter.
CAUTION:
When turning the crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine.
10. Remove A/T fluid cooler tube from the A/T assembly and engine. Refer to TM-404, "Exploded View".
11. Plug up openings such as the A/T fluid cooler tube hole.
12. Support A/T assembly with a transmission jack.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to allow it to collide against the drain plug when setting the transmission jack.
13. Insert a wooden block (A) between oil pan (upper) (1) of engine
and front suspension member (2).
CAUTION:
• Always insert a wooden block between oil pan (upper) of
engine and front suspension member when removing A/T
assembly from the engine. (Because VVEL control shaft
position sensor may be damaged by the interference
between VVEL control shaft position sensor and dash
panel if the operation is performed without the wooden
block inserted.)
• After inserting wooden block, check it does not fall out
easily.
14. Remove rear engine mounting member with power tool. Refer to
EM-196, "Exploded View".
15. Disconnect A/T assembly connector and 4WD solenoid harness
connector.
16. Remove harness and brackets.
17. Remove bolts fixing A/T assembly to engine with power tool.
18. Remove A/T air breather hose, transfer air breather hose and air breather tube. Refer to TM-402,
"Exploded View" (A/T), DLN-68, "VK50VE : Removal and Installation" (transfer).
19. Remove A/T assembly with transfer assembly from vehicle.
CAUTION:
• Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.
• Secure A/T assembly to a transmission jack.
20. Remove transfer assembly from A/T assembly with power tool.
Refer to DLN-70, "V9X (M/T) : Exploded View".
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal.
W : 150 mm (5.91 in
D : 30 mm (1.18 in)
H : 20 mm (0.79 in)
: Vehicle front
JPDIA0923ZZ
SCIA2203E
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
TM-409
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
• Check fitting of dowel pin ( ).
• When installing A/T assembly to the engine, be sure to check
dimension “A” to ensure it is within the reference value limit.
• When installing A/T assembly to the engine, attach the fixing bolts
in accordance with the following standard.
*: Tightening the bolt with bracket of air breather tube and spring washer.
• Align the positions of tightening bolts for drive plate with those of the torque converter, and temporarily
tighten the bolts. Then, tighten the bolts with the specified torque.
CAUTION:
• When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine.
• When tightening the tightening bolts for the torque converter after fixing the crankshaft pulley
bolts, be sure to confirm the tightening torque of the crankshaft pulley mounting bolts. Refer to
EM-212, "Exploded View".
• Rotate crankshaft several turns and check to be sure that A/T rotates freely without binding after
converter is installed to drive plate.
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004969947
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check A/T fluid leakage.
• Check A/T position after adjusting A/T position. Refer to TM-318, "Inspection and Adjustment".
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-315, "Adjustment".
• Adjust A/T position. Refer to TM-318, "Inspection and Adjustment".
• Perform G sensor calibration when replacing A/T assembly. Refer to TM-313, "Special Repair Requirement".
(Except for Russia)
JPDIA0899ZZ
B : Scale
C : Straightedge
Dimension “A” : Refer to TM-411, "Torque Converter".
JPDIA0042ZZ
Bolt symbol A B* C
Insertion direction A/T assembly to engine
Number of bolts 5 1 4
Bolt length (L)
mm (in)
70 (2.76) 65 (2.56)
Tightening torque
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
113 (12, 83) 74 (7.5, 55) JPDIA0852ZZ
TM-410
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specification INFOID:0000000004969948
• *1: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants".
• *2: The fluid capacity is the reference value.
Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs INFOID:0000000004969949
EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA
Unit: km/h (MPH)
• At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.
FOR RUSSIA
Destination For Russia Except for Russia
Transmission model code number 1XR5B 1XR5D
Stall torque ratio 1.93 : 1
Transmission gear ratio
1st 4.887
2nd 3.170
3rd 2.027
4th 1.412
5th 1.000
6th 0.864
7th 0.775
Reverse 4.041
Recommended fluid Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF*1
Fluid capacity 11.3 liter (10 Imp qt)*2
CAUTION:
• Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. Never mix with other ATF.
• Using ATF other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration driveability and A/T durability, and may damage
the A/T, which is not covered by the warranty.
Gear position
Throttle position
Full throttle Half throttle
D1 → D2 50 – 54 (31 – 34) 39 – 43 (24 – 27)
D2 → D3 79 – 87 (49 – 54) 57 – 65 (36 – 40)
D3 → D4 126 – 136 (79 – 85) 94 – 104 (58 – 65)
D4 → D5 181 – 191 (112 – 119) 138 – 148 (86 – 92)
D5 → D6 250 – 260 (155 – 162) 179 – 189 (111 – 117)
D6 → D7 250 – 260 (155 – 162) 250 – 260 (155 – 162)
D7 → D6 240 – 250 (150 – 155) 155 – 165 (96 – 103)
D6 → D5 240 – 250 (150 – 155) 95 – 105 (59 – 65)
D5 → D4 154 – 164 (96 – 102) 66 – 76 (41 – 47)
D4 → D3 103 – 113 (64 – 70) 45 – 55 (28 – 34)
D3 → D2 46 – 54 (29 – 34) 12 – 20 (7 – 12)
D2 → D1 16 – 20 (10 – 12) 4 – 8 (2 – 5)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
TM-411
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
TM
N
O
P
Unit: km/h (MPH)
• At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.
Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases INFOID:0000000004969950
• At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. (Closed throttle position signal OFF)
• At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.
Stall Speed INFOID:0000000004969951
Torque Converter INFOID:0000000004969952
Gear position
Throttle position
Full throttle Half throttle
D1 → D2 50 – 54 (31 – 34) 19 – 23 (12 – 14)
D2 → D3 79 – 87 (49 – 54) 41 – 49 (25 – 30)
D3 → D4 126 – 136 (79 – 85) 68 – 78 (42 – 48)
D4 → D5 181 – 191 (112 – 119) 99 – 109 (62 – 68)
D5 → D6 250 – 260 (155 – 162) 155 – 165 (96 – 103)
D6 → D7 250 – 260 (155 – 162) 206 – 216 (128 – 134)
D7 → D6 240 – 250 (150 – 155) 162 – 172 (101 – 107)
D6 → D5 219 – 229 (136 – 142) 105 – 115 (65 – 71)
D5 → D4 165 – 175 (103 – 109) 53 – 63 (32 – 39)
D4 → D3 110 – 120 (68 – 75) 31 – 41 (19 – 25)
D3 → D2 40 – 48 (25 – 30) 16 – 24 (10 – 15)
D2 → D1 16 – 20 (10 – 12) 7 – 11 (4 – 7)
Throttle position
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Lock-up ON Lock-up OFF
Closed throttle 47 – 55 (29 – 34) 44 – 52 (27 – 32)
Half throttle 60 – 68 (37 – 42) 57 – 65 (35 – 40)
Stall speed 2,467 – 2,767 rpm
Dimension between end of converter housing and torque converter 24.0 mm (0.94 in)
http://infiniti-akpp.ru/contact.php